Valpadana 3600

Operation and maintenance manual

ORIGINAL INSTRUCTIONS CHAPTER

Valid for tractors equipped with
TABLE OF CONTENTS
cab or ROPS models: TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION
3675F 4 cylinders INTRODUCTION, WARRANTY
1
3685F 4 cylinders
3670GE-F 3 cylinders TA
3685GE-F 3 cylinders TA SAFETY NOTES

3680GE-F-GT
2
3690GE-F-GT
36100GE-F-GT
36110GE-F-GT INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
36120GE-F-GT CAB

OPERATION

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE

CAB - MAINTENANCE
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
6

SPECIFICATIONS
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
7

Argo Tractors S.p.A.

42042 Fabbrico [RE] Italia
via G. Matteotti, 7
t. +39.0522.656111 - f. +39.0522.656476
[email protected] Publication N. 6507967M2
www.argotractors.com Release 09/2012

1
This manual was compiled in compliance with the the ISO 3600 standards and the here contained instructions
comply the requirements of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and Directive 2010/52/EC in force in the Euro-
pean Community. For tractors sold or used outside the European Community, local laws will prevail.

Main protections on the tractors discussed in this manual. [4.1.o][4.1.p][4.1.q][4.5.b][4.5.c][4.5.3]

FOOTSTEP CAB

ROPS (protection against overturning) YES YES

FOPS (protection against objects falling from above) NO YES
OPS (protection against penetration of objects from sides) NO NO
Protection against hazardous chemicals CLASS 1* CLASS 2*

* In compliance with EN 15695-1:2009

The 3675F - 3685F models Only certain markets.

The 3675F - 3685F models are not on sale in EC countries and in North America, therefore they cannot be
equipped with some of the specific features of these markets.

This operation and service manual is valid for all countries and all models. It contains photos, notes and direc-
tions both for standard and optional equipment. Therefore it can give details for parts not installed on your
tractor with respect to the local laws in force and according to ordered optional equipment.
The tractor is supplied complete with safety devices according to national or international laws. For your own
safety, please always use correctly such devices and check them for function. If you have any doubts concern-
ing their operation or use, do not hesitate to ask your Dealer for details.

WARNING: If the tractor is fitted with a cab that is not ap-

proved by the tractor’s maker, the warranty concerning the CALIFORNIA
modified functional units becomes null and void (safety Proposition 65 Warning
frame, electric and hydraulic systems, etc.). Further, it
is not possible to check for compliance with noise level Diesel engine exhaust and some of its
standards and with technical approvals. constituents are known to the State
of California to cause cancer, birth
defects, and other reproductive harm.

2
Table of contents Page n.
Section 1 Contents................................................................................................... 3
Tractor identification................................................................................. 6
Introduction.............................................................................................. 7
Warranty, pre-delivery inspections and installation................................. 7
Warranty claim.......................................................................................... 7
Spare parts warning................................................................................. 8
1
If you move............................................................................................... 8
Post-warranty service............................................................................... 8
Safety........................................................................................................ 8

Section 2 Safety Notes............................................................................................. 9

Regular use............................................................................................... 9
Safety alert symbols and terms............................................................. 10
Safety - tractor and implement.............................................................. 10
Safety - Introduction .............................................................................. 10
Safety - Advice for the operator............................................................. 10
Safety - Danger, Warning and Caution................................................... 11
Safety - Decals........................................................................................ 11
Safety - Following a safety program...................................................... 11
Safety frame........................................................................................... 12
Safety - Cab............................................................................................ 12
Safety precautions................................................................................. 13
Check your equipment........................................................................... 15
Cleaning the tractor................................................................................ 16
Save the environment............................................................................ 16
Safety - Tractor maintenance................................................................. 16
Safety - Starting up................................................................................. 17
Working in safety.................................................................................... 19
Correct manoeuvres............................................................................... 19
Working in safety.................................................................................... 19
Beware of other people......................................................................... 20
Risk of overturning................................................................................. 21
To avoid side overturning....................................................................... 21
To avoid back overturning...................................................................... 23
Dangerous operations............................................................................ 25
Implements and attachments................................................................ 26
Road transport........................................................................................ 27
Road circulation rules............................................................................. 27
Safety - After use.................................................................................... 28
Additional notes..................................................................................... 29
Risks from noise..................................................................................... 31
Positions of safety decals - All markets ................................................ 32
Positions of safety decals - Only North American markets................... 37

Section 3 Controls and instruments....................................................................... 41

Controls on platform
- Speedfive and mechanical hitch.......................................................... 42
- Powershuttle and mechanical hitch..................................................... 43
Cab controls
- Speedfive and mechanical hitch.......................................................... 44
- Powershuttle and mechanical hitch..................................................... 45
Instrument panel ................................................................................... 46
Controls on the dashboard..................................................................... 52
Hydraulic hitch controls ........................................................................ 53
Seat......................................................................................................... 54
Operator present sensor........................................................................ 55
Miscellaneous........................................................................................ 55
Tractor access........................................................................................ 56
Cab......................................................................................................... 57
Air conditioning...................................................................................... 58

3
 Table of contents Page n.
Section 4 Operation................................................................................................ 61
Starting and stopping the engine........................................................... 62
Tractor Start-up....................................................................................... 63
Clutch..................................................................................................... 64
Gearbox ................................................................................................. 64
Speedfive................................................................................................ 65
Speedfive - Ground speed tables........................................................... 67
Powershuttle and Powerfive gearbox.................................................... 70
Powershuttle - Powerfive - Ground speed table.................................... 72
Powershuttle - Operation....................................................................... 74
Powershuttle - Diagnostics.................................................................... 79
Mechanical power take-off.................................................................... 81
Electro-hydraulic power take-off ........................................................... 82
Brakes..................................................................................................... 88
Hydraulic trailer brake............................................................................. 89
Differential lock...................................................................................... 90
Two-wheel drive..................................................................................... 90
Front and rear track adjustment, 2WD . ................................................ 91
Four-wheel drive front axle - Adjusting the max. steering angle........... 91
Front and rear track adjustment, 4WD . ................................................ 92
Rear track adjustment ........................................................................... 93
Wheel track table, 4WD front and rear.................................................. 94
Wheels and tyres.................................................................................. 102
Wheel removing procedure.................................................................. 102
Tyre inflation procedure........................................................................ 103
Ballast................................................................................................... 107
Three-point linkage............................................................................... 110
Hydraulic hitch with mechanical control.............................................. 116
Electronically controlled hydraulic hitch.............................................. 120
Auxiliary control valves......................................................................... 125
Triple pump and front control valves.................................................... 130
Safety structure - ROPS....................................................................... 132
Tractor Transport.................................................................................. 133

Section 5 Routine maintenance........................................................................... 135

Routine maintenance table.................................................................. 136
Lubrication and maintenance............................................................... 138
Running in............................................................................................ 138
Fuel tank filling..................................................................................... 140
Access for inspection and maintenance.............................................. 141
Maintenance at request....................................................................... 142
Routine maintenance, 100 hours......................................................... 156
Routine maintenance, 250 hours......................................................... 159
Routine maintenance, 500 hours......................................................... 162
Bleeding air from the fuel system........................................................ 163
Routine maintenance, 1000 hours....................................................... 165
General Maintenance........................................................................... 173
Bleeding air from the brake system..................................................... 173

Section 6 Cab maintenance ................................................................................ 177

Air conditioning.................................................................................... 178
Cab air filter.......................................................................................... 180
Cab fuses.............................................................................................. 181
Electrical system - Battery.................................................................... 185
Headlights............................................................................................ 187
Changing lamps.................................................................................... 188
Fuses.................................................................................................... 189
Trailer power socket............................................................................. 192
Preparing for long idle periods............................................................. 193

4
Table of contents Page n.

Section 7 Characteristics....................................................................................... 195

Weights and dimensions...................................................................... 196
Engine................................................................................................... 203
Transmission......................................................................................... 206
1
Gearbox................................................................................................. 206
Rear axle................................................................................................ 206
Differential lock..................................................................................... 206
Power take-off....................................................................................... 207
Brakes.................................................................................................... 207
Four-wheel drive front axle (if installed)................................................ 208
Four-wheel drive front axle . ................................................................. 208
Track adjustment................................................................................... 208
Steering components............................................................................ 208
Hydraulic system................................................................................... 209
Electronically controlled hydraulic hitch............................................... 209
Mechanically controlled hydraulic hitch............................................... 209
Three-point linkage................................................................................ 209
Auxiliary control valves.......................................................................... 209
Electrical system................................................................................... 210
Cab - Safety frame................................................................................. 211
Seat....................................................................................................... 211
Optional extras...................................................................................... 211
Noise levels........................................................................................... 212
Vibration levels...................................................................................... 213
‘CE’ Declaration of Conformity.............................................................. 214
Issue of authorization............................................................................ 215
Weights................................................................................................. 215
Towing attachments.............................................................................. 217
Lubricant and fuel chart........................................................................ 220

Alphabetical index................................................................................. 221

Contents Directive 2010/52/EC............................................................. 223

5
Tractor identification
Machine identification data
The tractor and its main components are identified
by serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes. Here
under the positions of the various identification data
are illustrated.

NOTE: Identification data should be communicated to your

Dealer for requests of spare parts or service.

Tractor identification plate (Fig.1-1)

The manufacturer’s plate is placed on the right-hand side
on the front of the tractor and features the following data:
- Manufacturer
- Machine type Fig.1-1 Tractor identification plate
- Number of authorization for road circulation
- Frame number
- Manufacturing year
- Weights
- Rated engine power in kW
- CE mark

Other data are indicated on the authorization certificate.

Tractor identification number

The vehicle identification number is punched both on the
data plate and on the right-hand front side of the weight
frame. (Fig.1-2.)

Tractor identification data

The engine has its own serial number stamped on the
engine data plate (Fig.1-3).

IMPORTANT: Keep with care this operation and mainte-

nance manual on your tractor. Before driving or operat-
ing your tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual very
carefully, with special attention to the chapter concerning
safety rules. Keep the manual always ready at hand in the
manual storage compartment for easier reference. If the Fig.1-2 Tractor type and chassis serial number (on
tractor should be used also by persons that do not under- radiator core support).
stand the language of the country, the employer (or the
machine user) must translate the operating instructions
in the language understood by these operators. (Fig. 1-4).

Fig.1-4 Fig.1-3 Engine serial number

6
 Introduction - Warranty
INTRODUCTION Also compliance with and strict adherence to the opera-
tion service and maintenance conditions specified by
NOTE: This manual is distributed with tractors all over the Manufacturer are substantial part of the intended
the world. The equipment indicated as standard or use.
optional may vary according to the country where the
tractor operates. Please ask your Dealer for full details of If the tractor must be used in very heavy-duty condi-
the equipment available in your country. tions (e.g. deep water or extremely muddy soils), you
should ask your Dealer for specific instructions, to avoid
The purpose of this book is to enable the owner and invalidating the guarantee.
driver to operate the tractor in a safe manner. Provided
that the instructions are followed carefully, the equip- For the operation, service and maintenance of this trac-
ment will give years of service in our tradition. tor you need to know perfectly its specific features and
to be precisely informed about the pertaining safety
If you should not understand any part of this booklet, standards (injury prevention).
please do not hesitate to ask your Dealer for advice, as
these instructions must be correctly understood and Customers are strongly advised to turn to an official
complied with. It is advisable to perform a daily mainte- Dealer in connection with any problem regarding serv-
nance routine and to keep a register to record the work ice and adjustments.
hours of the machine.

When new parts are required it is important that only

WARRANTY, PRE-DELIVERY IN-
genuine service parts are used. Authorized Dealers sup- SPECTIONS AND INSTALLATION
ply genuine parts and can give advice regarding their The Company, when selling new goods to their Deal-
fitment and use. . Customers are therefore required to ers, gives a warranty that, subject to certain conditions,
buy their service parts only from an authorized Dealer. guarantees that the goods are free from defects in ma-
terial and workmanship. As this manual is published for
worldwide diffusion, it is impossible to give a precise
and detailed description of the terms and clauses of
the warranty granted in each country for retail sale. The
buyers of new tractors should therefore ask their Dealer
for full details.

According to the Company’s policy of continuous

improvement to its machines, changes in their techni-
cal features may be made at any time without notice.
The Company accepts no responsibility for discrepan-
cies which may occur between the specifications of its
machines and the descriptions thereof contained in its
These tractors are designed exclusively for normal an
publications.
typical agricultural operations, following the operating
instructions contained in this manual.
A Dealer is required to carry out certain activities when
THE TRACTOR IS UNSUITABLE FOR USE IN FORESTAL
supplying a new tractor. These consist of a full pre-
OPERATIONS. [4.5.b]
delivery inspection to ensure that the tractor supplied
It may become suitable for such use if a forestal kit is
is ready for immediate use, and full instruction in the
installed which is CE marked and approved and whose
basic principles of operation and maintenance of the
installation is approved by the manufacturer.
tractor. These instructions will cover instruments and
The installation and modification of the tractor must
controls, routine maintenance and safety precautions.
be carried out with the highest technical standards by
All persons who will be concerned with the operation
specialised workshops with qualified personnel. Such
and maintenance of the machine should be present for
workshops must be able to guarantee and attest the
these instructions.
risk analysis provided for in the Machinery Directive
2006/42/EC concerning the foreseen and predictable
use of the tractor for forestal work and environment, in NOTE: The Manufacturer will not accept responsibility for
order to carry out all required adaptations of the trac- any claim resulting from the fitment of non-approved parts
tor. This specific forestal kit must protect the driver’s or attachments, or unauthorized modification or alteration.
seat from falling and penetrating objects.

Use in any other way is considered as contrary to the

intended use. The Manufacturer of the tractor accepts no
liability for any damage or injury resulting from misuse;
any resulting risks must be borne solely by the user.

7
Introduction - Warranty

WARRANTY CLAIM POST-WARRANTY SERVICE

A correct installation, followed by a regular maintenance, During the warranty period it is advisable to let your Dealer
can do much to prevent malfunctions or breakdowns. If perform every repair and servicing. In this way the Dealer
operation problems should be however encountered dur- is able to keep under control operation and performances
ing the warranty period, the warranty should be claimed of your new tractor.
with the following procedure.
In order to obtain the best performances from your tractor,
The Dealer by whom you purchased the tractor should it is important to go on with regular checks and servicing
be promptly informed, stating model and serial number. even after the warranty is expired. Make use of your local
It is most important that there should be no delay, and Dealer for all major tractor services: a trained engineer
you should realise that, even where the original failure is will spot any problems between one service and the next.
covered by warranty, if the failure is not repaired imme-
diately, warranty cover may not apply. Our engineers are regularly trained and updated on the
product, servicing techniques and the use of modern
You should give your Dealer as many information as pos- service tools and diagnostic equipment. They receive
sible, for instance work hours, current type of work and regular Service Bulletins, have all Workshop Manuals and
warning signs. other such technical information to ensure that the repair
It should be noted that normal maintenance services such or service is to the standard required.
as tuning, brake/clutch adjustments, and the supply of
materials used to service the tractor (oil, filters, fuel and
antifreeze) are not covered by terms of the warranty. SAFETY
The safety of the operator is one of the main concerns
in designing and developing a new tractor. Designers
SPARE PARTS WARNING build in as many safety features as possible. However,
The fitment of parts of inferior quality may not only impair every year many accidents occur which could have been
machine performances, but also be dangerous for opera- avoided by a few seconds thought and a more careful
tor’s health and safety. The manufacturer of the tractor will approach to handling farm machinery and implements.
not take the responsibility for any loss, damage or liability Therefore you are required to read through and imple-
resulting from the fitment of such parts, and, if fitted ment the safety instructions detailed in the Safety Notes
during the normal warranty period, the manufacturer’s section of this book.
warranty may be invalidated.
CAUTION: In some of the illustrations used
IF YOU MOVE in this Operator Instruction Book, panels or
The Dealer by whom you bought your tractor is sole guards may have been removed for clarity.
responsible for the protection given by your warranty. Never operate the tractor without these com-
We recommend that any repair of your machine should ponents in position. If the removal of panels
be made by the Dealer. If you, however, move to another or guards is necessary to make a repair, they
area or the tractor must momentarily operate in an area MUST be replaced before operation.
far from the original Dealer, you should ask your Dealer
for name and address of the Dealer nearest to the new
work site, so that the warranty is transferred to the latter.
If you moved from the area of your original Dealer without
any arrangements with the new Dealer, the latter will give
you assistance for emergencies, but will charge normal
prices, unless:

a. You make it clear that the warranty has not expired,

and

b. the Dealer making the repair can make the due ar-
rangements with the original Dealer.

8
 Safety notes

Chapter 2
Safety notes
2

REGULAR USE

This is an agricultural tractor, whose function consists essentially in traction power. It is therefore specially designed to
push, pull, carry or operate some interchangeable implements for agricultural purpose, or to tow agricultural trailers.

This machine must be driven and operated by an operator suitably instructed, firmly seated and wearing a fastened seat belt.

This machine is NOT designed:

- To be driven or operated standing or from outside the cab or the operator’s seat, or without a fastened seat belt.
- To lift persons.
- To transport persons, within or outside the cab or the operator’s seat, in any condition (work or road transport).
- To be used in hazardous atmosphere.
- To be used in forestry.
- To be equipped with front loaders if the tractor is not provided with a suitable structure to protect the operator’s seat
from falling and projected objects.
- For tractors equipped with collapsible safety frame, see specific instructions in the next pages.

More basic rules

- Keep the cab doors closed while the machine is being used.
- The machine must be used only by a skilled operator who knows perfectly controls and driving technique.
- External controls of hitch and electro-hydraulic power take-off (if equipped) must be operated standing on one side
outside the tractor and keeping oneself out of the overall width of mudguards. It is expressly forbidden to operate the
controls from the rear of the tractor or standing on the inner side of wheels.
- Before any operations, carefully analyze all risks and check that the user is skilled enough to safely operate the machine.

WARNING: Improper use of the machine, specially on rough terrain or slopes, can make it tilt over. Pay
particular attention in case of rain, snow, ice or anyway on slippery ground. It may be necessary to step
out of the tractor to check personally ground quality. In the described conditions, always keep the load
as close as possible to the tractor and the ground.

WARNING: Do not try to get off the moving tractor, even if it is overturning, to avoid being crushed un-
der it, but remain seated with the well fastened seat belt and hold firmly the steering wheel.

WARNING: If the safety frame mounted on the tractor is the front two-post type, the tractor must always
be used with the frame in upright (vertical) position.

WARNING: If the tractor is used as a fixed power unit without supervision (e.g. connection to a pump unit
for irrigation), put up warnings against this dangerous situation and barriers to keep off unauthorized
personnel.

9
Safety notes

SAFETY ALERT SYMBOLS AND TERMS

This safety symbol means WARNING! BEWARE! YOUR SAFETY IS IN DANGER!

This alert symbol draws your attention on important warnings on the implement, in the manual or anywhere else. Pay
great attention whenever you see this symbol: there is a great danger of serious or deadly injuries. Follow the instruc-
tions given in the warning.

WHY IS SAFETY IMPORTANT FOR YOU?

« ACCIDENTS CAN MAIM and KILL «
« ACCIDENTS COST A HIGH PRICE «
« ACCIDENTS can be AVOIDED «

SAFETY - TRACTOR AND IMPLEMENT [4.2.a]

• The tractor is a source of mechanical and hydraulic power.
• This Operator’s Manual is compiled to cover safe working practices that are associated with the basic trac-
tor operation.
• It does not cover all operation and safety instructions relevant to all known implements and attachments that
may be fitted to your tractor in the future.
• All implements connected to the tractor must bear the CE mark (Europe only). All equipment to be connected
must be accompanied by a operation and maintenance handbook, to be read before assembling and using the
equipment.
• It is essential that operators use and understand the relevant Operator’s Manual which accompany such im-
plements and attachments not treated in this book.
• The above mentioned tractor is not suitable for forestry.

SAFETY - INTRODUCTION SAFETY - ADVICE FOR THE OPERA-

This safety section of your Operator Instruction Book is TOR
intended to point out some of the basic danger situations It is YOUR responsibility to read and understand the
that may be encountered during the normal operation and safety section in this manual before operating your tractor.
maintenance of your tractor, and to suggest possible ways You must follow these safety instructions that take you
of dealing with these situations. This section is NOT a step by step through your working day. DO NOT USE THE
replacement for other safety practices featured in other MACHINE IF YOU HAVE ANY DOUBTS:
sections of this book.
In reading this section, you will note that illustrations have
Additional precautions may be needed according to the been used to highlight certain situations. Each illustration
implements used and to work conditions in the field or is numbered and the same number appears in the text in
in repair or maintenance areas. The Manufacturer of the parenthesis. This reference number is at the end of the
tractor has no direct control over application, operation, written text concerning the picture and is composed of
inspection, lubrication or maintenance of utility tractor. two digits separated by a dash: the first digit before the
Implementation of correct safety practices in such areas dash identifies the section, the second one the progres-
is therefore YOUR own responsibility. sive number of the picture in the section. (e.g. Fig.2-34
= Figure 34 of Section 2).

Remember that YOU are the only key to safety. Good

safety practices not only protect you, but also the people
around you. Study the features in this manual and make
them a working part of your safety program.

10
 Safety notes

Keep in mind that this safety section is written only for this SAFETY - FOLLOWING A SAFETY
type of machine. Practice all other usual and customary
safe working precautions, and above all - REMEMBER -
PROGRAM
SAFETY IS YOUR RESPONSIBILITY. YOU CAN PREVENT Safe use of the tractor
SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH. Only qualified and authorized operators are able to use
farming tractors in safety. To be qualified you must under-
stand the written instructions supplied in this Operator
SAFETY - DANGER, WARNING AND Instruction Book, have training in the work area, and know
CAUTION the safety rules and regulations for the job.
Whenever you see the words and symbols shown below, Some regulations stat, for instance, that no one younger
used in this book and on decals, you MUST take note of than 18 may use machines with engines (according to
their instructions as they relate to personal safety. European directives). Tractors are such machines. It is
your responsibility to know these regulations and comply

DANGER: The symbol and the word DANGER

with them in the area or the situation in which the tractor
is used.
2
indicate an imminently hazardous situation Such regulations include, without limitation, the following
which, if not avoided, will result in DEATH instructions for a safe use of the tractor.
OR VERY SERIOUS INJURY.

WARNING: The symbol and the word WARN- WARNING: The operator must not be un-
ING indicate a potentially hazardous situa- der influence of alcohol or drugs that can
tion. If the instructions or procedures are impair his/her coordination or alert condi-
not correctly followed, it could result in tions. An operator under prescription for
DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY IN EXTREME narcotic drugs needs a medical certificate
CASES. stating if he/she is able to use the tractor
safely.

CAUTION: The word CAUTION indicates a limited risk

situation which, if not avoided, will result in MATERIAL Take the following precautions:
DAMAGES AND/OR MINOR INJURIES.
• Do not allow children or unauthorized persons to drive
or use your tractor. Keep others away from your area
IMPORTANT: The word IMPORTANT is used to identify of work.
special instructions or procedures which, if not strictly
observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of • Fasten your seat belt if the tractor is fitted with an
upright safety frame or a cab.
the machine, of the work carried out or its surroundings.
• Whenever possible, do not operate the tractor near
NOTE:The word NOTE is used to indicate points of par- ditches, pits or holes in the ground. Slow down when
ticular interest for more efficient and convenient repair steering, driving on slopes or driving over rough, slip-
or operation. pery or muddy terrain.

• Keep clear from slopes too steep to operate safely.

SAFETY - DECALS
• Drive carefully, specially on headlands, on road, near
WARNING: DO NOT remove or efface Dan- a ditch and around trees.
ger, Warning, Caution or Instruction decals. • Never let anyone else get on to the tractor or the
implement.
Any lost or effaced Danger, Warning, Caution or Instruc-
tion decals must be replaced. Replacement decals are • Hitch only to the drawbar and recommended hitch
available from your Dealer in the event of loss or damage. points. Never hitch above the central line of the rear
axle.
The actual location of these Safety Decals is illustrated at
the end of this section. • Operate the tractor smoothly, with no sudden turns,
If a second-hand tractor has been purchased, refer to starts or stops. Apply the parking brake whenever the
the illustrations at the end of this section to ensure that tractor is stopped.
all the safety warning decals are in the correct position
and readable. • Do not remove or alter any part of the equipment
or of the guards. Do not use the tractor if the safety
frame is removed or damaged. Never use attachments
that are not designed for your tractor.

11
Safety notes

SAFETY FRAME [4.1.q]

A safety frame is fitted as standard equipment to the
tractor at the time of factory assembly. It the safety frame
was removed or modified, the tractor should be equipped
with a new original and approved safety frame. The safety
frame reduces the risk of injury should the tractor tip over.
Tipping over without a safety structure can cause damage
and serious injury (Fig.2-1).

WARNING: Always wear the safety belt with the

protective structure in the upright position.
If the front two-post safety frame is mounted,
it may be collapsed only to park the tractor
or enter low spaces. Do NOT wear the safety
belt when the frame is collapsed. NEVER keep
the safety frame in the collapsed position Fig.2-1
when working with the tractor. For further
prescription,see the Chapter Safety structure
- ROPS in the Operation Section.

WARNING
• Before using the tractor ensure that the safety
frame is not damaged, that it is securely fastened
to the tractor and, if a hinged section is fitted, that
it is in upright position and secured.
• If the safety frame has been removed from the trac-
tor, or collapsed for a specific operation, it must be
refitted or erected immediately using proper tools and
applying the recommended torque value.
• DO NOT ATTACH chains, ropes or cables to the safety
frame for pulling purposes; this will cause the tractor
to tip backwards. Always pull from the tractor drawbar.
• Seat belts must always be worn and adjusted snugly Fig.2-2
except when operating with a folded down safety
frame (Fig.2-2).
• From time to time, check the seat belt for damage and
replace it if worn or damaged (Fig.2-2).

Damaged safety frames

If the tractor has rolled over or the safety frame has been
damaged (such as striking an overhead object during
transport), the safety frame must be replaced to provide
SAFETY - CAB
The safety cab is designed on purpose for this tractor
the original degree of protection.
series and complies with all law requirements concerning
After an accident, let a specialised workshop check the
safety and noise level.
safety frame, the driving seat, the safety belts and the
anchor points of the safety belts. Replace all damaged
The safety cab complies with international safety stand-
parts before using the tractor again.
ards prescribed by laws in force. It must NEVER be drilled
or modified in order to install accessories or implements.
DO NOT WELD, DRILL, BEND OR STRAIGHTEN The cab components MUST NOT be welded, nor repaired
THE SAFETY FRAME. To do so reduces the degree if damaged. Never attach tow chains or ropes to the cab
of protection ensured by the original equipment. main frame.

WARNING: Tractors equipped with cab have

WARNING: Tractors equipped with safety
a protection against objects and loads that
frame have no protection against objects
might fall from above in typical work condi-
and loads that might fall from above or be
tions, but not against objects and loads that
projected into the area normally occupied by
might be projected into the area normally
the operator.
occupied by the operator. [4.1.o]
While the safety frame protects the operator
in case of the tractor overturning, it does not
guarantee, however, the operator’s safety.
[4.1.o]

12
 Safety notes

PRECAUTIONS FOR WORKING IN

SAFETY

Protect yourself
NEVER take any risks. Wear all protective clothing and
any personal protection devices called for by the work
conditions. (Fig. 2-3).

The following personal safety devices are always

necessary:
- Hearing protection.
- Safety shoes.
2
WARNING: the tractor is not protected against
dangerous matters and emissions. If you are
Fig.2-3
working in an environment where there is a
danger of inhaling, ingesting or contacting
dangerous matters, the operator should wear
specific personal safety devices. [4.1.p][4.5.3]
DO NOT wear loose clothing, jewellery or
other items and tie up long hair that could get
entangled in controls or moving parts.

A first aid kit should be available on any work site (Fig.2-

3b).

WARNING: The tractor is designed and built to avoid

any fire risks during normal operation. Therefore, it
is not provided of a self-extinguishing system or a fire
extinguisher on board as a standard. The tractor is
anyway designed to install a 1 kg dust fire extinguisher First aid box
complying with UNI EN 3/7 2004 standard. The fire If the tractor’s owner or safety manager provides the trac-
extinguisher must be mounted in the reserved and tor with a first aid box, we recommend storing the box
indicated position (Fig.2-4a & Fig.2-4b) in a suitable place when the tractor is not used for a long
The fire extinguisher with its support can be bought time, owing to its highly perishable content.
as a kit by our Dealers or authorized workshops. The
kit consists in a fire extinguisher, support, fastening
means, directions for its mounting and a decal to be
applied in the indicated area. The decal, when applied,
declares that the tractor may not be used if the ire
extinguisher is not in its place.
It is up to the owner of the farm or to the person
responsible for safety at the farm to judge the oppor-
tunity of using the tractor in areas at high fire risk.
They are also responsible for use of the tractor with
the extinguisher duly mounted. Fig.2-3b

Fig.2-4a Fig.2-4b

13
Safety notes

Know your equipment

Know your tractor. Know how to operate all equipment
on your machine and the implements and attachments
used with it. Know the purpose of all the controls, gauges
and dials. Know the rated load capacity, speed range,
braking and steering characteristics, turning radius, and
operating clearances.

Keep in mind that rain, snow, ice, loose gravel, soft

ground, etc. can change the way your tractor operates..
Under poor conditions, slow down and be extra careful,
engage four-wheel drive, if fitted.

Study the DANGER, WARNING or CAUTION safety Fig.2-5

signs on your tractor and the information signs also.

READ THIS OPERATOR INSTRUCTION BOOK BEFORE

STARTING THE ENGINE.

STUDY IT BEFORE YOU START WORK (Fig. 2-5).

IF THERE IS SOMETHING YOU DO NOT UNDERSTAND,

ASK SOMEONE SPECIALISED (e.g. your Dealer) FOR
EXPLANATION.

IMPORTANT: This manual covers general safe practices

for agricultural tractors. It must always be kept with the
tractor. For further copies contact your Dealer.

Use all available protective devices

Keep all protective devices in place and securely fastened.
Make certain all guards, shields and safety signs are
properly installed, as specified, and are in good condition.

Fig.2-6

To help keep yourself and others around you

safe, your tractor should be equipped and kept
in perfect service order with:

• A safety frame which must always be mounted in the

upright position (Fig.2-6).
• Safety belts complying with law requirements of the • Means to access the driver’s seat.
• Driver’s seat.
various countries.
• Power take-off shields. • Controls.
• Shields against heat. • Operator’s manual.
• Shields and guards against shearing, pinching and • Slow Moving Vehicle emblem (SMV). Additional
safety guards, lights or decals and a back-up alarm
moving parts. (Fig.2-38 and 2-39) (North America).
• Rear view mirrors.
• Anti-deflagration shields on tubes, if required. Know which devices are required for safe operation of
• Dust filters in the cab your tractor. Use them at all times. Make sure they are in
• Decals and pictograms. place and in good condition. NEVER remove or disconnect
any safety device.

14
 Safety notes

Check the equipment WARNING: Diesel fuel or hydraulic fluid under

Before you begin your working day, take time to check pressure can pierce the skin or eyes and cause
your tractor and ensure that all systems are in good op- serious personal injury, blindness or death.
erational condition. Fluid leaks under pressure may not be visible.
Use a piece of cardboard or wood to find leaks.
WARNING: personal safety devices must be worn for Never use your bare hand. Wear safety goggles
each check and maintenance operation. for eye protection. If any fluid is injected into
• DO NOT smoke while refuelling the tractor. Keep any the skin, it MUST be surgically removed within
a few hours by a doctor familiar with this type
type of open flame away (Fig. 2-7). [4.1.l]
of injury (Fig.2-8).
• Check for loose, broken, missing, or damaged parts. Before applying pressure to the fuel or hydraulic system,
Have everything put into good repair. Make certain
all safety devices are in place. be sure all connections are tight and that lines, pipes,
and hoses are not damaged. Before disconnecting fuel
2
• Check safety frame and seat belt for damage. A dam- or hydraulic lines, be sure to relieve all pressure.
aged safety frame or seat belt MUST be replaced.

• Ensure that implements and attachments are properly Make sure that all hydraulic lines are correctly installed
installed and that the tractor and implement PTO RPM and not tangled.
ratings match.

• Check the tires for cuts, bulges and correct pressure. WARNING: Liquid cooling systems build up
pressure as the engine gets hot. Before remov-
Replace worn or damaged tyres. Check foot and park-
ing brakes for proper operation. Adjust if necessary. ing the radiator cap, stop the engine and let
the system cool.
• Stop the engine and wait for it to cool before refuel-
ling.
• Check the engine cooling system and add coolant as
• Check the engine oil level and add oil if required. required.

• Perform all maintenance procedures outlined in the

maintenance and adjustment section of this manual.

• Check that the PTO drive locking devices are latched.

• Check that the tractor PTO shield and driveline guards
are in place and operating properly.

• Check the tractor and implement hydraulic system.

Have any leaks or damaged parts repaired or renewed.

• HYDRODYNAMIC SYSTEMS: HOSES Hoses are an

important component in modern machines. Hoses
can change their characteristics in the course of time
because of pressure, vibrations, weather etc. Laws
in force prescribe that hoses are replaced within 6
years from their construction. WE RECOMMEND
COMPLIANCE WITH THIS RULE. [4.1.i]

Fig.2-7
WARNING: When auxiliary control valves
are used, their quick couplings can reach
high temperatures. Therefore, safety gloves
suitable for such temperatures must be
worn every time the connected implements
are connected to or disconnected from the
couplings.

Fig.2-8

15
Safety notes
Clean the tractor WARNING: Hot parts of the machine are suit-
• Keep work surfaces and engine compartments clean. ably guarded, wherever possible. This does
• Before cleaning the machine, always lower imple- not exclude, however, that great care should
ments to the ground, engage the first gear, engage be used when working on the machine, to
the parking brake, turn the engine off and remove avoid burns or scalding. [4.1.n]
the key.
• Always use specific personal safety devices for each • Before any adjustments or servicing on the electrical
system, disconnect the battery by operating the mas-
service operation.
• Clean steps, pedals and floor. Remove grease or oil.
ter disconnect switch (if equipped) or disconnecting
the cables of the battery. See the section concerning
Brush away dust or mud. In winter, scrape away snow battery servicing.
and ice. Remember - slippery surfaces are dangerous.
• When plastic parts need to be cleaned (such as con- • To prevent fire or explosion, do not go with free flames
sole, instrument panel, monitors, indicators etc), do near the battery or cold starting device. Carefully fol-
not use petrol, paraffin, diluents etc. low the directions for the use of coupling cables to
They could cause discoloration, cracking or warping avoid sparks that may cause an explosion.
of the cleaned parts..
These parts should ONLY be cleaned with water,
neutral soap and a soft cloth.
• Consult your Dealer for any repairs or adjustments;
such works should be carried out by specialised
• Remove and store implements, keys, hitches etc. in workmanship.
their proper places.
• Check regularly that all nuts and bolts are securely
tightened, specially the nuts in wheel hubs, disks or
Protect the environment rims. Tighten to the prescribed driving torques.
• It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses or soil.
Use authorized waste disposal facilities, including
civic amenity sites and garages providing facilities
• Check the oil level at regular intervals and top up
if required.
for disposal of used oil. If in doubt, contact your local
authority for advice. • Check the brakes regularly, top up the reservoir
• To get to know the correct methods to dispose of and/or adjust where necessary. Make sure that the
brakes are evenly adjusted, especially when using
oils, filters, tyres etc. contact your Dealer or the local
agency for waste recycling. a trailer.
• Only for North America:
WARNING: When it is necessary to carry out
The safety sheets of each material give information
on chemicals contained in a product, procedures to service, filling up, cleaning or adjustment
use it safely, first-aid and procedure to be followed operations in places at an height above 1.5
in case of leakage or spills. In all North America such m (e.g. engine coolant reservoir or cab air
safety sheets are available at the Dealer's. filters, work light lamps etc.) a stable and
Before any maintenance on the machine, refer to safe mean (e.g. a ladder) is required to
the above mentioned safety sheets for fluids, oils reach the service point.
etc. used in this machine. The sheets inform about
risks and safe maintenance procedures. We strongly
recommend to follow these indications during any WARNING: Work and road lights can be very
maintenance operations. hot and dangerous if on since a long time.
• Disposal of the tractor: The tractor is made up of Take care to avoid contacts that could cause
parts subject to rules and laws for their disposal. burns. If work on these lights is needed,
When the tractor is not used any more, it must be turn them off and let them cool down.
disposed of through proper agencies according to Always use safety gloves suitable for high
such rules. Do not pollute the environment with the
tractor or its parts. temperatures.
• Carry out the following operations before any opera-
tion about the tractor: engage the first gear, engage
the parking brake, turn the engine off and remove
the ignition key.

SAFETY - TRACTOR MAINTENANCE [4.1.h] Maintenance operations must be carried out when the
engine is cold. If the maintenance operation must be
CAUTION: With exception of normal service, as ex- carried out while the engine is hot (e.g. when changing
plained in the Maintenance section, all other servicing engine oil), start the engine and let it idle for the required
or reparations must be carried out by properly skilled time, then turn it off before the maintenance operation.
personnel in authorised workshops.
If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure
• DO NOT carry out maintenance operations while the indicated under “How to open the bonnet”. In this case
beware the risk of burning and shearing.
engine is hot or the tractor is moving.

Personal safety devices must be worn for each check and

maintenance operation.

16
 Safety notes

If the tractor must be lifted for servicing, take it to a suit-

ably equipped workshop.
Carry out the following operations before any operation
about the tractor: engage the four-wheel drive, the first
gear and the parking brake and put chocks to the wheels
touching the ground.
Before lifting the tractor, avoid its swinging by means of
wooden wedges applied to the front axle (Fig.2-9b): the
chocks must avoid any swinging of the tractor.
Use jack lifts of suitable capacity and apply them at the
centre of the front and rear axles (Fig. 2-9b and Fig.2-9c)
paying due attention to weight distribution. [4.1.k]
No decals for the lifting point are applied on the tractor, as
they would be too difficult to apply in the available spaces
2
and would be all too easily removed or effaced during Fig.2-9b
normal operation of the tractor. Apply the jack lift to the
lifting points (Fig. 2-10a ) according to the type of opera-
tion and following the safety procedures given before.

WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow-

ing hook.

Fig.2-9c
SAFETY - STARTING UP
Warn bystanders before starting the engine.
Before starting, walk around the whole tractor and any
attached equipment. Make sure that no one is under, on,
or close to the tractor or equipment. Let other workers
and bystanders know you are starting up and don’t start
until everyone is clear of the tractor, implements and
towed equipment.

Make sure that everyone, particularly children, is in a

safe position before starting the engine.

Mount and dismount safely. [4.1.e]

Always use ‘three point contact’ with the machine, and
face the machine when you mount it. Three point contact Fig.2-10a
means both hands and one foot or one hand and both
feet are in contact with the machine at all times during
mounting and dismounting.

Clean your shoes and wipe your hands before climbing on.
Use handrails, grab handles, ladders or steps (as provided)
when mounting or dismounting.

NEVER use control levers as a hand hold and NEVER step

on foot controls when mounting or dismounting.

NEVER try to go on or off the moving tractor.

17
Safety notes

Safety at starting [4.1.c]

WARNING: Make sure that there is enough

ventilation before starting the engine. Never
start the engine in an enclosed space. Exhaust
fumes may cause asphyxiation (Fig.2-10b).

Make sure that the tractor dual brake pedals are locked
together at all times unless you are making turns in the
field which require independent use of the brakes. Make
sure the brakes are properly adjusted so that both brakes
engage at the same time.

Adjust the seat and fasten your seat belt (if applicable, Fig.2-10b
according the description in this book),

Always start the engine from the operator’s seat, after de-
pressing the clutch pedal, with all the transmission levers
and PTO and auxiliary spool valve control levers in neutral.

DANGER: The engine must be started with the

ignition key only from the driver’s seat. DO
NOT attempt to start the engine by shorting
across the terminals of the starter motor. If
the starter circuit is bypassed to neutral, the
tractor could start with an engaged gear, with
danger of serious injury or death to bystand-
ers (Fig.2-11).

Fig.2-11

Follow recommended starting procedures.

Follow the starting procedures recommended in the
Operation section of this Operator Instruction Book. This
includes normal starting, cold starting, and the use of
starting fluids.

Overhaul the controls.

After engine ignition, overhaul all instruments and lights.
Be sure that all are operating correctly. If the machine
does not respond properly to controls, DO NOT use it
until the fault is mended.

Make sure that the starter motor solenoid valve fuse is Fig.2-12
always installed.

Starting fluid

CAUTION: Do not inject fluids (ether) to make the

engine easier to start in cold weather. The tractor is
equipped with a cold weather starting system (Fig.2-
12).

Before starting the tractor, make sure that there are no

persons or hindrances in its operating range (Fig.2-13).

Fig.2-13

18
 Safety notes
DIRECTIONS TO AVOID IMPROPER USE OF THE TRACTOR

WORKING IN SAFETY Do not start the tractor without ensuring a perfect com-
mand of speed and steering controls (Fig.2-14).
WARNING: An unbalanced tractor could over-
turn and cause injury or death. If required, put
ballast weights on their front support and on
rear wheels as described in this section of the
Operation chapter. Ballast weights must be used
according to the manufacturer’s directions.
NEVER add extra counterweights to compensate
for an overload. It is better to reduce the load.

WARNING: Keep all parts of your body inside 2

the operator's compartment while operating
the tractor.

Follow the rules when using your tractor.

Be sure the tractor is ready for the job on hand. Learn the
rated loads by heart and never exceed them. Make sure
that any implement or equipment you are going to use
does NOT exceed the load capacity of your tractor. Check
that the coupling PTO shaft/implement is correct (see the
Technical Specifications section for mass data).

Keep in mind that tractors normally operate on uneven, Fig.2-14

unpaved, and often bumpy or sloping surfaces. Operating
conditions can reduce the amount of weight you should • Before starting, inspect the work area to establish
carry or pull. the best and safest procedure. Plan your work
so that you drive as straight as possible forward.
Beware of trenches, pits, ditches, slopes, trunks
Follow safe operating practices or stumps, ponds etc. Watch for any possibly
• Operate the controls smoothly - don't jerk the steering dangerous condition. If you are using a front loader
or foldable implements or implements with high
wheel or other controls.
• DO NOT get on or off a moving tractor. Keep a firm components, watch out for obstacle in the tractor's
way.
grip on the steering wheel at all times, with the thumbs
clear of the spokes when driving the tractor.
WARNING: Accidental contact with high-volt-
• Make sure you have adequate clearance in all direc- age lines causes death. In case of contact with
tions for tractor, cab, asfety frame and implement. high-voltage conductors DO NOT leave the
• Always use specific personal safety devices for each tractor, but move the tractor and/or the loader
operation.
• NEVER play games with a tractor or equipment. in such a way as to eliminate the contact and
• NEVER attempt to work the controls except from the reach a safe distance (Fig.2-15).
operator's seat.
• Before getting off the tractor, always disengage the
PTO, lower all attachments and implements to the
ground, place the tractor in neutral, engage parking
brake, shut off the engine and remove the key.
• NEVER attempt to work the controls except from the 
 

operator’s seat. 
• Carry out the following operations before leaving the

tractor: engage the first gear, engage the parking 
brake, turn the engine off and remove the ignition



key.
As an alternative, if the tractor is to be used as a
fixed power unit, before leaving the tractor shift the
gear to neutral, engage the parking brake and make
sure there are no people within the operating range
of the machine.

Fig.2-15

19
Safety notes

Beware of other people

• Think about what you are going to do. Never al-
low persons that are not qualified or suitably skilled
to operate your tractor. They could be a danger for
themselves or for others.

WARNING: Your tractor is designed to be oper-

ated by one person. DO NOT allow others to
ride on the tractor or the implement (Fig.2-
16). Never allow anyone to ride on the imple-
ments or other equipment including trailers,
except on certain harvesting equipment, spe-
cifically designed for riders during the actual
harvest operation only (not during transport).
Such equipment must have provision for a safe
riding area. NEVER allow children on a tractor.

WARNING: Make sure you can safely control

speed and driving direction of the tractor
before moving it. Start slowly until you are Fig.2-16
sure everything is operating regularly. After
starting, turn the steering right and left to
check for correct operation. Check steering
and brake system for operation. If differential
is locked, DO NOT operate at high speed or
turn the tractor until the differential lock is
disengaged.

• Keep others away from your operation area. Never

allow anyone to stand or pass under a raised imple-
ment (Fig.2-17).

• DO NOT lift objects that cannot be contained safely

in the bucket, get the appropriate attachment. Never
allow anyone to stand on the safety frames or fend-
ers.

• When using a loader, avoid sudden stops, starts,

turns, or changes of direction. Keep loads as near
as possible to the ground during transport.

• Never stand (or allow anyone else to stand) in front Fig.2-17

of, under, or behind loaded or loading equipment.
Never drive a tractor up to someone standing in
front of a fixed object.

WARNING: NEVER lift a load over anyone WARNING: Footstep tractors equipped with
(Fig.2-17). just a safety frame are never equipped with
• Keep others away from articulation joints, hitches, an approved sun roof at the factory. If the
owner wants to mount a device as protection
drawbar, lift arms, PTO drives, cylinders, belts, pul-
leys, and other moving parts. Keep safety guards in from sun or rain, such device must not be a
place. danger during normal operation or in case of
overturning. Sun roofs normally available on
the market are no protection for the driver
against falling or penetrating objects. The de-
cal associated to the sun roof indicates that it
is not a protection against objects falling from
above (FOPS).

WARNING: NEVER stand, or allow anyone else WARNING: NEVER stand, or allow anyone else
to stand between the tractor and implement to stand between the tractor and the trailer
unless the engine is turned off and the park- unless the engine is turned off and the parking
ing brake is engaged, a gear is engaged and brake is engaged and a gear is engaged. [4.2.m]
all attachments or implements are lowered
to the ground.

20
 Safety notes

Risk of overturning
For your safety, it is mandatory that all footstep tractors
are fitted with original Roll Over Protective Structures and
seat belts (Fig.2-18).

In the event of overturning with a tractor fitted with a cab

or ROPS, hold the steering wheel firmly and DO NOT at-
tempt to leave the seat until the tractor has come to rest.
If the doors are locked, leave the tractor through the duly
indicated emergency exits (Fig.2-18).

IMPORTANT: The safe working practices listed here-

under concerns only a few cases of overturning risk.
The list is therefore NOT comprehensive of all possible
2
cases. [4.1.m]

To avoid side overturns

• Set the wheel track at the widest setting suitable for
the job being done.
Fig.2-18
• Lock the brake pedals together before driving at
transport speeds.

• Reduce speed to match operating conditions. If the

tractor is equipped with a front-end loader, carry the
bucket and load as low as possible.

• Make wide slow turns at reduced speed. DON'T let

your tractor bounce. You may loose steering control.

• DON'T pull a load too heavy for your tractor. It could

run away on the down slope or the tractor could
jackknife around a towed load.

• DON'T brake suddenly. Apply brakes smoothly and

gradually.

• When going down a slope use the throttle to slow

the tractor engine and use the same gear you would
use to up the slope. Shift into gear before you start
downhill. Fig.2-19
• Engage four-wheel drive (if equipped); this will give
greater stability.

WARNING: NEVER disengage the clutch or

attempt to shift gear after you have started
downhill.

• Always go up and down slopes following a straight upward

or downward line.

• Do not overload a front implement or a trailer. Use

suitable counterweights to keep the tractor stable
(Fig.2-20).

• NEVER use the tractor to round up animals or cattle.

Fig.2-20

21
Safety notes

• Avoid crossing steep slopes if possible. If you

must do so, avoid any holes or depressions on the
downhill side. Avoid any stumps, rocks, bumps or
raised areas on the uphill side. When operating near
ditches or banks, always keep your tractor behind
the shear line (A, Fig.2-22). Avoid ditches, embank-
ments and river banks which might cave in (Fig.2-21).

Fig.2-21 Fig.2-22

• If you need cross a steep slope, do not steer uphill,

but slow down and take a wide turn. Always drive
straight up or down a slope, never across it. When
travelling up or down a slope, keep the heavy end of
the tractor and the implement pointed uphill. (Fig.2-23)

• When driving across a slope with mounted imple-

ments, keep such implements on the uphill side
(Fig.2-24). Do not raise implements. Keep them as
low and near to the ground as possible.

• Avoid crossing steep slopes if possible. If you must

do so, avoid any holes or depressions on the downhill
side. Avoid any stumps, rocks, bumps or raised areas
on the uphill side (Fig.2-25).

Fig. 2-25

Fig. 2-24

Fig. 2-23

22
 Safety notes

To avoid rear overturns

WARNING: Hitching to the rear axle, or any
other point above the swinging drawbar, can
cause a rear overturn.

• DO NOT pull anything using the top link connection,

or from any point above the centre line of the rear
axle. Always use an approved drawbar, and only use
a drawbar pin that locks into place.

• High hitching can cause rear overturn, which may

cause serious injury or death. Hitch loads to the
drawbar only.

• Use front counterweights to increase tractor stability 2

when towing a heavy load or to counter balance a
heavy rear mounted implement (Fig.2-26).

• DO NOT overload your tractor and DO NOT ballast it Fig. 2-26

beyond its carrying capacity. Never add ballast weight
to conterbalance an overload. Reduce the load instead
(Fig.2-27).

WARNING: Overload is ALWAYS dangerous.

Check the load capacity of your tractor and
NEVER exceed it (Fig.2-28). See the Technical
Specifications section.

Fig. 2-27

Fig.2-28

23
Safety notes

• Start slowly and increase your speed gradually. DO

NOT rev the engine or drop the clutch. If the tractor
is attached to a heavy load, or immovable object,
improper clutching may cause overturn (Fig.2-30 and
2-31).

• If the front part of the tractor begins lifting, disengage

the clutch at once (Fig.2-29).

• If your tractor is bogged down in mud or frozen to

the ground, DO NOT attempt to drive forwards. The
tractor can spin around its rear wheels and overturn
(Fig.2-29). Lift any attached implement and attempt
to BACK OUT. If this is not possible, tow it out with
another vehicle.

• If you get stuck in a ditch, BACK OUT, if possible. If

you must go forward, do it slowly and carefully.
Fig.2-29
• When driving on a slope with a trailer hitched at the
back you should drive the tractor in forward gear
when moving both uphill and downhill.

• A tractor with a loaded front-end (e.g. loader, bucket

etc.) and without a rear trailer should be backed down
the slope and travel forward uphill. Always keep the
loader bucket as low as possible. (Fig.2-31b)

• Always keep the tractor in gear when going downhill.

Never let the tractor coast with clutch disengaged or
transmission in neutral.

Fig.2-30

Fig.2-31

Fig.2-31b

24
 Safety notes

General operating hazards [4.2.b][4.2.e]

• Ensure that the PTO shield (1) is in place and that the
cap (2) is fitted when the PTO driveline is not in use
(Fig. 2-32).
• Before connecting, disconnecting, cleaning or ad-
justing implements driven by the power take-off,
disengage the PTO, turn the engine off, remove the
ignition key and make sure that the PTO shaft is at
standstill (Fig.2-33).
• Ensure that all the PTO driveline guards are in place
and observe all safety signs (Fig. 2-33).
• Make sure that everyone stands clear of the tractor
before engaging the PTO. During stationary use of
your tractor, always shift the gear lever, the reverse
shuttle and the ranges to neutral, engage the parking
brake and secure the wheels of tractor and implement 2
with wooden wedges or chocks.
• When working with implements powered by power
take-off, never leave the driver’s seat unless the PTO
is disengaged, the first gear and the parking brake
are engaged, the engine is off and the ignition key
removed. As an alternative, if the tractor is to be used
as a fixed power unit, before leaving the tractor shift Fig.2-32
the gear to neutral, engage the parking brake and
make sure there are no people within the operating
range of the machine.
• DO NOT use PTO adaptors, reducers or extensions
as they extend the PTO coupler and universal joint
out beyond the protection offered by the PTO shield.
• The top link and lift rods must not be extended beyond
the point where threads begin to show.

DANGER: NEVER attempt to unplug the hy-

draulic connections, or adjust an implement
with the engine running or the PTO drive in
operation. There is a great danger of serious
or deadly injuries (Fig.2-34).

• When using chemicals, carefully follow any directions

for their use, storage and discharge. Also follow the
directions given by manufacturers of equipment for
applying chemicals. Always use specific personal
safety devices for each operation. Fig.2-33
• When operating under poor visibility conditions, or
in the dark, use your tractor field lights and reduce
your ground speed. (DO NOT use your field lights
when travelling on a roadway because rear pointed
white lights are illegal except when reversing and
may confuse following drivers).
• Operate your tractor with the wheels set at the widest
setting possible, consistent with the particular task
you are performing. To adjust wheel settings refer to
Maintenance and Adjustment section.
• Reduce your speed when operating over rough or
slippery ground and when foliage restricts your view
of hazards.
• DO NOT make sharp turns at high speed.

Fig.2-34

25
Safety notes
Implements and attachments [4.5.1.1]

WARNING: Use exclusively front loader ap-

proved by the tractor’s manufacturer, with CE
mark and parallelogram type. The installation
and modification of the tractor must be car-
ried out with the highest technical standards
by specialised workshops with qualified
personnel. Such workshops must be able to
guarantee and attest the risk analysis provided
for in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC con-
cerning the foreseen and predictable use of
the tractor with front loader, in order to carry
out all required adaptations of the tractor. Use Fig.2-35
the front loader and all supplied equipment as
prescribed by the loader’s operator manual.
WARNING: When a tractor with safety frame
is equipped with a front loader, there is a re-
IMPORTANT: Keep the loader’s operation manual together
sidual risk due to incorrect and improper us
with the tractor’s manual, always at hand in the storage
of the implement. The risk is due to objects
compartment of the tractor. Before driving or operation
falling from above. THE OPERATOR HAS NO
your tractor, it is mandatory to read this manual very care-
PROTECTION AGAINST SUCH DANGER.
fully, with special attention to the chapter concerning
safety rules. To reduce the risk:
- Use only loaders equipped with load self-leveling
WARNING: Use of the front loader and of system, commonly defined as parallelogram type.
the tractor equipped with front loader, if - Use only implements that are specifically dedicated to
not correctly carried out, and handling not the work to be done. Strictly follow all directions and
secured loads constitute a serious danger for warnings mentioned by the loader handbook. [4.1.g]
the operator and everyone standing by, due - Use the tractor and implement carefully. Drive on flat
to possible objects falling from above. (Fig. ground and avoid holes, ditches and trenches. Do not
2-35) [4.5.a] turn, start or stop abruptly.
- If a front loader is mounted, it is advisable to use
• Three-point hitch and side mounted implements make a tractor with cab or with a 4-post frame with FOPS
a much larger arc when turning than towed equipment.
Make certain to maintain enough clearance for safe safety system. The loader installer should carefully
turning. [4.2.b] analyze all risks and make all required adjustments.
• To use mounted, semi-mounted or towed equipment
and trailers it is required to use exclusively CE marked
implements, after reading their operation handbooks
carefully, giving maximum attention to risks connected
with their association to the tractor. [4.2.a]
• Implements must be hitched to the tractor by means
of the three-point linkage. It is therefore necessary to
check couplings for compatibility according to their
classes.
The implement has to be fitted with suitable supports
in order to avoid tipping or accidental shifting during
hitching.
Always check three-directional fastening to the tractor
of the mounted or semi-mounted implement, to avoid
dangerous swinging and shaking during transport and
work that could jeopardize the stability of the tractor-
implement assembly.
• The cardan shaft must be always CE-marked and
suitable to tractor-implement coupling. Follow all
directions of the operation manual, concerning both
the fastening according to connection direction and
safety rules to avoid rotation of protections (chains)
and overlaying of the telescopic tubes. Also keep
articulation angles. [4.2.e][4.2.k]
• Hitch loads to the drawbar only. Towing or attaching
Fig. 2-36
to other locations may cause the tractor to overturn
(Fig.2-36)
• Improper use of the drawbar, even if correctly posi-
tioned, can cause a rear overturn.
• DO NOT overload an attachment or towed equipment.
Use proper counterweights to maintain tractor stabil-
ity. Hitch heavy loads to the drawbar only.

26
 Safety notes

• Check for correct coupling between tow hook and

trailer. See the Towing Attachments chapter.
• Use ballast weight as recommended. NEVER add
more ballast to compensate a higher load than al-
lowed. Reduce load.
• Only North American markets. A safety chain will help
control drawn equipment should it be accidentally
separated from the drawbar while transporting. Us-
ing the proper adaptor parts, attach the chain to the
tractor drawbar support or other specified anchor
location. Provide only enough slack in the chain to
permit turning. See your Dealer for a chain with a
strength rating equal to, or greater than the gross
weight of the towed machine (Fig.2-37).
2
Fig.2-37
Road transport
Before operating your tractor on a public road, a number
of precautions must be taken.

• Family yourself - and comply - with all local bye-laws,

and national laws appropriate to your tractor.
• Lock both brake pedals together.
• Raise all implements to their transport position and
lock them in place.
• Place all implements into their narrowest transport
configuration.
• Check for correct coupling between tow hook and
trailer. See the Towing Attachments chapter.
• Disengage the PTO and differential lock.
• Make sure tractor and equipment are equipped with
slow moving vehicle (SMV) signs or beacon if the
law requires them (Fig.2-38 and 2-39).
• Make sure any required clearance flags or hazard
lights are in place and in working order.
• Make sure you use a proper safety hitch pin with a
safety clip retainer.
• Clean off all reflectors and road lights, front and rear,
Fig.2-38 - Use the symbol in force in your country
and be certain they are in working order.
• Three-point hitch and implements jutting out from
the sides make a much larger arc when turning than
towed equipment. Make certain to maintain enough
clearance for safe turning.

Road circulation rules

Before operating your tractor on a public road, a number
of precautions must be taken.

WARNING: DO NOT allow any passengers on

the tractor or towed equipment.

• Know the route you are going to travel.

• Use the prescribed lights or, if required, the rotating
beacon, both in the daytime and in the night-time
(Fig.2-39).
• North America - Use regulation lights and blinking
hazard lights when travelling on road.
• Use caution when towing a load at transport speeds
especially if the towed equipment is NOT equipped
with brakes.
• Observe all local or national regulations regarding the
road speed of your tractor.
• Use extreme caution when driving on snow-covered
or slippery roads.

Fig.2-39

27
Safety notes

• Wait for traffic to clear before entering a public road.

• Beware of blind intersections. Slow down until you
have a clear view.
• DO NOT attempt to pass at any intersection.
• Slow down for turns and curves.
• Make wide, gentle turns.
• Signal your intent to slow, stop or turn.
• Shift to a lower gear before going up or downhill.
(Fig.2-40)
• Keep tractor in gear. Never coast with the clutch
disengaged or transmission in neutral (Fig.2-40).
• Check for correct coupling between power steering on
the tractor and corresponding system on the tractor.
• STAY OUT of the path of oncoming traffic.
• Drive in your correct lane keeping as near to the curb
as possible.
• If traffic builds up behind you, pull off the road and
let it go by.
• Drive defensively. Anticipate what other drivers might
do.
• When towing a heavy load, start braking sooner than
normal and slow down gradually.
• Watch out for overhead obstructions (bridges, trees Fig.2-40
etc.).

SAFETY - AFTER USE [4.2.c]

Always stop the tractor safely (DO NO park the tractor on

a slope). Engage the parking brake, engage the Park-Lock
(if equipped), disengage the PTO, engage the lowest gear,
lower any implement to the ground, stop the engine and
remove the ignition key BEFORE leaving the driver’s seat
(Fig.2-41).

Fig.2-41

28
 Safety notes

Further notes On loose soil, wheel slip can exceed 12%.

If wheel slip is found to be greater than this amount,

The following notes are designed to complete the Opera- proceed with care as operating conditions might
tion and Maintenance Manual to ensure that your tractor quickly become unstable and cause early tyre wear.
always works safely, reliably and efficiently.
In certain conditions, it might be better to add ballast
Tractors are mainly designed for hitching implements that in order to reduce wheel slip, but this increases the
workload of the transmission and thus reduces the
are held by a drawbar or three-point linkage or for driving working life of the tractor.
implements using the PTO.
Read the operation handbook or ask your Dealer who
To obtain the greatest possible towing force, particularly will be able to help you ascertain the maximum ballast
when using a tractor with dual rear wheels, you should weight you can use in normal working conditions.
observe the following rules concerning axle loads and
wheel slip.
Using dual wheels or wider tyres, the tractor will have 2
greater grip but the workload on the transmission will
also be greater in dry and difficult soil conditions.
If an extra implement is attached, the extra loads must
conform to the specifications given in the Manual or by Dual wheels or wider tyres can sometimes be
mounted for use on slippery or sandy terrain but the
your dealer. axle weight on hard, dry surfaces must be limited as
the greater grip provided by wider tyres can damage
1. Front axle payload: 4WD tractors. the transmission.
The front axle normally bears 40% of the tractor The only torque limiter in transmission is wheel slip.
weight on the road without implements; it may thus
be necessary to add an extra weight on the front end 4. Front axle lead when four-wheel drive is en-
to ensure that the front axle has traction. gaged.
If an implement is mounted on the front end of the In a 4WD tractor, the ground speed of the front wheels
tractor, check the weight of the fully loaded implement must be slightly greater than that of the rear wheels,
by placing the front axle on a scale: the maximum in order to ensure traction.
axle load must be less than the capacity of the front
axle. The front wheel advance must be preferably between
1% and 4%, at an rate not over 5%.
Check the maximum payload capacity of the front
axle (maximum weight allowed on it) in your Opera- Greater percentages may be used only on very soft
tion and Maintenance Manual). ground.
2. Rear axle payload. The tyres supplied with your tractor have been checked
for the correct advance of the front wheels, but when
The maximum permissible payload for the rear axle you change them, make sure you use tyres of the
depends on whether or not the tractor is carrying a same make and size in order to maintain the same
weight or towing a load. speed ratio between front and rear wheels.
When the tractor is only carrying a load, without tow- If tyres of different makes are used, their size and
ing, the wheels must have sufficient capacity that is internal pressure may modify this ground speed ratio,
ensured if the tyres are of the exact size and have or advance. This could increase the load on the front
the specified number of plies. axle and lead to unacceptable operating conditions,
excessive tyre wear and, in extreme conditions, dam-
In certain conditions, extra weight may be applied to age to the front axle or to the transmission.
the rear axle but it is not normally necessary unless
the ground offers very little grip. Changes in the weight of the tractor, in the pressure
or size of the tyres can cause the tyres themselves
When fully loaded, the weight of the tractor must be to bounce. This is not only annoying for the driver
less than the maximum permissible ballasted weight in the cab, but it can also cause a loss of grip and
since the tractor cannot be loaded right up to the excessive wear in the transmission unit.
maximum static payload for each of the axles, front
and rear, at the same time.

3. Ballast and wheel slip.

Wheel slip must be measured for the tractor to oper-

ate efficiently during tillage.

On normal terrain in good operating conditions, wheel

slip should be between 4 and 10%.

29
Safety notes

5. Economy PTO. 9. Operating a dry-disc clutch.

As shown in the Operation and Maintenance Manual, Most tractors with a manual gearshift are equipped
the economy PTO on large tractors is a feature that with a dry-disc clutch for changing gear.
makes it possible to use the PTO at standard speed
using lower engine RPM rates. Since the clutch slips every time the gear is changed,
it can cause a certain amount of wear and thus cre-
This feature can only be used when the implements ate heat. To ensure long life for the clutch, it is thus
powered by the PTO are to be used only for light advisable to reduce the load of the tractor and reduce
operations, such as for sprinklers or rakes, which engine speed when starting up the tractor from a
require less than 30 H.P. standing position.

The economy PTO does not need to use the maximum Prolonged slipping at high engine speed with large
power of the engine but it is designed to save fuel. loads will cause the clutch disc to heat up, thereby
reducing its working life.
When using the Economy PTO, make sure that the
implement input shaft RPM NEVER exceeds the 10. Further instructions for the operator.
recommended RPM for the implement, e.g. max. The Operation and Maintenance Manual provides
610 RPM for a 6 spline shaft (540 RPM), and max. instructions to ensure that the tractor is always used
1170 RPM for a 21 spline shaft (1000 RPM). in safe conditions.

6. Working on slopes. If your tractor is also driven by other people, make sure
The Operation and Maintenance Manual provides that they are fully aware of these accident prevention
information on using the tractor on slopes in a safe instructions.
manner
It is forbidden to carry anyone on the outer structure
It is also important to note that, when working on of the tractor in any circumstances.
very steep slopes, the lubrication conditions in the
transmission may be reduced. This is caused by This is because the safety frame that protects against
the oil flowing towards the front or rear part of the overturning is only designed to protect persons inside
transmission unit. the cab or roll-over protection structure.

Special measures and extra lubrication may be re- 11. Chemical filters for the cab. [4.5.c]
quired when using the tractor under extreme condi- Use of a filter with chemical absorbent in air-condi-
tions. tioned cabs can increase the degree of protection in
certain applications.
Your dealer will be able to assist you if you expect to
work on slopes of over 15°. PERSONAL PROTECTION EQUIPMENT MAY BE
HOWEVER NECESSARY WHEN USING CHEMICAL
7. Remote hydraulic controls. SUBSTANCES.
The hydraulic system of the tractor may be used in Wash the tractor and driver’s seat accurately accord-
some particular applications to operate the hydraulic ing to the directions on the product label.
motors.
ALWAYS follow the instructions on the labels of the
When using these applications, note that the hydraulic chemical substances and on the filters to be used.
motors can generate considerable heat and the oil
cooling system of the tractor may not be sufficient 12. Battery
when these high-power hydraulic motors are used. For detailed information, see the sections Maintenance
- Electric system.
Some remote applications have an extra cooling sys-
tem. However, every time they are used, make sure
that the oil is cooled and filtered sufficiently in order
to avoid damage to the tractor's hydraulic system.

8. Towing heavy loads (trailers, etc.)

When heavy loads are towed, the road rules in some
countries require a supplementary braking system
(e.g. air or hydraulic trailer brakes).

Check with your dealer possible additional require-

ments for special spplications

30
 Safety notes

Risks deriving from exposure to noise Other effects

Noise characteristics and measurement Noise does not just determine aural sensation. For levels
Noise is a pressure variation in an elastic medium, gener- exceeding* 70 dBA, it causes stress by means of the
ally the air, produced by the vibration of a material body cerebral integration centers and determines a specific
(source) that determines an undesired and often annoy- neurovegetative reaction responsible for effects that lead
ing acoustic sensation. Noise is mainly characterized by: to cardiocirculatory and gastroenteric diseases.
• sound intensity or level: expresses the entity of the Amongst these, it is worthwhile noting: an increase in
pressure variation due to the sound wave. Measured in gastric acidity, a decrease in the heart rate, visual range
decibels (dB), it doubles the sound intensity and, thus, and reflex speed; a sensation of discomfort and weariness
the energy that reaches the ear. with an increased sense of fatigue.
• frequency: expresses the number of pressure varia- These effects are dangerous because they also increase
tions of the wave per second and is measured in Herz the risk of accidents.
(Hz) - acute noises have high frequencies (2000-4000 Hz 2
or more) while low-pitched noises have low frequencies Personal equipment to protect against
(250 Hz or less).
noise
Individual protective equipment attenuates the sound
How the risk is evaluated energy transmitted to the ear through the air.
The higher the sound level and exposure time, the greater This equipment is used when dangerous exposure cannot
the noise risk will be. be avoided in any other way.
Two parameters are used: There are different types of devices with different attenuat-
• LAeq (Equivalent continuous weighted level A): this ing capacities: helmets, ear muffs, ear plugs (Fig. 2-42).
is a sound level measurement that takes into account Helmets and headsets have the highest dampening capac-
noise fluctuations and the varying sensitivity of the ear ity and their use is mandatory when working off road and
to the frequencies: LAeq is measured with a sound-level noise is over the above limits.
meter; Earplugs are generally better tolerated and are particularly
• PEL (Personal Exposure Level): this is a measurement useful for prolonged exposition to lower noise levels.
that takes the various noise levels into account along
with the time the worker remains on the individual CAUTION: It is prescribed that suitable personal hear-
machines or working at determined processes: PEL ing protection be used if exposed every day to a noise
is calculated mathematically. level equal or higher than 85 dBA.

Consult the “Technical specifications” section of this

Noise Pathologies manual in relation to tractor noise measured in in-
Damage To The Hearing stantaneous conditions in compliance with the laws
Noise causes hypoacusis or deafness because it destroys in force.
the acoustic receptors, nervous cells able to transform
the mechanical sound vibrations into nervous impulses
CAUTION: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or
that, on reaching the brain, determine the aural sensation.
the side and rear windows during work. The noise in
These receptors are irreplaceable if they are destroyed and
the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the opera-
the resulting damage is irreversible: hypacusia worsens if
tor to wear headsets or other individual protection
exposure to noise continues and does not improve even
against noise.
if this terminates.
Moreover, it is also bilateral since it can be accompanied
by annoying buzzing and whistling sounds, and by intoler-
ance to loud noise.
The damage is insidious since it proceeds slowly and
unexpectedly: in the initial phase, when it is limited to a
diminished ability to perceive acute sounds (music, bells)
or the spoken voice when there is a background noise,
it can only be detected by means of an audiometric test.
Pulsating noises of great intensity lasting a very short time
are highly damaging since the ear is unable to actuate any
physiological protective measures in time.
Hypacusia from noise generally arises after several years
of exposure and depends on the PEL (risk almost null
below 80 dBA) and on individual characteristics. It is an
incurable disease: the only efficacious means of protec-
tion against it is prevention.

Fig.2-42

31
Safety notes
POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS
All markets (North America excluded)
WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Dealer for new ones.

Fig.2-43a Position on tractors with cab

1-2

3 7
4 3-15b 22
8

16

11-21
18 6-24 10-23
15
13-14 5-12

Fig.2-43b Position on footstep tractors and tractors with safety frame

1-2 3-15b
3 7
22
4

16

11
15 17 23
13-14 8-19-20 5-12

32
 Safety notes
POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS
All markets (North America excluded)
WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Dealer for new ones.

Decal 1 Decal 4

WARNING: Danger of entangle- WARNING: Danger of

ment and shearing. Keep your damaging tractor com-
hands well clear of the fan blades ponents and the brake
when the engine is running. Al-
ways keep the guards and screens
circuit in particular.
Before servicing, it is
2
mounted. essential for you to
have read through the
warnings and the in-
structions in the Op-
erator’s Manual.

Decal 2 Decal 5

WARNING: Danger of entangle- WARNING: Danger of being

ment. Keep hands well clear crushed. Your seat belt must al-
of moving parts and be careful ways be correctly fastened in a
not to get caught up in belts or tractor with cab and in a footstep
pulleys when engine is on. Keep tractor if the safety frame is in the
guards in place. upright position.

Decal 3 Decal 6
WARNING: Hot surfaces. Risk DANGER: The tractor could over-
of burns to hands and fingers. turn and crush the chest. Hold
Warning. Keep well clear of firmly on to the steering wheel
hot components, keep at a safe if the tractor is overturning. DO
distance. Keep guards in place NOT leave your seat or jump off
when the engine is running. the tractor.

33
Safety notes

Decal 7 Decal 11

DA N G E R : D a n g e r o f b e i n g WARNING: Take care. Read this

crushed. Always pull the park- book through before using the
ing brake lever and engage the machine. Read the directions for
Park Lock (if equipped) when a safe usage with the greatest at-
you stop the tractor and before tention.
getting off it.

Decal 8 Decal 12
Only with electronic power lift.
WARNING: Risk of being
DANGER: Risk of blows and seri- crushed. DO NOT allow any pas-
ous accidents. Keep to one side of senger to sit on the fenders or
the tractor when using external lift on any other part of the tractor
controls. NEVER STAND between or towed implements.
tractor and implement - you could
be hit by the implement.

Decal 9 Decal 13

DANGER: Risk of entanglement. DANGER: Risk of

Keep clear of rotating shafts. Be being crushed. DO
careful NOT to get caught up by NOT short across
the cardan shaft of the PTO drive- starter terminals
line. Keep all guards in place on to start the engine.
the transmission shafts on the This operation could
tractor and implements. put your life at risk.
Start engine only
from driving seat.

Decal 10
Only with electronic power lift.

DANGER: Risk of blows and seri-

ous accidents. Keep to one side of
the tractor when using external lift Decal 14
controls. NEVER STAND between
WARNING: Electrocution. Always disconnect the nega-
tractor and implement - you could
tive battery terminal before removing the cover of the
be hit by the implement.
solenoid and before servicing the electrical system.

34
 Safety notes

Decal 15 Decal 15b

Tractors with platform
DANGER: Hot steam or water jets.
Protect your face. Radiator under WARNING: Danger of being
pressure when engine is hot. Re- crushed. Enter or leave the trac-
move cap with caution only when tor through the left-hand side.
engine is cold.. If entering or leaving the trac-
tor through the right-hand side,
avoid any contact with control
levers.

Decal 15b
Tractors with cab 2
WARNING: Danger of being
crushed. Enter or leave the trac-
tor through the left-hand door.
Decal 16 If entering or leaving the trac-
tor through the right-hand door,
WARNING: Risk of electrocution. avoid any contact with control
Always disconnect the negative levers.
lead before the positive lead
when removing the battery or
servicing the electrical system.

Decal 17
Located on the safety ROPS for
footstep tractor.

WARNING: Risk of overturnig and

crushing. Always keep the safety
frame mounted during work.
Never use the tractor without the
safety frame..

35
Safety notes

Decal 22

WARNING: General warning. Turn off

the engine and remove the ignition
key before any servicing operations
Decal 18
and before getting off the machine for
WARNING: Use individual protections during work, any reason.
such as overalls, heavy duty gloves and safety foot-
wear.

Decal 23

WARNING: Danger of liquid under

pressure being ejected from hydraulic
Decal 19
circuits.
WARNING: Use protective headsets on all tractors with-
out cab and when noise is over 85 dBA..

Decal 24

Decal 20 [4.1.p][4.5.3] WARNING: Emergency exit indication.

WARNING: Tractors without cab have no protection
against harmful substances and dusts (protection level
1). If the tractor is used in dusty environment and to
spray phytosanitary products or chemicals generally
thought of as hazardous to health, the operator must
wear individual protections (mask, goggles) suitable
to the harmfulness of the actual product used. Decal
Used only when the fire extinguisher
is mounted (supplied as kit).

WARNING: General warning. Posi-

tion where the fire extinguisher
and its support are placed. The fire
extinguisher must be in this position
during work.

Decal 21 [4.1.p][4.5.3] Decal

WARNING: Tractors with cab have no protection Located near the front hitch (if
against harmful substances, but is protected from equipped).
dust (protection level 2). If the tractor is used to
spray phytosanitary products or chemicals generally DANGER:Beware of hanging loads.
thought of as hazardous to health, the operator must Keep at a safe distance to avoid be-
wear individual protections (mask) suitable to the ing hit or crushed.
harmfulness of the actual product used.

36
 Safety notes
POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS
Only North American markets
WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Dealer for new ones.

Fig.2-44a Location on cab tractors

1 2 4 5**

2
6

7 8

16

12
15 13-14 5**

10 - 11 9

* Only with safety frame

** Controls with electronic hitch
Fig.2-44b Location on platforms tractors with safety frame
1 2 17*-18* 5**
3

6
7
8

16

12

15 13-14 4 5**

10 - 11 9

* Only with safety frame

** Controls with electronic hitch

37
Safety notes

POSITIONS OF THE SAFETY DECALS

Only North American markets
WARNING: Decals must be always readable. Failing this, ask your Dealer for new ones.

WARNING WARNING

USE SEAT BELT.

Beware hot parts Keep seat belt adjusted snugly

To avoid personal in- Decal 1 Do not jump if

jury, keep all shields, tractor tips
covers and guards in
place whili engine is Decalcomania 4
running.

Decal 2
WARNING WARNING

Decal 5
Only with electronic power
Stand clear when lift.
Keep hands clear of fan using switch to
and belts while engine move 3 point hitch.
is running.

DANGER DANGER
WARNING
Use only mineral type brake fluid as
specified in the Operator’s Manual.

Incorrect fluid could cause brake sys-

tem fallure and loss of control, resulting
in personal injury or death.
Pull only from approv­ Rotating driveline con-
ed drawbar or lower tact may cause serious
Decalcomania 3 links of 3-point linkage injury or death.
at horizontal position Keep all driveline, tractor
and equpment sheilds in
or below.
place during operation.

Decalcomania 6

38
 Safety notes

WARNING CAUTION
Serious personal injury or ma-
chine damage may result from
overspeed of PTO driven equip-
ment.

Never use the 1000 rpm setting Read the operator instruc-
with the 6 spline shaft installed. tion Book for safety in-
formation and operating
instructions.

Decalcomania 7 Fasten your seat belt be-

2
fore tractor operation.

Start engine only when

seated in operator’s seat.
Decalcomania 11
Make sure everyone is
clear of tractor and equpe-
WARNING ment before starting en-
gine or operation.

Personal injury could result from PTO driveline separation. Keep all shields, covers
and guards and place and
1. Drawbar supplied provides standard distance “A”. Do not change. stay away from moving
PTO SHAFT SIZE DISTANCE “A” parts while engine is run-
ning.
540 35mm (1.38 in) 356mm (14.0 in)
Place transmission shift
1000 35mm (1.38 in) 406mm (16.0 in) lever in neutral and apply
parking brake before us-
ing external 3-point hitch
2. Three-point link distance “C” and mounter implement distance “D” may not be standard.
controls.
Measure distance “B” over complete lift range for
tractor and implement combination. Select driveline Apply parking brake,
length to ensure that driveline will not bottom out at lower equpment, stop
minimum distance “B” and will have sufficient overlap engine and remove key
at maximum distance. before leaving the tractor
unattended.

Wait for all movement

to stop before servicing
Decalcomania 8 tractor or equpment.

Securely support or block

lifted implements which
must be in the raised
position for servicing or
adjustment.

Couple brake pedals to-

WARNING gether for road travel.

Use flashing warning

Serious personal injury lights and SMV emblem
or machine damage when on public roads,
may result from over- except where prohibited
speed of PTO driven by law.
equipment. Decalcomania 9
Always drive with care and
Select tractor PTO attention.
speed to match imple-
ment specified speed.

Do not operate PTO

above recommended
maximum speed.

Nominal Maximum
540 630
1000 1170

Decalcomania 10 Decalcomania 12

39
Safety notes

DANGER WARNING
ROPS upper frame missing.
Start only from seat
To avoid injury or death from
with transmission and
PTO in neutral. tractor rollover, reinstall upper
frame before using tractor.
Starting in gear kills.

Decal 13 Decal 17
Located on the safety ROPS for
footstep tractor.

WARNING WARNING
Remove negative ca-
bles from batteries
before removing sole-
noid cover and before
servicing the electrical
system.

Wheneverclearance permits:
Decal 14 - Keep Rollover Protection Structure
fully extended and locked.
- Keep seat belt fastened.

When structure must be lowered:

- Drive with extra care.
- Seat belt use is not recommended.
No ROPS protection is provided in the
lowered position.

WARNING Decal 18
Located on the safety ROPS for footstep
Hight pressure steam and tractor.
hot water.
Remove filler cap with
extreme care.

Decal 15
DANGER

Shield Explosive Avoid sparks Sulphuric

eyes gas and flame acid
EXPLOSIVE GASES POISON causes severe bums
Always shield eyes and face from bat-
tery. Cigarettes, flames or sparks could Contains sulphuric acid. Avoid contact
cause battery to explode. with skin, eyes or clothing.
Do not charge or use booster cables or In event of accident flush with water
adjust post connections without proper and call a physician immediately.
instructions or training. Keep out of reach of children.

Decal 16

40
Instruments and controls

Chapter 3
Instruments and controls 3

41
Instruments and controls

Fig.3-1a

Platform - Instruments and controls

Version with mechanical reverse shuttle

NOTE: Consult the ‘Operation’ chapter for instructions 13. Adjustment of rear flow divider (optional).
on how to correctly use the controls.
14. Parking brake lever.
1. Control and instrument panel
15. Ignition switch
2. Adjustable steering wheel lock
16. Hand throttle lever:
3. Switches - Forward: = idle speed
- Rearward: = maximum speed.
4. Speed control lever
17. Mechanical PTO engagement lever
5. Brake pedals
18. PTO control lever
6. Accelerator pedal.
19. PTO speed selector lever
7. Auxiliary control valve levers
20. Range selector lever
8. Free - Available or switch to engage/disengage the
hydraulic power take-off (if equipped). 21. Main clutch disengagement pedal

9. Free - Available or front PTO (if equipped). 22. Light switch and horn.

10. Differential lock engagement button. 23. Mechanical reverse shuttle control lever

11. Front drive engagement button. 24. Free or Front hydraulic motor switch (optional)

12. Hydraulic power lift control levers

42
 Instruments and controls

Fig.3-1b

Platform - Instruments and controls

Version with Powershuttle reverse shuttle
13. Hydraulic power lift control levers
NOTE: Consult the ‘Operation’ chapter for instructions
on how to correctly use the controls. 14. Parking brake lever

1. Control and instrument panel 15. Hand throttle lever:

- Forward: = idle speed
2. Switches - Rearward: = maximum speed.

3. Light and horn switch. 16. Park-Lock engagement lever

4. Speed control lever 17. PTO speed selector lever

5. Ignition switch 18. PTO control lever

6. Brake pedals 19. Range selector lever

7. Accelerator pedal. 20. Main clutch disengagement pedal

8. Auxiliary control valve levers 21. Electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle control lever

9. Hydraulic PTO clutch engagement/disengagement 22. Adjustable steering wheel lock

switch (if equipped)
23. Adjustment of rear flow divider (optional).
10. Free - Available
24. Free or Front hydraulic motor switch (optional)
11. Differential lock engagement button.

12. Front drive engagement button.

43
Instruments and controls

Fig.3-2a

Cab - Instruments and controls 12. Auxiliary control valve levers

Version with mechanical reverse shuttle
13. Ignition switch
NOTE: Consult the ‘Operation’ chapter for instructions
on how to correctly use the controls. 14. Hand throttle lever:
- Forward: = idle speed
1. Control and instrument panel - Rearward: = maximum speed.

2. Adjustable steering wheel lock 15. Mechanical PTO engagement lever

3. Switches 16. PTO control lever

4. Speed control lever 17. PTO speed selector lever

5. Brake pedals 18. Parking brake lever.

6. Accelerator pedal 19. Range selector lever

7. Free - Available or switch to engage/disengage 20. Main clutch disengagement pedal

the hydraulic power take-off (if equipped) or Free -
Available. 21. Mechanical reverse shuttle control lever

8. Free - Available or front PTO (if equipped). 22. Light switch and horn.

9. Differential lock engagement button. 23. Front flow divider (optional)

10. Front drive engagement button. 24. Free or Front hydraulic motor switch (optional)
11. Hydraulic power lift control levers

44
 Instruments and controls

Fig.3-2b

Cab - Instruments and controls

Version with Powershuttle reverse shuttle 14. Auxiliary control valve levers

NOTE: Consult the ‘Operation’ chapter for instructions 15. Hand throttle lever:
on how to correctly use the controls. - Forward: = idle speed
1. Control and instrument panel - Rearward: = maximum speed.

2. Switches 16. Park-Lock engagement lever

3. Light and horn switch. 17. PTO speed selector lever

4. Speed control lever 18. PTO control lever

5. Ignition switch 19. Parking brake lever

6. Brake pedals 20. Range selector lever

7. Accelerator pedal 21. Main clutch disengagement pedal

8. Hydraulic PTO clutch engagement/disengagement 22. Adjustable steering wheel lock

switch.
23. Electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle control lever
9. Free - Available or front PTO (if equipped).
24. Joystick lever (optional)
10. Differential lock engagement button.
25. Front flow divider (optional)
11. Front drive engagement button.
26. Free or Front hydraulic motor switch (optional)
12. Free - Available

13. Control panels of electronic hitch.

45
Instruments and controls

Fig. 3-3 Instrument panel

Instrument panel

Warning lights (Fig.3-3)

1 - Battery charging warning light. Should go out as 7 - Red warning light. Check the oil level in the brake
soon as the engine starts. fluid reservoir. Top up with designated fluid.

2 - Engine oil pressure warning light. Should go out as 8 - Orange warning light (steady) for transmission and
soon as the engine starts. It is quite normal for this hydraulic circuit filter blockage.
light to come on if a hot engine is left to idle.
9 - Red warning light (steady) for transmission and
3 - Red warning light. It comes on when the parking hydraulic system oil filter blockage.
brake is engaged.
10- Red warning light for too hot engine coolant. (See
4 - Warning light for low pressure in hydraulic circuit engine coolant temperature indicator)
of trailer brake (if mounted and depending on the
market). 11-Red warning light of immediate engine “STOP”. It
comes on together with engine oil pressure warn-
5 - Dry air filter blockage warning light. It comes on ing light (2), tractor (7) and trailer (4) brake circuit
when the cartridge needs cleaning or replacing. oil pressure warning lights, hydraulic system low
pressure warning light (6).
6 - Red warning light (steady) for low pressure in
hydraulic transmission system. If it comes on during
work, consult your authorized Dealer’s
for help.

Warning buzzer

The buzzer comes on whenever the red warning light

for low pressure in hydraulic transmission system
should come on. In this case, ask your Dealer’s special-
ized workshop for help.

46
 Instruments and controls

3
Fig. 3-4 Instrument panel

Instrument panel
Operation indicator lights (Fig.3-4)

1- 4WD engagement indicator – orange (if mounted). 10 - Overspeed power take-off (only NAO markets).
NOTE: A flashing indicator light signals a problem with
2- 4WD engagement indicator – orange (if mounted). the controller. In this case, ask your Dealer’s specialized
workshop for help.
3- Diff lock indicator - orange.
11- Indicator of 540ECO RPM PTO engaged – orange.
4- Main beam indicator – blue.
12 - Synchronized PTO engaged indicator – orange.
5- Direction indicator light for 2nd trailer – green.
13 - Front PTO engaged indicator (if mounted) - orange.
6- Side light indicator – green.
14 - Left turn indicator light.
7- Direction indicator light for 1st trailer – green.
15 - Right turn indicator light.
8- Glow plugs pre-heating indicator (if mounted) -
orange. 16-17 - Buttons for adjustments.

9- Rear independent PTO engaged indicator – or-

ange.

47
Instruments and controls

Power take-off speed indicator - Digital

panel [4.2.d]

Fig. 3-7

The indicator (1) displays the operating rate of the PTO

with great accuracy. The operating rate of implements for
which the rotation speed must be precisely selected can
therefore be kept under constant control.
Speed indicator of the PTO engaged (2):
540 RPM; 540 ECO RPM; 1000 RPM
Fig.3-5

RPM meter
Speedometer - Digital panel
The engine rate is displayed by a pointer on the outer
graduated scale. The pointer should never reach the
2450 RPM zone which shows excessive engine speed

Fig. 3-8
Clock and hour counter

The speedometer displays the ground speed of the

tractor without considering wheel slip.The speed can be
Fig. 3-6
expressed in kph or mph, depending on the country in
which the tractor is to be used.

NOTE: if the originally fitted tyres must be changed for

Clock (1)
special jobs, the speedometer can be re-programmed
See “Instrument adjustments” to set hour and minutes.
to suit the size of the new ones.
Hour meter (2)
The hour meter (2) in the lower part of the instrument
shows the time actually worked, independent of the
engine speed rate.

• Hours are shown by 5 white digits.

• 1/10ths of an hour are shown by a yellow digit.
LCD - Powershuttle only
3 - Powerfive range indicator
1= Reduced range - Underdrive
2= Direct range

4 - Drive direction indicator

- Forward gear indicator
- Reverse gear indicator

5 - Powershuttle indicator
N = Powershuttle in neutral
F = Forward - Forward gears
R = Reverse - Reverse gears
P = Parklock engaged

48
 Instruments and controls

Engine coolant temperature gauge Instrument controls

Fig. 3-9

• Blue area = ambient temperature. Wait for the Fig.3-11a

pointer to reach the green area, indicating the
normal operating temperature. LCD1, LCD2, LCD3 refer to the 3 digital displays, while
P1 and P2 refer to the left and right selection buttons,
• Green area = normal operating temperature. respectively (Fig.3-11).

• Red area = temperature too high. When the instrument is off (ignition key OFF), LCDs 2 and
The overheating warning light (1) comes on at 105-110°C 3 do not display any character, while LCD 1 displays the
(221-230°C). Possible causes of overheating:
a. Low engine coolant level.
b. Radiator caked with mud, dust, straw, etc.
time and total hours of work.
3
By turning the ignition key from OFF to ON, the instrument
c. Build-up of deposits in coolant circuit. will conduct an initial check, it turns on all the lights and
d. Loose fan belt. the characters of LCDs 1, 2 and 3. After a few seconds,
e. Faulty thermostat. it will be set to a default status, in which LCD 1 displays
the time, time worked and the powershift range direc-
CAUTION: If the engine temperature is too high, let tion of travel. LCD 2 displays the speed (in Km/h or MPH
the engine idle immediately but do not switch it off. depending on the country) and LCD 3 shows the PTO
If the temperature gauge stays in the red, identify type and speed.
the cause immediately and seek expert advice if
necessary. By turning the key ON-OFF-ON, this always takes the tool
to the default condition illustrated above.

We will divide the actions set by keys P1 and P2 into

Normal Mode and Setup Mode.
Fuel level gauge instrument

Normal Mode
LCD2 involved only

Each time the P1 button is pressed (not for an extended

period of time), the LCD2 screen displays the Speed
(Km/h), the processed area (ha) and distance (Km).

Fig.3-10 Processed area

By briefly pressing the P2 key in the processed area
When the pointer moves into the yellow zone and the red position, the count of the processed area is activated
reserve warning light (1) comes on, there are still about (the symbol shown in Fig.3-11b starts to flash). By briefly
10 liters of fuel in the tank. pressing the P2 key again, the count stops (the relative
symbol stops flashing and stays on).

Fig.3-11b

49
Instruments and controls
Distance covered
By briefly pressing the P2 key in the distance covered
position, the count of the distance covered is activated
(the symbol shown in Fig.3-12 flashes). By briefly pressing
the P2 key again, the count stops (the relative symbol
stops flashing and stays on).

Continued pressure (more than 5 sec) of the P2 button

allows to reset such measures. Fig.3-12

By turning the ignition key ON-OFF-ON, this takes the

instrument to the default condition whilst keeping the
counts made.

Setup Mode
Access to the setup menu Fig.3-13.
To access the menu, follow the procedure below:
- Ignition key OFF (instruments cluster OFF).
- Press and hold the P1 button on the instruments cluster,
turn ignition key left to ON (cluster start-up)
NOTE: - Press and hold the P1 button P1 for at least 6
seconds after turning the ignition key to the ON position.
- The central display will indicate the software of the lin-
struments cluster for two seconds and will then display
the setup menu.
Fig.3-13
The central display show two lines:
- The top line indicates the number of the menu.
- The bottom line indicates the setup value for the menu
displayed.
Example Fig. 3-13b: The menu reported at the top in-
dicates number 2 (AC2). AC2 (corrisponds to the index
radious of the tyre), which is set to 800.
There are 8 menus listed as ACXX (eg.: AC01 is the first
one) (see Setup Menu Table). To switch from one menu to
the other, press the P2 button on the instruments cluster.
To change the value of a selected menu, press the P1 but-
ton for more than 2 seconds. The second line that shows Fig.3-13b
the value will start to flash.

Changing the setup values

After selecting the desired menu: will stop flashing.
- Press the P1 button to choose the number to edit (the - To exit the setup menu, turn off (ignition key set to OFF).
number is flashing).
- Press the P2 button to change the number.
- By pressing and holding the P1 button for 4-5 seconds,
the selected value will be selected and the lowest line

Setup Menu Table

NOTE: When the message "NOT in the Operator menu" is featured, DO NOT enter this menu.
Menu Description Operator Menu

AC1 Tool width Operator Menu

AC2 Rear tyre Operator Menu
AC3 Type of tractor NOT for the Operator menu
AC4 PdF type and PdF indication of the speed NOT for the Operator menu
AC5 Destination market NOT for the Operator menu
AC6 Operator presence switch NOT for the Operator menu
AC7 Speed reading method NOT for the Operator menu
AC8 Clock setup Operator Menu

50
 Instruments and controls

Setup mode size of the tool, type of tyre and clock.

NOTE: if you wait more than 10 seconds without con-

ducting any operation, the panel automatically exits the
setup procedure. To resume the procedure, it is neces-
sary to start from the beginning.

P2 right button to change the menu

Fig.3-14
AC1 - Size of the tool - Fig.3-14
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next line: the digit
starts to flash.
- P2 right button to increase the number of centimeters.
- Press the P1 left button to go to the number of decime-
tres: use the P2 right button to change the value.
- Press the P1 left button to go to the the digit of the me-
tres: use the P2 right button to change the value.
- To save the width of the tool, press and hold the P1 left
button for 5 seconds.
Fig.3-15
AC2 - Size of rear tyres - Fig.3-15
To the figure corresponding to installed rear
Table Fig. 3-15b
Tyres Index Radius N. 3
tyres see table Fig.3-15b.
rear
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next line: the digit
starts to flash. 14.9 LR 20 520 1
- P2 right button to to change the number from 0 to 5. 320/70 R 24 525 2
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next number: use 375/75 R 20 520 1
the P2 right button to change the value. 11.2 R 24 525 2
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next number: use 11.2 R 28 575 4
the P2 right button to change the value. 12.4 R 24 550 3
- To save the size of the rear tyres, press and hold the P1 12.4 R 28 600 6
left button for 5 seconds. 13.6 R 24 575 4
360/70 R 24 550 3
360/70 R 28 600 6
AC8 - Clock - Fig.3-16 13.6 R 28 625 7
- Press the P1 left button to go to the next line: the 14.9 R 24 600 6
minutes start to flash. 14.9 R 28 650 9
- P2 right button to increase the numer of minutes from 16.9 R 24 625 7
0 to 60. 380/70 R 24 575 4
- Press the P1 left button to go to the number of hours: P2 380/70 R 28 625 7
right button to change the value from 01 to 24h. 420/70 R 24 600 6
- To save the time press and width of the tool, press and 420/70 R 28 650 9
hold the P1 left button for 5 seconds. 440/65 R 24 575 4

Fig.3-16

51
Instruments and controls

Dashboard
Fig. 3-17a Dashboard with mechanical reverse shuttle
Fig. 3-17b Dashboard with Powershuttle
Light switch (1-Fig.3-18)
(1-Fig.3-17a) mechanical reverse shuttle
(1-Fig.3-17b) powershuttle

1 - Light switch for direction indicators and horn.

Only operates with ignition switch in the contact
position.
A- Forwards: right hand direction indicator.
B- Back: left hand direction indicator.
C- Pressed: horn.

1 - Road light switch: turn the knob at the end of the

lever to operate the lights. Fig. 3-17a Dashboard with mechanical reverse shuttle

Lights off.

Side lights on.

Dipped beams.
Pushed down: driving beams.

Rotating beacon switch (with light switch on)

(2 - Fig. 3-17a/b) (only for some models)
0 - Beacon off.
1 - Beacon on.

Hazard light switch (3 - Fig.3-17a/b)

0 - Lights off. Fig. 3-17b Dashboard with Powershuttle
1 - Hazard lights on.

Field light switch (with light switch on)

(4 - Fig. 3-17a/b)
0 - Field light off.
1 - Field light on.

Ignition switch
(5-Fig.3-17a)(5-Fig.3-17b)

STOP - No circuit powered. Engine stopped. The

key can be removed.

- Contact position. Various users powered.

Indicators and controls on.

- Thermostarter preheating position for

cold weather starting.

- Engine start position. Key automatically

START returns to power on position when re-
leased.

Steering wheel adjustment (6-Fig.3-17a/b) (if fit-

ted)
- Unscrew the knob to adjust the steering wheel
height.
- Tighten the knob again to lock the steering wheel
Fig. 3-18- Light and horn switch.
in the required position.

52
 Instruments and controls

Mechanically controlled hitch

The electronically controlled hydraulic hitch is standard
equipment.
Fig. 3-19 shows the sector with control levers:

1 - Lift link control lever.

2 - Selector lever for draft control, position control, and
draft and position control (INTERMIX).
3 - Pawl locking A lever.
4 - Free - Available or switch to engage/disengage
the hydraulic power take-off (if equipped) or Free -
Available.
5 - Free - Available or front PTO (if equipped).
6 - Diff lock engaging unit switch.
7 - 4WD engaging switch. Fig. 3-19
8 - Flow governor (optional).
9 - Hydraulic motor switch (optional).

Controls with electronically con-

trolled hydraulic hitch
The electronically controlled hydraulic hitch is available
as an option.

Fig. 3-19b shows controls on the RH control panel:

1 - Control panels of electronic hitch.
2 - Yellow switch for electro-hydraulic PTO engage-
ment.
3 - Free - Available or front PTO (if equipped).
4 - Diff lock engaging unit switch.
5 - 4WD engaging switch.
6 - Free - Available
7 - Switch (optional) for hydraulic motor control.

Fig. 3-19b

53
Instruments and controls

Seat [4.1.a]
(Fig.3-20)
The driver’s seat can be adjusted in suspension and
distance from controls.

Seat suspension
The suspension can be changed according to the
driver’s body weight by means of a knob (1).

Hard suspension: turn the knob in a clockwise

direction (+).

Soft suspension: turn the knob in an anti-

clockwise direction (-).

Horizontal adjustment

Release the lever (2) to move the seat forward or

backward.

Fig. 3-20 - Driver’s seat:

1 - Suspension adjustment;
2 - Horizontal adjustment.

De Luxe seat
(option)
(Fig.3-20B)
The driver’s seat can be adjusted in suspension and
distance from controls.

Horizontal adjustment
Release the lever (2) to move the seat forward or
backward.

Seat suspension
The suspension can be changed according to the driver’s
body weight by means of a knob (1).
- Hard suspension: turn the knob in a clockwise direc-
tion (+).
- Soft suspension: turn the knob in an anti-clockwise
direction (-).

Fig. 3-20B

54
 Instruments and controls

Operator present sensor

The seat cushion acts as a switch. The moment no load
is sensed (the operator’s own weight) an alarm sounds
(Fig.3-21).

WARNING: To warn the operator of incorrect

usage, the tractor has an automatic alarm
system that sounds when the operator is not
correctly seated in driving position while the
machine is being used.

In all machines, both with mechanic and hydraulic

gearbox, this alarm sounds whenever the operator
leaves his/her seat without turning off the engine, and
is silenced only after engaging the parking brake and
shifting the gear to neutral. Fig.3-21

Machines with hydraulic reverse shuttle are

equipped with a further restraint that acts (when-
ever the operator gets off his/her seat without turn-
ing off the engine) with inhibition of forward and 3
reverse hydraulic clutches if the tractor is at stand-
still. If the tractor is moving, the system inhibits the
same clutches as soon as the neutral position of the
reverse shuttle lever is sensed: in such a condition
it is therefore required to shift the shuttle in neutral
to stop the tractor.

WARNING: Do not tamper with this compo-

nent in any way.

Contact your Dealer immediately if the system is not

operating correctly. Fig.3-21b

Miscellaneous (Fig. 3-21)

Rear field light (1)

7-pin rear socket for trailer (2).

Quick couplings (3)

Quick couplings of the «Push-Pull» type for auxiliary
spool valves are supplied for remote controls.
Fig. 3-22 - Platform
Oil union for hydraulic trailer braks (4).
(Available on request on certain markets).

Tool box (Fig.3-22)

The standard tool box (1) contains a kit of tools for the
daily maintenance.

Fig. 3-22 - Cab

55
Instruments and controls

Access to the tractor with cab [4.1.e] Access to the tractor with footstep [4.1.e]

WARNING: Do not jump on or off the tractor. WARNING: Do not jump on or off the tractor.
It may cause injuries. Always face the tractor, It may cause injuries. Always face the tractor,
use the hand rails and steps, and get on or use the hand rails and steps, and get on or
off slowly. Maintain a minimum three point off slowly. Maintain a minimum three point
contact to avoid falling (both hands on rails contact to avoid falling (both hands on rails
and one foot on the step, or one hand on the and one foot on the step, or one hand on the
hand rail and both feet on the steps). hand rail and both feet on the steps).

Enter or leave the tractor through the left-hand door. Climb into or down the tractor with the left-hand ladder.

Cab emergency exit [4.1.d]

The rear window of the cab may be used as an emer-
gency exit.

If you have to get out the cabin an emergency and it is

not possible to use the left door: turn the engine off,
open the rear door by means of the central handle and
get out quickly.

56
 Instruments and controls

CAB
All non-metallic components within the cab comply with the ISO 3795 standard.
The cab is approved according to OECD codes concerning ROPS test (protection against overturning) and safety belts.
The cab is also approved for FOPS test (protection against falling objects) according to the required code.

Cab description

Cab components - Fig.3-23

1 - Openable windscreen
2 - Adjustable rear view mirrors
3 - Front field lights
4 - Rotating beacon
5 - Openable rear door
6 - Left-hand side door
7 - Right-hand side door

Front and rear field lights

Fig.3-24
The lights operate when the ignition key has been turned
3
to the contact position.

The field lights are adjustable. You can therefore direct Fig.3-23
the light beam in the most suitable direction, depending
on the job in hand.
To turn on the lights, press down the switches (1 and 4)
as indicated.

– (1) Rear light switch.

– (4) Frront light switch.
– Rotating beacon switch (2)
– Front window wiper and washer switch (3)

Front/rear windscreen wiper

(Operates when the ignition key has been turned to the
contact position)

5 - Front windscreen wiper (Fig. 3-24)

Fig.3-24
6 - Rear windscreen wiper (Fig. 3-25)

Operation of the two switches:

Pos. 1 - Wiper off

Pos. 2 - Switch down to the first position: wiper on.

Front window wiper and washer (3-Fig.3-24)

CAUTION: Do not open the windscreen, the doors or

the side and rear windows during work. The noise in
the cab could rise to such level as to oblige the opera-
tor to wear headsets or other individual protection
against noise.

Fig.3-25

57
Instruments and controls

Controls within the cab - Fig. 3-26

1 - 4 front air vents
2 - Cab light
Press one side of the glass to switch the light on.
3 - Presetting for radio and speaker installation
4 - Fuse box
5 - Field light and rotating beacon switch

Ventilation – Fig. 3-26 [4.1.b]

The cab ventilation is operated by means of 4 front air
vents (1). Position the air flow in the required direction
by turning the vents.

The air that flows into the cab can be drawn from either
Fig.3-26
inside the cab or outside by means of the vents.

Internal air recycling (6-Fig.3-26)

– Closed. Air sucked up from the outside.
– Open: Air sucked up from inside the cab.

RECIRCULATION VENT (6 - Fig.3-27)

Slide the louver to regulate amount of fresh air intake/
recirculation of air within the cab.

Conditioner activating button

(1-Fig. 3-27). [4.1.b]

Fig.3-37

Heating – Fig. 3-27 [4.1.b]

Electric fan – Fig. 3-27 [4.1.b]
Use knob (3) to adjust the temperature of the hot air.
You can vary the amount of air let into the cab by selecting
Pos. A - Maximum heating one of the speeds provided by the electric fan.

Pos. B - Heating off Turn the knob (2) clockwise to increase fan speed.

Select the speed of the electric fan with knob (2), to adjust Fan switch (2)
the quantity of air let into the cab. 0 - OFF
1 - Slow
2 - Medium
3 - Fast

58
 Instruments and controls

CAB AIR CONDITIONING CON-

TROLS (on request) [4.1.b]

How to turn on the conditioner and

regulate the temperature

Conditioner activating and regulating button

Operates when the ignition key has been turned to the

contact position.
Air conditioner switch (1 - Fig.3-28):
- Press to turn on the air conditioning system.
- Press again to turn off the air conditioning system.

CAUTION:
- The air conditioner will not operate when the en- Fig. 3-28
gine is at a standstill as the compressor is operated
by the engine itself.
- Make sure that the air conditioner control is in the
off position before starting the engine.
Use of the air conditioner 3
Use of the air conditioning system allows you to obtain
- Always turn on the electric fan before operating
cool and dehumidified air or hot and dehumidified air.
the air conditioner.
It is operated in the following way (Fig. 3-28).
- The conditioner cannot operate when the electric
fan is off.
Heater control knob
Before turning the conditioner on, make sure that the
Fan control knob heating knob (3) is on the off position.
You can vary the amount of air let into the cab by selecting
Pos. B - Heating off
one of the speeds provided by the electric fan.
Fan switch (2 - Fig.3-28)
0 - OFF Starting
1 - Slow Start the engine and turn on the electric fan, then press
2 - Medium the button (1) to operate the conditioner.
3 - Fast
Regulation
To regulate the air conditioning in the cab, always open the
Heater control knob (3 - Fig. 3-28)
recirculation air vents (6- Fig.3-26) when the conditioner
Use knob (3) to adjust the temperature of the hot air.
operates and keep the doors and rear window closed.
Pos. A - Maximum heating
Pos. B - Heating off After a lengthy period exposed to the sun, bring the tem-
perature inside the cab to the correct level by turning on
the conditioner whilst the tractor is on the move and by
Air vents
opening the rear window for about one minutes in order
The flow of air let into the cab can be set in the required
to allow the hot air to escape.
direction by turning the 4 front air vents (4 - Fig. 3-28).

Internal air recycling (6-Fig.3-26) Stopping

Before you stop the engine, always turn off the conditioner
– Closed. Air sucked up from the outside.
by setting button (1) to the off position and turning the
– Open: Air sucked up from inside the cab.
electric fan knob (2) off.

WARNING: If the tractor is to remain unused for a

Defrost Control Operation long period of time, or if the system is not used, re-
- Position the air flow in the required direction by turning member to allow the air conditioner to operate for
the vents (4). about 15 minutes each week.
- Press (1) to turn on the air conditioning system. This precautionary measure prevents gas from leak-
- Use knob (3) to adjust the temperature of the hot air. ing from the compressor.

NOTE: See the cab maintenance section for filter use

and maintenance.

59
Instruments and controls

Page left intentionally blank.

60
Operation

Chapter 4
Operation
4

61
Operation

OPERATION Cold weather starting (temperatures

below 0°C)(32°F)
WARNING: Carefully read the starting instruc-
tions before starting the tractor. CAUTION: When outdoor temperatures drop
to around or below 0°C. (32°F), check the
WARNING: Always take into account the use cooling system and if necessary add the
of the machine and the work place. Take recommended antifreeze.
every precaution, specially if there is a high
risk of fire. WARNING: Do not inject fluids (ether) to
make the engine easier to start in cold
WARNING: DO NOT start the tractor from the weather. The tractor is equipped with a cold
ground. Always start the tractor only from the weather starting system.
operator’s seat.
Proceed as follows:
WARNING: DO NOT start the tractor if the - Perform operations A,B, C, as instructed above.
bonnet is open or the guards are removed. - Turn the ignition key to the pre-heat position (the
indicator light (1 - Fig.4-1a) comes on and keep it
WARNING: The operator must always seat in there for 20 seconds, then turn the ignition key to the
his/her place when driving the tractor both in “START” position. If the engine fails to start within 15
the field and on roads. DO NOT stand up from seconds, return the key to the pre-heating position.
your seat when the tractor is moving. - Wait a further 10 seconds and then turn the ignition
key to the “START” position again.
ENGINE - As soon as the engine starts, release the key.
Starting the engine [4.1.c] - If the engine fails to start, repeat the pre-heating or
starting procedure as described above.
WARNING: The engine may be started only in
the conditions given here under. If this fails NOTE:
to occur, have the tractor repaired by your - If the engine fails to start after two or three attempts
Dealer or authorized service centre. and smoke can be seen coming out of the exhaust,
repeat the starting procedure without the thermostart-
er pre-heating phase.
A- Check that the reverse shuttle and gearshift levers - Do not keep the key turned to the start position for
are in neutral. more than 10 seconds at a time.
B1- For tractors with mechanical PTO, shift the inde- - Wait at least 1 minute between one attempt at starting
pendent/synchronised PTO lever to neutral. and another.
B2- For tractors with hydraulic PTO, disengage the
control (switch). If the engine does not start regularly and easily, do not
For tractors with front PTO, disengage the control continue as for you may run down the battery. Bleed
(switch). any air that may have accumulated in the fuel system
C- Make sure the auxiliary valve levers are in neutral. and, if the problem persists, check that:
D- Depress the clutch pedal all the way. - The fuel filters are not blocked.
- The battery and thermostarter are efficient.
TURBO ENGINE: Allow the engine to run for a few - The fuses of the ignition circuit are in good conditions
seconds with the starter motor to allow the turbo com- and that the fuel shut-off valve is open (contact your
pressor to be lubricated. dealer or a specialized workshop).
As soon as the engine starts, accelerate to a 1000-1200
RPM rate without increasing further until the engine has
reached the normal operating temperature.

E- Turn the ignition key to the contact position. Then

turn the ignition key to the “START” position.
Release the key as soon as the engine fires and
quickly set the accelerator lever to the idling speed.

Fig.4-1a

62
 Operation

Starting the tractor Stopping the tractor

- Reduce the engine speed.
WARNING: Before moving off, make sure
you are perfectly familiar with the brakes, - Depress the gearshift clutch pedal to disengage
transmission, PTO, diff lock and engine shut drive.
off.
- Once the tractor has come to a stop, move the gear
After starting the engine: lever and speed range lever to neutral before releas-
ing the gearshift clutch pedal.
1 - Fully depress the clutch pedal, select the gear
required and then select the speed range. - Use both pedal brakes to stop the tractor and then
apply the parking brake.
WARNING: Make sure that the reverse shut- - Engage the Park Lock (if equipped).
tle lever is set for the direction required.
Turning off the engine [4.1.c]
2 - Release the parking brake.
- Turn the hand throttle lever to the “Idling” position.
Desengage the Park Lock (if equipped).
Engage the first gear, then apply the parking brake.
WARNING: Look out of bystanders, especial-
- Stop the engine by turning the ignition key to the
ly when backing up.
STOP position to disconnect all electrical circuits.
Remove the key.
3 - Accelerate the engine slightly and gradually release
the gearshift clutch pedal.
TURBO ENGINE: Take care when stopping the engine
after a period of operation at full load. It is advisable
4 - Move your foot completely off the clutch pedal and
to allow it to idle for 3 or 4 minutes before stopping it.
slowly accelerate until you have reached the speed
This allows the overheated compressor to cool down to
you need.
an acceptable temperature.

CAUTION: If your tractor is equipped with a me-

WARNING: whenever the tractor is left unattended, 4
the ignition key must be removed.
chanical reverse shuttle, always bring the tractor to
a complete standstill before changing direction.
Running in
For a correct running in, it is necessary to observe all
precautions called for in the Maintenance section.

63
Operation

Clutch
Gearshift clutch pedal (Fig. 4-1).

- Pedal up = drive engaged.

- Pedal down = drive disengaged.

Make your gear changes gradually. When the engine

is under load, do not slip the clutch to accelerate, but
change to a lower gear.

WARNING:
Fig.4-1 - Clutch pedal.
- Never keep your foot resting on the gear-
shift clutch pedal when driving.
- Never coast down slopes with the gear
lever in neutral.

Gearbox - 4WD Gearbox - 2WD at 30 Kph

The gearbox is available with a number of options to
(If mounted)
The gearbox is available with a number of options to
meet specific needs.
meet specific needs.
Speed Five
Speed Four
Five gear gearbox for four ranges (Low - Standard - High
Four gear gearbox for four ranges (Low - Standard - High
and Creeper) with synchro reverse shuttle, It gives 20
and Creeper) with synchro reverse shuttle, It gives 16
forward speeds + 20 reverse speeds.
forward speeds + 16 reverse speeds.
15 forward speeds + 15 reverse speeds without creeper.
12 forward speeds + 12 reverse speeds without creeper.
Power Shuttle
Power Shuttle
Five gear gearbox for four ranges (Low - Standard - High
Four gear gearbox for four ranges (Low - Standard - High
and Creeper on request) with electro-hydraulic reverse
and Creeper on request) with electro-hydraulic reverse
shuttle Power Shuttle. It gives 20 forward speeds + 20
shuttle Power Shuttle. It gives 16 forward speeds + 16
reverse speeds.
reverse speeds.
15 forward speeds + 15 reverse speeds without creeper.
12 forward speeds + 12 reverse speeds without creeper.
Power Five
Power Four
Composed of Power Shuttle and hydraulic HI-LO.
Composed of Power Shuttle and hydraulic HI-LO.
Five gear gearbox for four ranges (Low - Standard - High
Four gear gearbox for four ranges (Low - Standard - High
and Creeper on request) with electro-hydraulic reverse
and Creeper on request) with electro-hydraulic reverse
shuttle Speed Tronix. It gives 40 forward speeds + 40
shuttle. It gives 32 forward speeds + 32 reverse speeds.
reverse speeds.
24 forward speeds + 24 reverse speeds without creeper.
30 forward speeds + 30 reverse speeds without creeper.

64
 Operation

Speed Five - Mechanical gearbox 20

forward + 20 reverse speeds
The Speed Five gearbox with mechanical reverse shuttle
has 5 synchronized gears for 4 ranges (Low - Standard -
High and Creeper), for a total of 20 forward + 20 reverse
speeds. 15 forward + 15 reverse speeds without creeper.

Gear lever (1-Fig. 4-4) - 4WD version

The lever has five different positions. All five gears are
fully synchronized (Fig. 4-2A).

Fig.4-2A
Five lever positions
equivalent to five Fig.4-4 - Speed control lever.
ground speeds. 1 - Gearshift lever.
2 - Range selector lever: Creep, Low, Normal, High
range.
3 - Mechanical shuttle lever.

To change from one gear to another within the same Speed range selector lever
speed range, simply depress the gearshift clutch pedal (2 - Fig.4-4)
and move the gear lever to its new position. There is no
need to stop the tractor. The speed range selector lever has four possible posi-

Gear lever (1-Fig. 4-4) - 2WD version

tions corresponding to the creeper, low, standard and
high speed ranges. Each speed range is identified by a
4
symbol on the knob of the lever (Fig. 4-3).
The lever has four different positions. All four gears are
fully synchronized. (Fig.4-2B)

Fig.4-3
Four lever positions
Fig.4-2B equivalent to four
Four lever positions equivalent to speed ranges.
four fully synchronized gears
.

Creeper range

Low range

Standard range

High range

To change from one speed range to another, disengage

the gearshift clutch pedal, and bring the tractor to a
complete standstill before moving the speed range
selector to its new position.

65
Operation

Reverse shuttle lever

To engage the forward or reverse gears, you must de-
press the gearshift clutch pedal, stop the tractor and
then select the required reverse shuttle lever position.
You must do this even if the gears are synchronized.

A - Forward gears.
N - Neutral.
R - Reverse gears.

CAUTION: To engage the reverse shuttle with the

synchronized engagement, depress the clutch pedal,
stop the tractor, then select the required reverse
shuttle lever position.

WARNING: Ensure that the safety equipment Fig.4-5 - Reverse shuttle control lever.
allow the engine to be started only when the
reverse shuttle and PTO control levers are
in neutral position. Never disable the safety
equipment. If it does not operate correctly,
let it be adjusted by specialized personnel
only.

66
 Operation

4WD - Speed Five gearbox with mechanical reverse shuttle 20 forward+20 reverse speeds*
with Creeper, 15 FWD + 15 REV* speeds without Creeper.
2WD - Speed Five gearbox with mechanical reverse shuttle 16 forward+16 reverse speeds*
with Creeper, 12 FWD + 12 REV* speeds without Creeper. (If mounted)

Speeds are in Kph with engine at max. RPM and with rear tyres as indicated

MOD. 3670-3685-3680- 3690-

36100-36110-36120 GE
360/70 R24 14.9 LR20
GEAR

1st Creeper Speed 0.373 0.353

2nd Creeper Speed 0.587 0.554
3rd Creeper Speed 0.741 0.700
4th Creeper Speed 1.094 1033
FORWARD SPEED

5th Creeper Speed 1.417 1.338

1st Low 1.782 1.683

2nd Low 2.801 2.646
3rd Low 3.537 3.341
4th Low 5.219 4.930
5th Low 6.763 6.387

1st Standard 4.257 4.021

2nd Standard 6.692 6.320
3rd Standard 8.451 7.981
4th Standard 12.469 11.776
5th Standard

1st High
16.156

10.501
15.258

9.917
4
2nd High 16.506 15.589
3rd High 20.845 19.687
4th High 30.756 29.048
5th High 39.850 37.637

MOD. 3670-3685-3680- 3690-

36100-36110-36120 GE
360/70 R24 14.9 LR20
GEAR

1st Creeper Speed 0.377 0.356

2nd Creeper Speed 0.593 0.560
3rd Creeper Speed 0.749 0.707
4th Creeper Speed 1.105 1.043
REVERSE SPEEDS

5th Creeper Speed 1.431 1.352

1st Low REV 1.800 1.700

2nd Low REV 2.830 2.672
3rd Low REV 3.573 3.375
4th Low REV 5.272 4.979
5th Low REV 6.831 6.452

1st Standard REV 4.300 4.061

2nd Standard REV 6.759 6.384
3rd Standard REV 8.536 8.062
4th Standard REV 12.595 11.895
5th Standard REV 16.319 15.413

1st High REV 10.607 10.018

2nd High REV 16.673 15.747
3rd High REV 21.056 19.886
4th High REV 31.068 29.342
5th High REV 40.254 38.018

67
Operation

4WD - Speed Five gearbox with mechanical reverse shuttle 20 forward+20 reverse speeds*
with Creeper, 15 FWD + 15 REV* speeds without Creeper.

2WD - Speed Five gearbox with mechanical reverse shuttle 16 forward+16 reverse speeds*
with Creeper, 12 FWD + 12 REV* speeds without Creeper. (If mounted)

Speeds are in Kph with engine at max. RPM and with rear tyres as indicated

MOD. 3670- 3685-3680-3690-36100- 36110- 36120 F

MOD. 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders
Rear tyres
GEAR 14.9 R28 16.9 R24 13.6 R28 14.9 R24 13.6 R24
420/70 R28 380/70 R28 360/70 R28 380/70 R24
420/70 R24
1st Creeper Speed 0,372 0,360 0,355 0,343 0,326
2nd Creeper Speed 0,585 0,567 0,558 0,539 0,512
3rd Creeper Speed 0,739 0,716 0,704 0,681 0,646
4th Creeper Speed 1,090 1,056 1,039 1,005 0,954
FORWARD SPEED

5th Creeper Speed 1,412 1,368 1,346 1,302 1,236

1st Low 1,776 1,721 1,693 1,637 1,554

2nd Low 2,792 2,704 2,661 2,574 2,443
3rd Low 3,526 3,415 3,360 3,250 3,085
4th Low 5,202 5,039 4,958 4,796 4,552
5th Low 6,740 6,529 6,424 6,213 5,898

1st Standard 4,243 4,110 4,044 3,911 3,712

2nd Standard 6,669 6,461 6,357 6,148 5,835
3rd Standard 8,422 8,159 8,027 7,764 7,369
4th Standard 12,427 12,038 11,844 11,456 10,873
5th Standard 16,101 15,598 15,346 14,843 14,089

1st High 10,465 10,138 9,975 9,648 9,157

2nd High 16,451 15,936 15,679 15,165 14,394
3rd High 20,775 20,125 19,801 19,152 18,178
4th High 30,653 29,695 29,216 28,258 26,821
5th High 39,716 38,475 37,855 36,613 34,752

MOD. 3670- 3685-3680-3690-36100- 36110- 36120 F

MOD. 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders
Rear tyres
GEAR 14.9 R28 16.9 R24 13.6 R28 14.9 R24 13.6 R24
420/70 R28 380/70 R28 360/70 R28 380/70 R24
420/70 R24
1st Creeper Speed 0,376 0,364 0,358 0,347 0,329
2nd Creeper Speed 0,591 0,572 0,563 0,545 0,517
3rd Creeper Speed 0,746 0,723 0,711 0,688 0,653
4th Creeper Speed 1,101 1,067 1,049 1,015 0,963
REVERSE SPEEDS

5th Creeper Speed 1,427 1,382 1,360 1,315 1,248

1st Low REV 1,794 1,738 1,710 1,654 1,570

2nd Low REV 2,820 2,732 2,688 2,600 2,468
3rd Low REV 3,561 3,450 3,394 3,283 3,116
4th Low REV 5,255 5,090 5,008 4,844 4,598
5th Low REV 6,808 6,596 6,489 6,276 5,957

1st Standard REV 4,286 4,152 4,085 3,951 3,750

2nd Standard REV 6,737 6,526 6,421 6,210 5,895
3rd Standard REV 8,508 8,242 8,109 7,843 7,444
4th Standard REV 12,553 12,160 11,964 11,572 10,984
5th Standard REV 16,264 15,756 15,502 14,994 14,231

1st High REV 10,571 10,241 10,076 9,746 9,250

2nd High REV 16,617 16,098 15,838 15,319 14,540
3rd High REV 20,985 20,329 20,002 19,346 18,362
4th High REV 30,963 29,996 29,512 28,544 27,093
5th High REV 40,119 38,865 38,238 36,985 35,104

68
 Operation

4WD - Speed Five gearbox with mechanical reverse shuttle 20 forward+20 reverse speeds*
with Creeper, 15 FWD + 15 REV* speeds without Creeper.

2WD - Speed Five gearbox with mechanical reverse shuttle 16 forward+16 reverse speeds*
with Creeper, 12 FWD + 12 REV* speeds without Creeper. (If mounted)

Speeds are in Kph with engine at max. RPM and with rear tyres as indicated

MOD. 3680 - 3690 - 36100 - 36110 - 36120 GT

Rear tyres
GEAR 14.9 R28 16.9 R24 13.6 R28 14.9 R24 13.6 R24
420/70 R28 380/70 R28 360/70 R28 380/70 R24
420/70 R24
1st Creeper Speed 0,372 0,360 0,355 0,343 0,326
2nd Creeper Speed 0,585 0,567 0,558 0,539 0,512
3rd Creeper Speed 0,739 0,716 0,704 0,681 0,646
4th Creeper Speed 1,090 1,056 1,039 1,005 0,954
FORWARD SPEED

5th Creeper Speed 1,412 1,368 1,346 1,302 1,236

1st Low 1,776 1,721 1,693 1,637 1,554

2nd Low 2,792 2,704 2,661 2,574 2,443
3rd Low 3,526 3,415 3,360 3,250 3,085
4th Low 5,202 5,039 4,958 4,796 4,552
5th Low 6,740 6,529 6,424 6,213 5,898

1st Standard 4,243 4,110 4,044 3,911 3,712

2nd Standard 6,669 6,461 6,357 6,148 5,835
3rd Standard 8,422 8,159 8,027 7,764 7,369

4
4th Standard 12,427 12,038 11,844 11,456 10,873
5th Standard 16,101 15,598 15,346 14,843 14,089

1st High 10,465 10,138 9,975 9,648 9,157

2nd High 16,451 15,936 15,679 15,165 14,394
3rd High 20,775 20,125 19,801 19,152 18,178
4th High 30,653 29,695 29,216 28,258 26,821
5th High 39,716 38,475 37,855 36,613 34,752

MOD. 3680 - 3690 - 36100 - 36110 - 36120 GT

Rear tyres
GEAR 14.9 R28 16.9 R24 13.6 R28 14.9 R24 13.6 R24
420/70 R28 380/70 R28 360/70 R28 380/70 R24
420/70 R24
1st Creeper Speed 0,376 0,364 0,358 0,347 0,329
2nd Creeper Speed 0,591 0,572 0,563 0,545 0,517
3rd Creeper Speed 0,746 0,723 0,711 0,688 0,653
4th Creeper Speed 1,101 1,067 1,049 1,015 0,963
REVERSE SPEEDS

5th Creeper Speed 1,427 1,382 1,360 1,315 1,248

1st Low REV 1,794 1,738 1,710 1,654 1,570

2nd Low REV 2,820 2,732 2,688 2,600 2,468
3rd Low REV 3,561 3,450 3,394 3,283 3,116
4th Low REV 5,255 5,090 5,008 4,844 4,598
5th Low REV 6,808 6,596 6,489 6,276 5,957

1st Standard REV 4,286 4,152 4,085 3,951 3,750

2nd Standard REV 6,737 6,526 6,421 6,210 5,895
3rd Standard REV 8,508 8,242 8,109 7,843 7,444
4th Standard REV 12,553 12,160 11,964 11,572 10,984
5th Standard REV 16,264 15,756 15,502 14,994 14,231

1st High REV 10,571 10,241 10,076 9,746 9,250

2nd High REV 16,617 16,098 15,838 15,319 14,540
3rd High REV 20,985 20,329 20,002 19,346 18,362
4th High REV 30,963 29,996 29,512 28,544 27,093
5th High REV 40,119 38,865 38,238 36,985 35,104

69
Operation

Gearbox with electro-hydraulic re-

verse shuttle Power Shuttle
The gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle is
available in two versions:

4WD - 40 Kph

- 5 synchronized gears with 4 speed ranges (Creeper

- Low - Standard - High) and electro-hydraulic reverse
shuttle 20 forward + 20 reverse speeds.
Without creeper 15 forward + 15 reverse speeds.

- 5 synchronized gears with 4 speed ranges (Creeper

- Low - Standard - High) and Power Five electro-
hydraulic reverse shuttle with two HIL/LO ranges 40
forward + 40 reverse speeds.
Without creeper 30 forward + 30 reverse speeds. Fig.4-6
1 - Gearshift lever.
2WD - max. 30 Kph 2 - Declutch disengagement button (orange).
3 - Power Five button (option).
- 4 synchronized gears with 4 speed ranges (Creeper 4 - Range selector lever: Creep, Low, Normal, High
- Low - Standard - High) and electro-hydraulic reverse range.
shuttle 16 forward + 16 reverse speeds. 5 - Powershuttle and Declutch disengagement lever.
Without creeper 12 forward + 12 reverse speeds.

- 4 synchronized gears with 4 speed ranges (Creeper Gear lever

- Low - Standard - High) and Power Five electro-
hydraulic reverse shuttle with two HIL/LO ranges 32 The lever has five different positions. All five gears are
forward + 32 reverse speeds. fully synchronized (1 - Fig. 4-6).
Without creeper 24 forward + 24 reverse speeds.

Functions of the electro-hydraulic reverse shuttles

Power Shuttle and Power Five (optional). Fig.4-7A
Five lever positions
Reverse shuttle under load: Allows the driving direc- equivalent to five
tion to be reversed by simply moving the small lever ground speeds.
on the left hand near the steering wheel. The elec-
tronic control unit guarantees smooth and gradual
reversing. For safety reasons, the direction can only
be reversed at speeds of less than 10 Kph.

The Declutch system disengages the main hydraulic To change from one gear to another within the same
clutch by means of the button on the actual gearshift speed range, simply depress the gearshift clutch pedal
lever. With this button the driver can change mechan- and move the gear lever to its new position. There is no
ical gears without using the clutch pedal. need to stop the tractor.

The clutch pedal is only used for very small move- Gear lever (1 - Fig.4-6) - 2WD at 30 km/h
ments of the tractor, e.g. to hitch or unhitch an imple-
ment, and for greater safety, when sudden stops are The lever has four different positions. All four gears are
made or obstacles are encountered. fully synchronized (1 - Fig. 4-6).

Power Five. The standard mechanical gearbox can be

used both in Direct drive and in Underdrive.
In direct drive each speed of the gearbox can be Fig.4-7B
used, while in underdrive the mechanical ratio is Four lever positions equivalent
reduced by 20%, thus obtaining more torque. to four fully synchronized ground
The operator can shift from a range to another with- speeds.
out using the clutch pedal, under load and while the
tractor is moving, simply depressing the button on
the gearshift lever: depress + to increase speed, - to
slow down.

70
 Operation

Speed range selector lever Power Shuttle control lever

The speed range selector lever has four possible posi-
tions corresponding to the creeper, low, standard and
high speed ranges.
Each speed range is identified by a symbol on the knob
of the lever.

Fig.4-8
Four lever positions
equivalent to four
speed ranges.

Fig.4-9. Shuttle control lever

Creeper range A - Lever forward: Forward gears.

N - Neutral: Always move the lever to this position to
start the engine.
Low range R - Lever backward: Reverse gears.

Drive direction indicator lights with

Standard range Power Shuttle and Power Five 4
Two arrow-shaped lights on the instrument panel show
High range the drive direction (Fig. 4-10).

1 - Forward gears (green)

To change from one speed range to another, disengage 2 - Reverse gears (orange)
the gearshift clutch pedal, and bring the tractor to a 3 -Power Five indicator
complete standstill before moving the speed range 1= Reduced range - Underdrive
selector to its new position. 2= Direct drive
4 - Power Shuttle range indicator
F= Forward gears
N= Power Shuttle in neutral
R= Reverse gears
P= Park lock engaged

Fig. 4-10

71
Operation

MOD. GE-4WD - Gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle Powershuttle 20 FWD - 20

REV (direct drive only). Gearbox with Power Five 40 FWD - 40 REV (Underdrive - direct
drive speed ranges)
MOD. GE-2WD - Gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle Powershuttle 16 FWD - 16
REV (direct drive only). Gearbox with Power Five 32 FWD - 32 REV (Underdrive - direct
drive speed ranges) (If mounted)

Speeds are in Kph with engine at max. RPM and with rear tyres as indicated

MODEL Mod. 3670 -3685 -3680 -3690-36100-36110- 36120 GE

FORWARD 360/70 R24 14.9 LR20

SPEED Underdrive Direct Underdrive Direct

1 Creeper Speed 0,310 0,373 0,293 0,353

2 Creeper Speed 0,488 0,587 0,460 0,554
3 Creeper Speed 0,616 0,741 0,582 0,700
4 Creeper Speed 0,909 1,094 0,858 1,033
5 Creeper Speed 1,177 1,417 1,112 1,338

1 Low 1,480 1,782 1,398 1,683

2 Low 2,327 2,801 2,198 2,646
3 Low 2,939 3,537 2,776 3,341
4 Low 4,336 5,219 4,095 4,930
5 Low 5,618 6,763 5,306 6 , 3 8 7

1 Standard 3,537 4,257 3,340 4,021

2 Standard 5,559 6,692 5,250 6,320
3 Standard 7,021 8,451 6,630 7,981
4 Standard 10,359 12,469 9,783 11,776
5 Standard 13,422 16,156 12,676 15,258

1 High 8,724 10,501 8,239 9,917

2 High 13,713 16,506 12,951 15,589
3 High 17,317 20,845 16,355 19,687
4 High 25,551 30,756 24,132 29,048
5 High 33,107 39,850 31,267 37,637

MODEL Mod. 3670 -3685 -3680 -3690-36100-36110- 36120 GE

REVERSE 360/70 R24 14.9 LR20

SPEED Underdrive Direct Underdrive Direct

1 Creeper Speed REV 0,301 0,363 0,285 0,343

2 Creeper Speed REV 0,474 0,570 0,447 0,538
3 Creeper Speed REV 0,598 0,720 0,565 0,680
4 Creeper Speed REV 0,883 1,062 0,834 1,003
5 Creeper Speed REV 1,143 1,376 1,080 1,300

1 Low REV 1,438 1,731 1,358 1,635

2 Low REV 2,261 2,721 2,135 2,570
3 Low REV 2,855 3,436 2,696 3,245
4 Low REV 4,212 5,070 3,978 4,788
5 Low REV 5,458 6,569 5,154 6,204

1 Standard REV 3,435 4,135 3,245 3,905

2 Standard REV 5,400 6,500 5,100 6,139
3 Standard REV 6,820 8,209 6,441 7,753
4 Standard REV 10,062 12,112 9,503 11,439
5 Standard REV 13,037 15,693 12,313 14,821

1 High REV 8,474 10,200 8,003 9,634

2 High REV 13,320 16,034 12,580 15,143
3 High REV 16,822 20,248 15,887 19,123
4 High REV 24,820 29,876 23,441 28,216
5 High REV 32,159 38,710 30,372 36,559

72
 Operation

MOD. F - GT-4WD - Gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle Powershuttle 20 FWD -

20 REV (direct drive only). Gearbox with Power Five 40 FWD - 40 REV (Underdrive - direct
drive speed ranges)
MOD. F - GT-2WD - Gearbox with electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle Powershuttle 16 FWD -
16 REV (direct drive only). Gearbox with Power Five 32 FWD - 32 REV (Underdrive - direct
drive speed ranges) (If mounted)

Speeds are in Kph with engine at max. RPM and with rear tyres as indicated

MODEL Mod.3670-3685-3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 F
Mod. 3680-3690- 36100-36110-36120 GT - Mod. 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders
FORWARD 14.9 R28 13.6 R28 13.6 R24
420/70 R28 380/70 R28 380/70 R24
SPEED
Underdrive Direct Underdrive Direct Underdrive Direct
1 Creeper Speed 0,300 0,361 0,286 0,345 0,263 0,316
2 Creeper Speed 0,472 0,568 0,450 0,542 0,413 0,497
3 Creeper Speed 0,596 0,718 0,568 0,684 0,522 0,628
4 Creeper Speed 0,880 1,059 0,838 1,009 0,770 0,926
5 Creeper Speed 1,140 1,372 1,086 1,307 0,997 1,200

1 Low 1,433 1,725 1,366 1,644 1,254 1,510

2 Low 2,253 2,712 2,147 2,585 1,971 2,373
3 Low 2,845 3,425 2,712 3,264 2,489 2,997
4 Low 4,198 5,053 4,001 4,816 3,673 4,421
5 Low 5,439 6,547 5,184 6,240 4,759 5,729

1 Standard 3,424 4,121 3,263 3,928 2,996 3,606

2 Standard 5,382 6,478 5,130 6,175 4,709 5,668
3 Standard
4 Standard
6,797
10,028
8,181
12,071
6,478
9,558
7,798
11,505
5,947
8,775
7,159
10,562 4
5 Standard 12,994 15,640 12,385 14,907 11,369 13,685

1 High 8,445 10,166 8,050 9,689 7,390 8,895

2 High 13,275 15,980 12,653 15,231 11,616 13,982
3 High 16,765 20,180 15,979 19,234 14,669 17,658
4 High 24,737 29,776 23,577 28,380 21,645 26,054
5 High 32,051 38,580 30,548 36,771 28,044 33,757

MODEL Mod.3670-3685-3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 F
Mod. 3680-3690- 36100-36110-36120 GT - Mod. 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders
REVERSE 14.9 R28 13.6 R28 13.6 R24
420/70 R28 380/70 R28 380/70 R24
SPEED
Underdrive Direct Underdrive Direct Underdrive Direct
1 Creeper Speed REV 0,309 0,372 0,295 0,355 0,271 0,326
2 Creeper Speed REV 0,486 0,585 0,463 0,558 0,425 0,512
3 Creeper Speed REV 0,614 0,739 0,585 0,704 0,537 0,646
4 Creeper Speed REV 0,905 1,909 0,863 1,039 0,792 0,95
5 Creeper Speed REV 1,173 1,412 1,118 1,346 1,027 1,236

1 Low REV 1,475 1,776 1,406 1,693 1,291 1,554

2 Low REV 2,319 2,792 2,211 2,661 2,029 2,443
3 Low REV 2,929 3,526 2,792 3,360 2,563 3,085
4 Low REV 4,322 5,202 4,119 4,958 3,781 4,552
5 Low REV 5,599 6,740 5,337 6,424 4,899 5,898

1 Standard REV 3,525 4,243 3,359 4,044 3,084 3,712

2 Standard REV 5,541 6,669 5,281 6,357 4,848 5,835
3 Standard REV 6,997 8,422 6,669 8,027 6,122 7,369
4 Standard REV 10,324 12,467 9,840 11,844 9,033 10,873
5 Standard REV 13,376 16,101 12,749 15,346 11,704 14,089

1 High REV 8,694 10,465 8,287 9,975 7,607 9,157

2 High REV 13,667 16,451 13,026 15,679 11,958 14,394
3 High REV 17,259 20,775 16,450 19,801 15,102 18,178
4 High REV 25,465 30,653 24,272 29,216 22,282 26,821
5 High REV 32,995 39,716 31,448 37,855 28,871 34,752

73
Operation

Use of the Power Shuttle

Starting the engine

Gearbox in neutral:
1 - Orange reverse shuttle lever at the left of the steer-
ing wheel (2-Fig.4-11).
2 - PTO switch on the right-hand console (1 - Fig.4-12)
3 - Turn the ignition key clockwise to the contact posi-
tion 1, then to the ignition position 3.

Forward starting

WARNING: To start the tractor when the weather is 1

particularly cold, it is advisable to heat the trans-
mission oil by running the engine until it reaches a
temperature of 20°C. This ensures that Power Shut- Fig.4-11
tle is able to operate correctly. During the first few
minutes of work with the tractor, only change gear
with Power Shuttle when strictly necessary until the
normal operating temperature has been reached.

After engine ignition, select the range (Low, Standard

or High) with the relative lever according to the job on
hand.
Engage the required gear.
Move forward the orange shuttle control lever at the
left of the steering wheel.
Thus the tractor moves automatically forward without
using the clutch pedal.

Reverse starting

Proceed as described above, only moving the shuttle

lever back.
The tractor automatically starts in reverse.

Mechanical lift Electronic lift

Fig.4-12

74
 Operation

Starting with the clutch pedal (Fig. 4-12b)

The clutch pedal should only be used for precision ap-

proaches and manoeuvres.
1. Depress the clutch pedal (2) completely.
2. Move the reverse shuttle lever (1) forward or back-
wards.
3. Gradually release the pedal to control the tractor
movement as necessary.

Starting is usually in direct drive mode. Press the rela-

tive buttons on the control lever handle to start the
tractor in underdrive mode.

Clutch pedal (Fig. 4-12b)

The clutch pedal is only used for:

- Safety manoeuvres, sudden obstacles, etc.
- Precision approaches, such as implement hitching.
- When the clutch pedal (or the Declutch button) is de-
pressed to select the gear, the gearbox remains in the
previously engaged range.

4
Declutch button (Fig. 4-13)

The Declutch system allows the gear to be changed

by pressing the relative orange button on the gearshift
lever handle.

Changing gear with the Declutch system.

The Declutch button (Fig. 4-13) practically acts as the
clutch pedal.

Press the button to disengage the hydraulic clutch, and Fig.4-13

keep it depressed while engaging the required gear.
Release the button.

Gear change with the clutch pedal (Fig. 4-14)

When the clutch pedal is depressed to change gear,

Deltashift remains in the range previously engaged.

Changing the range (creeper, low, standard, high)

with the clutch pedal

Depress the clutch pedal and wait for the tractor to

stop before selecting a range (creeper - low - standard
- high).

Fig.4-14

75
Operation

Choosing underdrive/direct drive under load

The Power Five system provides the direct drive and

underdrive ranges (this latter with -20% of the power
available in the direct drive mode). For instance, if the
4th gear is engaged, the following speeds are available:
4th gear in direct drive; 4th gear in underdrive -20%.

To select underdrive/direct range, press the bottom

green button on the gearshift lever: changes from
direct drive to underdrive and from underdrive to direct
drive are automatic and under load (Fig. 4-15).

The selected range is indicated by the relative indicators

(Fig. 4-15B).

Reactions to control settings

Fig. 4-15a
The monitoring system automatically analyzes the
conditions in which the tractor is used and chooses
reaction times most suitable to any condition.

Indicators on the instrument

1 - Forward gears - green
2 - Reverse gears - green
3 - Powershift range engaged
1= Reduced range - Underdrive
2= Direct drive range
4 - N= Power Shuttle in neutral
F = Power Shuttle in Forward
R= Reverse
P= Park lock engaged

Fig. 4-15b

76
 Operation

Use of reverse shuttle under load

The tractor’s driving direction is automatically reversed

by pushing the orange lever at the left of the steering
wheel forwards or backwards (Fig. 4-16).

The reverse shuttle is automatically controlled through

the following phases:
· DECELERATION
· STOP
· CHANGE OF DIRECTION
· ACCELERATION
The speed at which these phases take place by soft-
ware.

WARNING: Reversing can be obtained at any

speed. However, to protect mechanical parts
from damage and for operator’s safety, this Fig.4-16
operation should be made ONLY at speeds
UNDER 10 Kph.
A buzzer sounds to warn from reversing at
speeds over 10 Kph. To correctly engage the
reverse shuttle, reduce your speed to under
10 Kph.

Use of reverse shuttle with clutch pedal

The clutch pedal is used to obtain small and precise

movements for certain work requirements.
4
· Completely depress the clutch pedal (2 - Fig. 4-16).
· Shift the orange shuttle control lever.
· Wait for the reverse indicator LED to come on.
· Use your foot on the pedal to engage the clutch grad-
ually and let the tractor move forward or backward as
required.

77
Operation

Stopping the tractor

Fig. 4-17a/b
Always stop the tractor safely: Engage the parking
brake (1), engage the Park-Lock (3), disengage the PTO,
bring all the gearshift levers to neutral position, lower
any implement to the ground, stop the engine and re-
move the ignition key BEFORE leaving the driver’s seat.

Park-Lock
Fig. 4-17a/b
The Power Shuttle transmission is mechanically blocked
by the lever engaging the Park-Lock device (3). Therefore
the Park-Lock should be engaged every time you want
to stop the tractor with the engine stopped, particularly
when the tractor is on a slope.
To shift the lever (3), pull the block (2) upward.
To engage the Park-Lock (Fig.4-17a/b)
1 - Engage the parking brake (1)
2 - Engage the Park-Lock: Release the locking device
(2) and pull up the engagement lever (3).
To disengage the Park-Lock (Fig.4-17a/b)
1 - Release the locking device (2) and lower the lever
(3) to disengage the Park-Lock.
2 - Disengage the parking brake (1)

The Park-Lock must be disengaged before using Fig.4-17a

the reverse shuttle. Should the reverse shuttle be
engaged in forward or reverse gear with the Park-Lock
still engaged, the buzzer sounds until the Park-Lock is
disengaged. Disengage the Park-Lock and shift the shuttle
switch to neutral.
Now the shuttle can be shifted to forward or reverse gear
and the tractor started.

ATTENTION: To avoid damage to the Park-Lock

system, proceed as follows. Brake first, then engage
the Park-Lock. Always disengage the Park-Lock first,
then the parking brake.

ATTENTION:When the Park-Lock is engaged, the en-

gine can be started, but not so the tractor, while the
buzzer sounds. The Park-Lock must be disengaged for
the tractor to start.
Fig.4-17b
Powershuttle maintenance
Transmission oil: See Lubricant and Fuel Chart.
Carry out the same maintenance operations as described
for the standard transmission. The Powershuttle filter
should be replaced every 250 hours. This filter is placed
under the cab on the right-hand side, near the auxiliary con-
trol valves. See the Maintenance chapter for more details.

78
 Operation

Powershuttle troubleshooting
A buzzer sounds and the flashing message “AL” fol-
lowed by a two-digit number appears in the ground
speed and PTO RPM digital display on the instrument
panel (Fig. 4-18) if the Powershuttle system becomes
faulty. The number that follows the letters AL identifies
the incorrect manoeuvre or the Powershuttle operation-
al fault, according to the following scale of severity:

AL9+number: highly severe fault.

AL8+number: fault of medium severity.

Please contact your Dealer’s Service to have the problem Fig.4-18

solved.

PRIORITY 9 - Alarm code AL9.... is blinking on the digital display. Buzzer is on.

Code Function Note

AL99 Power fault (+) (-) of sensors Machine in neutral.

AL98 Faulty clutch pedal sensor Machine in neutral.

4
AL97 Faulty left-hand speed sensor. Machine remains in engaged mode.

AL96 Faulty right-hand speed sensor Machine remains in engaged mode.

AL95 Faulty engine RPM sensor Machine remains in engaged mode.

AL94 Faulty Park-Lock switch. Machine in normal mode.

AL93 PTO RPM sensor Machine remains in engaged mode.

AL92 Reverse shuttle lever sensor Buzzer operating. Machine in normal mode.

79
Operation

PRIORITY 8 - Alarm code AL8.... is blinking on the digital display. Buzzer is on.
Code Function Note

AL89 Reverse shuttle lever Machine in neutral.

- - -

AL86 REVERSE clutch control solenoid valve Machine in neutral.

AL85 DIRECT clutch control solenoid valve Machine in neutral.

- - -

AL83 Speedshift solenoid valve Machine in neutral.

AL82 Synchronized PTO switch PTO brake solenoid valve ON. Independent PTO engagement
is allowed. Further functions are active.

AL81 PTO brake solenoid valve No independent PTO.

Further functions are active.

AL80 PTO solenoid valve No independent PTO.

Further functions are active.

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

- Reversing at speed over 10 kph Buzzer operating

Reversing is possible.

- Reverse shuttle not in neutral with engaged Park-Lock Buzzer operating

- P TO b r a ke s o l e n o i d v a l v e , o p e n c i r- Buzzer operating
c u i t o r s h o r t c i r c u i t w i t h e n g a g e d P TO
switch
AL92 PTO brake safety - PTO brake does not stop rotation of Buzzer operating. Machine in normal mode.
rear PTO shaft

80
 Operation

Mechanical power take-off clutch

PTO clutch control lever (Fig.4-19)

– Pos. A = power take-off engaged.

– Pos. B = power take-off disengaged.

Disengage the PTO clutch by pulling the lever to the

coupling point. Depress the button on the lever to
release it and disengage the clutch.

2 - Coupling point of PTO engagement lever.

Warning: When working with the

mechanical power take-off, the clutch Fig.4-19
should be disengaged only for the time
strictly needed for the required operations.

Mechanical PTO engagement Engine - Power take-off RPM meter

For engine - PTO RPM meters and for PTO operation
1– Shift lever (1 - Fig. 4-19) in the disengagement
indicator lights, see the “Instrument and controls”
position B to disengage the clutch.
chapter (Fig.3-7).
2– Select the required PTO speed 540/540ECO/1000
RPM with selector lever (2 - Fig.4-20).

3– Engage the selector lever to operate the PTO (1 -

4
Fig.4-20); PTO control levers
4– Slowly move the control lever (1) to the engagement
position (A - Fig.4-19) to engage the PTO.

5– Engage/disengage the PTO during work by the

engagement control (1 - Fig.4-19).

Caution: When the PTO is not in use, keep the clutch

disengagement lever (1 - Fig.4-19) in the forward
position (clutch engaged) and disengage the PTO with
the relative lever (1 - Fig.4-20). During work with the
PTO, the clutch should be disengaged only for the time
strictly needed for the required operations.

Warning: When using the PTO with a stationary

tractor, always make sure that the creeper
lever of the gearshift is in neutral and that the
parking brake is engaged. Fig.4-20

1 - PTO operation selector lever

A- Independent power take-off
B - Power take-off synchronized with the gearbox

2 - PTO speed range selector lever

A - Economic 540 PTO or 1000 RPM
0 - Neutral
B - 540 RPM

81
Operation

Electro-hydraulic Power Take-Off [4.2.d]

The rear power take-off is fully independent from the
transmission. It is engaged by means of a multi-disc oil-
cooled hydraulic clutch

The PTO is engaged by a button (1 Fig.4-21a/b).

An indicator light on the instrument panel comes on when

the PTO is engaged (9 - Fig. 3-4).

Operation: engagement/disengagement
Engage/disengage the PTO (1 - Fig.4-21a/b) by the button
switch with engine at idling speed.

Pos. A PTO disengaged Fig. 4-21a - Mechanical lift

Pos. B PTO engaged

To engage the PTO, unlock the switch (1) shifting the

orange safety button (2) as indicated by the arrow, then
depress side B of the switch.

Always shift the switch in the disengaged position (A -

Fig.4-21a/b) after using the PTO or before starting the
engine.

NOTE: The engine can be started only if

the PTO engagement lever is in the neutral
position “B”.

Engage the PTO slowly to protect the clutch and driveline. Fig. 4-21b - Electronic lift
Select the operating mode and the required speed before
engaging the PTO.

IMPORTANT: For high-inertia implements (e.g. stone Engine - Power take-off RPM meter for
crusher, mill etc.) the universal joint for cardan shaft electro-hydraulic PTO [4.2.d]
is to be used.

WARNING: When using the PTO with the

tractor at a standstill, always make sure
that the creeper lever of the gearshift in
neutral position and that the parking brake
is engaged.

WARNING: High-inertia implements do not

stop immediately after the independent PTO Fig. 4-21c
has been disengaged. Wait for the implement
to slow down or stop completely before The indicator (1) displays the operating rate of the PTO
performing any cleaning or adjustment with great accuracy. The operating rate of implements for
operations. which the rotation speed must be precisely selected can
therefore be kept under constant control.
IMPORTANT: When using implements that cause shock Speed indicator of the PTO engaged (2):
loads, always use a safety coupler between the implement 540 RPM; 540 ECO RPM; 1000 RPM
and the PTO drive shaft. Before using the implement, check
the correct operation both of the safety coupler and of the
IMPORTANT: When using implements with quickly
implement.
moving parts (such as mowers, reapers, snowplows)
ALWAYS fit an overrun device on the implement drive
shaft, as a protection against possible PTO faults.

82
 Operation

Hydraulic PTO engagement PTO operation - All types

1– Select the required PTO speed 540/540ECO/1000 PTO operation selector lever (1 - Fig. 4-23)
RPM with selector lever (2 - Fig.4-22).
2– Engage the selector lever to operate the PTO (1 - Description of the symbols on the decal placed on the
Fig.4-22). right of the control lever (Fig.4-23).
3– Operate the switch to engage the PTO (Fig.4-21a/b).
4– Engage/disengage the PTO during work by the A - Independent PTO engaged.
engagement control (1 - Fig.4-21a/b). Directly driven by the engine.

IMPORTANT: Always keep the lever in position A

during work. Shift the lever to position B only if the
Hydraulic PTO control levers synchronized PTO has to be used. Shift the lever to
position A again after using the synchronized PTO.

B - Synchronized PTO proportional to ground speed

engaged. (On request)
Driven by the gearbox.

NOTE: The PTO operation selector lever (1-Fig.4-23) has

no neutral position. The mechanical neutral position is
obtained by bringing the speed range selector lever (2-
Fig. 4-22) in the middle position “O”.

IMPORTANT: The PTO mode selector lever,

independent or synchronized (optional), controls a
mechanical coupler that ensures the maximum safety
in both operation modes. The passage from a mode
to another, however, is only possible when the teeth
are aligned. The procedure is described under the
headings “Direct power take-off” and “Synchronized
4
power take-off” hereunder.
Fig. 4-22

1 - PTO operation selector lever

A- Independent power take-off
B- Synchronized power take-off
2 - PTO speed range selector lever
A - Economic 540 PTO or 1000 RPM
0 - Neutral
B - 540 RPM

Independent power take-off [4.2.d]

All types
The PTO can operate at 540 RPM with a 1944 RPM engine
rate or at 1000 RPM engine rate with the engine at 1956
RPM. (On request 540ECO RPM with engine at 1375
RPM). It is driven directly by the engine, and its operation
is fully independent from the ground speed of the tractor.

Independent PTO engagement

The direct PTO should be engaged with the engine at

idling speed and without hesitation. Do not heed any
noises due to tooth meshing.
Always keep the lever in “A” position (Fig.4-23), for
independent PTO engaged.
The synchronized PTO should be used only if necessary
(see “Synchronized PTO” section).
Fig. 4-23

83
Operation

Synchronized Power Take-Off

(Optional)

Use of the synchronized rear power take-off with the

gearbox is solely designed for towing self-driven trailers
and, more generally, for all those farming implements
which have to operate synchronised with tractor move-
ment and which do not require more than 40 - 45% of
rated engine power.
Engage the synchronized power take-off with the tractor
at standstill. Depress the clutch pedal to disengage the
gearshift clutch and shift the lever (1- Fig. 4-24) to the
“B” position.

Synchronized PTO engagement

The synchronized PTO has to be engaged without applying

any force, with the engine at idling speed. Move the tractor Fig. 4-24
a little forward to make the engagement easier. Sometime
you may need to engage the hydraulic PTO clutch for an
instant in order to allow the gear teeth to align and make
their engagement easier. When the synchronized PTO is
not used, the lever should be shifted to the direct PTO
position (lever 1, position A - Fig. 4-24).

IMPORTANT: When using the synchronized PTO and

if you are forced to reverse once or several times,
remember that the driveline inverts its spinning direc-
tion. Thus, with certain implements, it is advisable to
disengage the PTO when reversing in order to avoid
major damage (lever 2, position O - Fig. 4-25).

NOTE: For a table of the revolutions of the power take-

off output shaft for each revolution of the rear wheels,
see the Technical Specifications chapter.

84
 Operation

Speed range selection [4.2.d]

The speed range selector lever (2 - Fig. 4-25) allows to
change from 540 RPM PTO tp 1000 RPM (or 540ECO
RPM) and back. This lever has three positions:

A - PTO at 540 RPM

0 - PTO in neutral
B - PTO at 1000 RPM or 540ECO RPM

CAUTION: When the PTO is not used, the

speed range selector lever should always be
in neutral position (lever 2, position O, Fig.
4-25).

CAUTION: For the hydraulic PTO, disengage

the PTO clutch (lever 1, position B, Fig. 4-19)
and operate the switch (1 - Fig.4-21) before
Fig. 4-25
switching between two speed ranges.

WARNING: Only use PTO at 540 RPM (or

540ECO) or at 1000 RPM to drive implements PTO overspeed
designed for such respective rotation speeds.
Never allow the PTO shaft to rotate at more (NAO markets only)
than 630 RPM with implements designed for
540 RPM. The indicator light (1 - Fig.4-25b) on the dashboard comes
on if the max. allowed rated PTO speed is exceeded.
Reduce the engine rated speed to reduce the PTO
speed. 4
Economy PTO
NOTE: A flashing indicator light signals a problem with
A PTO speed of 540 RPM can be obtained for imple- the controller. In this case, ask your Dealer’s specialized
ments that do not require maximum power, such as workshop for help.
fertilizer spreaders, sprayers, etc.) by using the PTO at
540ECO RPM and decelerating to 1375 RPM. The PTO
economy mode has a number of advantages, including
a reduction in fuel consumption, noise and vibrations.

WARNING: 540 ECO power take-off is obtained

at 1375 RPM. Never exceed a 1890 RPM engine
rated speed (corresponding to 630 RPM of the
PTO shaft) or the PTO shaft and the connected
implement could be seriously damaged.

Fig. 4-25b

85
Operation

Interchangeable PTO shaft

Different PTO output shafts are available (Fig. 4-26):

•diameter 1 3/8” (34.9 mm.) shaft with 21 splines for

1000 RPM power take-off, standard assembly (2).
•diameter 1 3/8” (34.9 mm.) shaft with 6 splines for
the 540 RPM PTO, provided with the tractor (1).

Caution: Onlyuse the PTO driveline for 540 RPM if

the implement used requires a power greater than
56 kW (75 HP) since damage to the driveline itself
and to the connected implements could injure by-
standers. Implements requiring 56 kW (75 HP) may
be used only with PTO drivelines at 1000 RPM.

Proceed as follows to change the shaft:

• Remove the three fixingbolts (1- Fig. 4-26) and the
guard (2 - Fig. 4-26) Fig. 4-26 - Replacing the interchangeable PTO shaft.
• Remove the four fixing bolts (3 - Fig. 4-27) and replace
the output shaft 1 or 2 (Fig. 4-27)
• Correctly tighten the four fixing bolts of the output
shaft (3 - Fig. 4-27).
• Mount the guard again (2 - Fig. 4-26) with the relative
bolts.
After mounting the shaft, select the correct rotation
speed by means of the relative lever.

Fig. 4-27 - Replacing the interchangeable PTO shaft.

North America: 1000 RPM PTO with 540 RPM

shaft, 6 splines. 1000 RPM PTO only allowe with
1000 RPM shaft, 21 splines.

To change the output shaft (1), first remove the spring

ring (2 - Fig. 4-27b) using special nippers.
Take out the shaft. Thoroughly grease the new shaft
and fit it in place, making sure that it is fully inserted in
its housing.
Fit the spring ring correctly back in place: replace it if it
is damaged or deformed.

After installing the required shaft, select the correct

RPM rate by means of the selector lever.

CAUTION: Only use the PTO driveline for 540 RPM if

the implement used requires a power greater than 56
kW (75 HP) since damages to the driveline itself and
to the connected implements could injure bystand-
ers. Implements requiring more than 56 kW (75 HP) Fig. 4-27b - Changing the PTO driveline - NAO.
may be used only with PTO drivelines at 1000 RPM, 1 - PTO driveline.
21 splines. 2 - Spring ring.

86
 Operation

Precautions when using the PTO [4.2.e]

WARNING: PTO drivelines and implements

operated by the PTO can be extremely dan-
gerous. It is important to comply with the
following instructions:

WARNING: Never drive without the PTO

caps (2) or protection (1) mounted. These
components protect the operators from
injury and the shaft splines from damage
(Fig. 4-28).

WARNING: Before connecting, adjusting or

working on implements operated by the
PTO, disengage the PTO, stop the engine,
remove the ignition key and engage the
parking brake. Never work under raised
Fig.4-28 - PTO shaft guards
implements.

WARNING: Make sure that all implements

operated by the PTO are fitted with the
correct protections, are in a good condition
and comply with the laws in force.

WARNING: Before driving an implement WARNING: Never exceed 630 RPM

through the PTO, ALWAYS make sure that with implements designed
all bystanders are well away from the trac- for 540 RPM
tor. 4
WARNING: Fix the draw bar in the central WARNING: Economy PTO 540 ECO runs at
position when using implements operated 1375 RPM. Never exceed 1890 RPM engine rate
by the tractor’s PTO. (corresponding to 630 RPM of the PTO drive-
line) to avoid major damages to the driveline
WARNING: When using the PTO with the itself and the connected implement.
tractor at a standstill, always make sure
that the gears are in neutral position and WARNING: Connect the implement to the
that the parking brake is engaged. tractor drawbar before connecting the imple-
ment driveline to the power take-off. When
WARNING: Before starting up any PTO- connecting the implement driveline to the
driven implement hitched to the three- tractor, check the driveline for correct length,
point linkage, lift the implement to its full for practicable slant and for free telescopic
height and check that at least 1/4 of the movement. The correct length is important to
total length of the telescopic section of the prevent the driveline from hitting bottom or
drive shaft is engaged. Adjust the height from separating in any tractor or implement
limiter on the electronic power lift to limit operating position. An excessive slant could
the maximum height of the stroke. damage also the power take-off guards. [4.2.k]

Paddy fields warning

When using the tractor in paddy fields or marshy
ground, where the water level could rise above the
height of the PTO, ask your dealer for instructions on
all necessary waterproofing and sealing measures. If
such measures are not taken, the guarantee could be
rendered invalid.

87
Operation

Brakes
The rear and front brakes are multi-disc oil bath units.
Brake action is hydraulic, controlled by pumps operated
by the pedals.
A brake fluid reservoir keeps the brake circuit supplied
with fluid.

WARNING: When changing or topping up the

brake fluid in the reservoir, see the Fuel and
lubricant chart.

Main brakes
The main brakes are operated by means of two pedals
(2 - Fig. 4-29), one for each rear wheel. Braking on one
side assists steering in tight manoeuvres. By locking
the rear wheel on the inside of a curve, you can virtually Fig.4-29 - Brakes
turn the tractor around on its own axis. For simultane-
ous braking during normal use and for on-road use,
simply lock the two pedals together with the special Parking brake
brake coupling lock (3 - Fig. 4-29). It becomes even
more important to do this if the tractor is also equipped A hand lever (1 - Fig. 4-29) controls the parking brake.
with front brakes, since a device installed in the hydrau- This acts, via a series of linkages, directly on the brake
lic control circuit only allows the front brakes to be used discs and is fully independent of the foot brakes. The
if the two pedals are operated at the same time. parking brake can therefore also be used as an emer-
gency brake.
WARNING: ALWAYS keep the brake pedals The parking brake lever is held in place by a ratchet
coupled for on-road driving to ensure simul- mechanism.
taneous braking on all four wheels. NEVER To release the lever, simply press the button at the end
use the brakes independently when driving of the lever (2 - Fig.4-29).
on public roads. A red warning light on the instrument panel comes on
to show that the parking brake is engaged.

WARNING: If you ever notice the brakes

becoming less effective, identify the cause
immediately and repair. When working on
slopes, avoid using the brakes as much as
possible and select a lower gear in order to
use engine braking.

88
 Operation

Hydraulic trailer brake (Approved for

ITALY) - Fig. 4-30
The tractor braking system can be equipped with a
hydraulic valve (2) which, if connected to the hydraulic
circuit of the trailer brakes, allows the trailer itself to be
braked along with the tractor. .
Comply with the following instructions to correctly
connect and disconnect the flexible trailer brake tube to
and from the union (1) at the rear of the tractor and to
always operate in conditions of the utmost safety.

The trailer-tractor connecting tube can be connected

and disconnected with the engine either running or at a
standstill:

- With the engine at a standstill: there are no difficul-

ties when either connecting or disconnecting as Fig.4-30 -Hydraulic trailer braking tap (Approved for
there is no oil pressure in the brake circuit. ITALY).
1 - Valve unit.
- With the engine running: it is essential to engage 2 - Oil tap union.
the hand brake since this ensures that no pressure 3 - Indicator light on dashboard.
remains in the brake circuit.

Hydraulic trailer brake (Approved for

WARNING: It is extremely important to al-
ways carry out this operation before detach-
FRANCE and EXPORT market) (Fig. 4-31)

4
ing the trailer from the tractor since it en-
The tractor braking system can be equipped with a
sures the immediate action of the automatic
dedicated hydraulic valve (1) that, if connected to the
safety braking system with which this trailer
hydraulic circuit of the trailer brakes, allows the trailer to
braking system is obligatorily equipped.
be braked along with the tractor.
The flexible tube of the trailer brakes should be con-
There is a specific indicator light (3) on the control panel
nected to the union (2) installed at the rear of the trac-
of the tractor which keeps the operator constantly
tor.
informed about the operating conditions of the trailer
brake oil tap. WARNING: Always take great care during
these operations. Your safety and other per-
Indicator light off: sons’ is at stake!
- When the oil tap is not connected to the trailer.
- When the pressure of the oil in the circuit is regular
with the trailer connected.

Indicator light on:

- When the engine is at a standstill and the ignition key
is turned to first position.
- When the hand brake is engaged with the engine run-
ning.

WARNING: If the indicator light should

come on in conditions differing from those
mentioned above, this means that there is a
fault in the braking system and that use of it
must immediately stop for safety reasons.

Fig.4-31-Hydraulic trailer braking tap

(Approved for FRANCE and EXPORT market).
1- Valve unit.
2- Oil tap union.

89
Operation

Locking the differential

The tractors are fitted with a system for locking the
differential on the rear and front axles on 4WD models.
The system is used when a wheel slips because of lack
of grip. To lock the differentials, just press the button
(1 - Fig. 4-32; Fig.4-33) under the control panel of the
electronic power lift for a second. If the tractor is fitted
with 4WD with Hydralock system, this control not only
locks the rear differential, but also the front one.

A yellow function indicator on the instrument panel

lights up to indicate that the diff lock is engaged (cab
versions only).

NOTE: For the best results, engage the diff lock before
the wheels are likely to slip. Do not engage the lock
Fig.4-32 - Mechanical lift
while one of the wheels is actually slipping. Do not lock
the differential without previously depressing the clutch
pedal.

Keep the differential locked until the driving wheels do

not slip any more. Just depress both brake pedals to
unlock the differential.

WARNING: Disengage the diff lock when you

need to turn the tractor. Disengage the lock
when driving on a road.

Four-wheel drive
4WD increases traction on broken ground, muddy and
slippery surfaces, etc.
Fig.4-33 - Electronic lift
Press the button (2 - Fig. 4-32; Fig.4-33) to engage or
disengage 4WD.

Both operations must be carried out while the tractor

is on the move, on a straight stretch and never under
load.

NOTE: Only use four-wheel drive when strictly neces-

sary. Avoid use of 4WD when maximum traction is not
required, e.g. on hard ground, roads, etc., since this
would only increase tyre wear unnecessarily.

90
 Operation

Adjusting wheel tracks

Adjusting wheel tracks on 2WD axles (if avail-
able)

WARNING: When you lift up the tractor to

adjust the wheel tracks, follow the directions
for lifting in the Safety Notes section.

The front wheel track of tractors with two driving

wheels can be adjusted to different widths in steps of
100 mm (3.94”) each.

Proceed in the following way to adjust track width (Fig.

4-34 and 4-35): Fig.4-34

• Use wooden wedges to block completely any axle

swing.

• Use a jack lift of suitable capacity at the centre of the

axle to lift the front axle.

• Unscrew and remove the nuts, bolts (1) and wash-

ers that hold the sliding ends.

• Remove the bolt (2) that fastens the track rod

clamp.

• Slide the RH end sideways and fix it at the required

track width. 4
• Repeat the same operation for the LH end. The posi- Fig.4-35
tion of the hydraulic steering cylinder must also be
adjusted by moving the support (4) to one of the five
IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back
positions (5) that corresponds to the required track
again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
width.
means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
The wheel nuts should be fastened to a torque of - First check after 10 work hours.
120-145 Nm. - Second check after 50 work hours.
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

4WD front axle

Adjusting the max. steering angle

The maximum steering angle of the 4WD front axle can

be varied depending on the type of tyre mounted and
the way the tractor is used. The angle is changed by
adjusting the stop screw (1 - Fig. 4-36) on the final drive
of the axle.

This adjustment is very useful when adopting minimum

track since it prevents the wheels from interfering with
the engine housing.

Fig.4-36 - Adjusting the steering angle.

1 - Adjuster screw.
2 - Check nut.

91
Operation

4WD axle - Adjusting wheel track

The front track on 4WD tractors can be adjusted by
changing the position of the hubs and central wheel
discs as shown in the table below.

1 - Prescribed torque wrench setting for M16 wheel

nuts (1 - Fig.4-37): 120-145 Nm.

2 - Rim to disk 210-230 Nm (2 - Fig.4-37).

WARNING: When you lift up the tractor to

adjust the wheel tracks, follow the directions
for lifting in the Safety Notes section.
Fig.4-37 - Front track adjustment for 4WD tractor

WARNING: Maximum attention must be used IMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back
when dismounting the front wheels: because again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
of their weight, a suitable hoist must be used means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
to remove and handle the wheels. - First check after 10 work hours.
- Second check after 50 work hours.
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

Wheel disc pointing inwards Wheel disc pointing outwards

A E

B F

C G

D H

Fig.4-38 - Front wheel tracks for 4WD tractors.

92
 Operation

Rear track width adjustment

The rear track width can be adjusted by changing the
position of the rim fixing points or the central wheel
discs, as shown in the table below.

Torque the nuts and bolts (1 - Fig. 4-39) that fix the rim
to the disc to 205-240 Nm and those (2) that fix the disc
to the wheel hub to 340-420 Nm. Always check tyre
pressure.

Certain track widths cannot be obtained with some tyre

types (see table Fig. 4-40).

WARNING: When you lift up the tractor to

adjust the wheel tracks, follow the directions
for lifting in the Safety Notes section.
Fig.4-39
WARNING: Maximum attention must be used
when dismounting the rear wheels: because
of their weight, a suitable hoist must be used
to remove and handle the wheels. iMPORTANT: After removing and fitting the wheels back
again, it is important to check the torques of all bolts by
means of a torque wrench at the following intervals:
- First check after 10 work hours.
- Second check after 50 work hours.
- Third check and further checks every 500 work hours.

Adjusting rear track widths - Rim and disc position 4

Wheel disc pointing inwards Wheel disc pointing outwards

A E

B F

C G

D H

Fig.4-40 - Rear track widths

93
Operation

4WD FRONT TRACKS - See Fig.4-38

REAR TRACKS - See Fig.4-40
* Tracks marked with an asterisk are reference tracks.
Est = outer width; Int = inner width; Car. = track
Tyre combinations for F model tractors with 4WD front axle with brakes

3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
5.50F16 Rim W12-24 5.50F16 Rim W12-28
7.50-16 Tyre 13.6 R 24 7.50-18 Tyre 13.6 R 28
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1337 927 1132 A - - - 1336 922 1128 A - - -
1413 1003 1208* B 988 650 1330 1426 1012 1218 B 987 640 1334
1417 1007 1212 C 1134* 794 1474 1368 954 1162* C 1001 654 1348
1493 1083 1288 D 1247 905 1585 1459 1045 1252 D 1112* 765 1459
1497 1087 1292 E 1043 703 1283 1335 1121 1328 E 1176 829 1523
1573 1163 1368 F 1156 815 1495 1625 1211 1418 F 1287 940 1634
1577 1167 1372 G 1302 962 1642 1569 1155 1362 G 1300 954 1648
1653 1243 1448 H 1415 1075 1755 1659 1245 1452 H 1412 1065 1759

3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
5.50F20 Rim W12-28 W9 x18 Rim W13-24
7.50-20 Tyre 14.9R28 280/70R18 Tyre 16.9 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1332 932 1132 A - - - 1394 830 1112 A - - -
1422 1022 1222 B 987 607 1367 1500 936 1218 B - - -
1406 1006 1206 C 1001 621 1381 1442 878 1162 C 1134* 694 1574
1496 1096 1296 D 1112* 732 1492 1550 986 1268 D 1247 810 1690
1482 1082 1284* E 1176 796 1556 1594 1030 1312 E 1043 603 1483
1574 1174 1374 F 1287 907 1667 1700 1136 1418 F 1156 716 1596
1558 1158 1358 G 1300 918 1678 1642 1078 1362 G 1302 862 1742
1648 1248 1448 H 1412 1032 1792 1750 1186 1452 H 1415 978 1858

3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W8x16 Rim W12-28 W8x16 Rim W12-24
280/70R18 Tyre 360/70 R 28 260/70R18 Tyre 380/70 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car.
1437 873 1155 A - - - 1414 898 1155 A - - -
1541 977 1259 B 987 638 1342 1517 1001 1259 B 988 618 1358
1521 957 1239 C 1001 652 1356 1496 980 1239 C 1134* 765 1505
1624 1060 1343* D 1112* 760 1464 1601 1085 1343* D 1247 875 1615
1517 953 1235 E 1175 820 1524 1493 977 1235 E 1043 673 1413
1622 1058 1339 F 1287 942 1646 1598 1082 1339 F 1156 788 1528
1601 1037 1319 G 1301 949 1653 1576 1060 1319 G 1302 932 1672
1705 1141 1423 H 1412 1064 1768 1680 1164 1423 H 1415 1043 1783

3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W10x16 Rim W13-24 W9 x18 Rim W12-28
280/70R18 Tyre 420/70 R 24 280/70R18 Tyre 380/70 R28
Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car.
1437 873 1155 A - - - 1394 830 1112 A - - -
1541 977 1259 B - - - 1500 936 1218 B 987 617 1357
1521 957 1239 C 1134* 719 1549 1444 880 1162 C 1001 631 1371
1625 1061 1343 D 1247 835 1665 1550 986 1268* D 1112* 739 1479
1517 953 1235* E 1175 628 1458 1594 1030 1312 E 1176 806 1546
1621 1057 1339 F 1287 741 1571 1700 1136 1418 F 1287 917 1657
1601 1037 1319 G 1301 887 1717 1644 1080 1362 G 1301 931 1671
1704 1140 1423 H 1412 1000 1830 1750 1186 1452 H 1412 1042 1782

94
 Operation

4WD FRONT TRACKS - See Fig.4-38

REAR TRACKS - See Fig.4-40
* Tracks marked with an asterisk are reference tracks.
Est = outer width; Int = inner width; Car. = track
Tyre combinations for F model tractors with 4WD front axle with brakes

3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W10x16 Rim W12-24 5.50F16 Rim W12-24
280/70R18 Tyre 14.9 R 24 8.25-16 Tyre 14.9 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1437 873 1155 A - - - 1344 920 1132 A - - -
1541 977 1259 B 988 613 1363 1420 996 1208* B 988 615 1365
1521 957 1239 C 1134* 757 1507 1424 1000 1212 C 1134* 757 1509
1625 1061 1343 D 1247 872 1622 1500 1076 1288 D 1247 872 1622
1518 954 1235* E 1043 668 1418 1504 1080 1292 E 1043 668 1418
1621 1057 1339 F 1156 780 1530 1580 1156 1368 F 1156 780 1530
1601 1037 1319 G 1302 927 1677 1584 1160 1372 G 1302 927 1677
1704 1140 1423 H 1415 1040 1790 1660 1236 1448 H 1415 1040 1790

3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W9x20 Rim W12-28 W9x20 Rim W14L-28
280/70 R 20 Tyre 14.9 R 28 280/70 R 20 Tyre 420/70 R 28
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1300 736 1018 A - - - 1300 736 1018 A - - -
1390 826 1108 B 987 607 1367 1390 826 1108 B - - -
1494 930 1212* C 1001 621 1381 1494 930 1212* C - -
1584 1020 1302 D 1112* 732 1492 1584 1020 1302 D 1112* 697 1527
1560
1650
996
1086
1278
1368
E
F
1176
1287
796
907
1556
1667
1560
1650
996
1086
1278
1368
E
F
1176
1287
761
873
1591
1703 4
1754 1190 1472 G 1301 921 1681 1754 1190 1472 G 1301 886 1716
1844 1280 1562 H 1412 1032 1792 1844 1280 1562 H 1412 997 1827

3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F 3670-3680-3685 F
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W9 x18 Rim W14L-24 5.50F16 Rim W10-28
280/70R18 Tyre 440/80 R 24 8.25-16 Tyre 12.4 R 28
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1394 830 1112 A - - - 1344 920 1132 A - -
1500 936 1218 B - - - 1420 996 1208* B 987 672 1302
1444 880 1162 C 1134* 693 1575 1424 1000 1212 C 1001 686 1316
1550 986 1268* D 1247 806 1688 1500 1076 1288 D 1112* 795 1425
1596 1032 1312 E 1043 602 1484 1504 1080 1292 E 1175 863 1493
1700 1136 1418 F 1156 714 1596 1580 1156 1368 F 1287 972 1602
1644 1080 1362 G 1302 861 1743 1584 1160 1372 G 1301 986 1616
1750 1186 1468 H 1415 974 1856 1660 1236 1448 H 1413 1098 1728

3690-36100-36110-36120 F 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W10x16 Rim W13-24 W10x16 Rim W13-24
280/65R16 Tyre 440/65 R 24 280/65R16 Tyre 420/65 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1437 873 1155 A - - - 1437 873 1155 A - - -
1541 977 1259 B - - - 1541 977 1259 B - - -
1521 957 1239* C 1134* 689 1579 1521 957 1239* C 1134* 713 1555
1625 1061 1343 D 1247 802 1692 1625 1061 1343 D 1247 826 1668
1517 953 1235 E 1043 598 1488 1517 953 1235 E 1043 622 1464
1621 1057 1339 F 1156 711 1601 1621 1057 1339 F 1156 735 1577
1601 1037 1319 G 1302 857 1747 1601 1037 1319 G 1302 881 1723
1704 1140 1423 H 1415 970 1860 1705 1140 1423 H 1415 994 1836

95
Operation

4WD FRONT TRACKS - See Fig.4-38

REAR TRACKS - See Fig.4-40
* Tracks marked with an asterisk are reference tracks.
Est = outer width; Int = inner width; Car. = track
Tyre combinations for GE model tractors with 4WD front axle - Footstep tractors

3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 GE 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 GE

Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks

1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
5.50F16 Rim W12-24 W8 x 16 Rim W11 x 20
8.25-16 Tyre 360/70 R 24 9.0/75 - 16 Tyre 14.9 LR 20
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1344 920 1132* A - - - 1384 926 1155 A 989 608 1370
1420 996 1208 B 1001 645 1357 1488 1030 1259 B 1083* 702 1464
1424 1000 1212 C 1121 765 1477 1468 1010 1239* C 1207 826 1588
1500 1076 1288 D 1234 879 1590 1572 1114 1343* D 1301 920 1682
1504 1080 1292 E 1055* 699 1411 1464 1006 1235 E 989 608 1370
1580 1156 1368 F 1169 813 1525 1568 1110 1339 F 1083 702 1464
1584 1160 1372 G 1289 933 1645 1548 1090 1319 G 1207 826 1588
1660 1236 1448 H 1402 1046 1578 1652 1194 1423 H 1301 920 1682

3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 GE 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 GE

Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks

1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W8x16 Rim W11 x 20 W8x16 Rim W12-24
260/70R18 Tyre 14.9 LR 20 280/70R18 Tyre 360/70 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1414 898 1155 A 989 608 1370 1437 873 1155 A - - -
1517 1001 1259 B 1083* 702 1464 1541 977 1259 B 987 638 1342
1496 980 1239 C 1207 826 1588 1521 957 1239 C 1001 652 1356
1601 1085 1343* D 1301 920 1682 1624 1060 1343* D 1112* 760 1464
1493 977 1235 E 989 608 1370 1517 953 1235 E 1175 820 1524
1598 1082 1339 F 1083 702 1464 1622 1058 1339 F 1287 942 1646
1576 1060 1319 G 1207 826 1588 1601 1037 1319 G 1301 949 1653
1680 1164 1423 H 1301 920 1682 1705 1141 1423 H 1412 1064 1768

96
 Operation

4WD FRONT TRACKS - See Fig.4-38

REAR TRACKS - See Fig.4-40
* Tracks marked with an asterisk are reference tracks.
Est = outer width; Int = inner width; Car. = track
Tyre combinations for GT model tractors with 4WD front axle

3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT 3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1442 Interflange 1295 1442 Interflange 1295
W9-20 Rim W12-28 5.50F16 Rim W12-24
300/70 R20 Tyre 14.9 R 28 8.25-16 Tyre 13.6 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1468 888 1178 A - - - 1504 1080 1292* A - - -
1558 978 1268 B 1147 746 1548 1580 1156 1368 B 1148 776 1520
1662 1082 1372* C 1161 760 1562 1584 1160 1372 C 1294* 922 1666
1752 1172 1462 D 1272* 871 1573 1660 1236 1438 D 1407 1035 1779
1728 1148 1438 E 1336 935 1737 1664 1240 1452 E 1203 831 1575
1818 1238 1528 F 1447 1046 1848 1740 1316 1528 F 1316 944 1688
1922 1342 1632 G 1461 1060 1862 1744 1320 1532 G 1462 1030 1834
2012 1432 1722 H 1572 1171 1973 1820 1396 1608 H 1575 1203 1947

3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT 3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1442 Interflange 1295 1442 Interflange 1295
5.50F 18 Rim W12-24 5.50F20 Rim W12-28
7.50 R 18 Tyre 14.9 R 24 7.50R20 Tyre 13.6 R 28
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1488 1088 1288 A - - - 1497 1087 1292 A - - -

4
1578 1178 1378 B 1148 746 1550 1587 1177 1382 B 1147 782 1512
1522 1122 1322* C 1294* 892 1696 1571 1161 1366 C 1161 796 1526
1611 1211 1412 D 1407 1005 1809 1661 1251 1456 D 1272* 907 1637
1688 1288 1488 E 1203 801 1605 1649 1239 1444* E 1336 971 1701
1778 1378 1578 F 1316 914 1718 1739 1329 1534 F 1447 1082 1812
1722 1322 1522 G 1462 1060 1864 1723 1313 1518 G 1461 1096 1826
1812 1412 1612 H 1575 1173 1977 1813 1403 1608 H 1572 1207 1937

3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT 3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT

Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks

1442 Interflange 1295 1442 Interflange 1295
W8-20 Rim W12-28 9 - 18 Rim W12-24
9.5 R 20 Tyre 14.9 R 28 280/70 R 18 Tyre 14.9 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1423 933 1178 A - - - 1554 994 1272 A - - -
1513 1023 1268 B 1147 746 1548 1658 1098 1378 B 1148 746 1550
1617 1127 1372* C 1161 760 1562 1602 1042 1322 C 1294* 892 1696
1707 1217 1462 D 1272* 871 1573 1708 1141 1428* D 1407 1005 1809
1683 1193 1438 E 1336 935 1737 1752 1192 1472 E 1203 801 1605
1773 1283 1528 F 1447 1046 1848 1858 1298 1578 F 1316 914 1718
1877 1387 1632 G 1461 1060 1862 1802 1242 1522 G 1462 1060 1864
1967 1477 1722 H 1572 1171 1973 1908 1348 1628 H 1575 1173 1977

97
Operation

4WD FRONT TRACKS - See Fig.4-38

REAR TRACKS - See Fig.4-40
* Tracks marked with an asterisk are reference tracks.
Est = outer width; Int = inner width; Car. = track
Tyre combinations for GT model tractors with 4WD front axle

3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F 3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1442 Interflange 1295 1442 Interflange 1295
9 - 18 Rim W12-28 W9-20 Rim W14L-28
280/70 R 18 Tyre 360/70 R 28 300/70 R 20 Tyre 420/70 R 28
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1554 994 1272 A - - - 1468 888 1178 A - - -
1658 1098 1378 B 1147 790 1504 1558 978 1268 B 1147 718 1576
1602 1042 1322 C 1161 804 1518 1662 1082 1372* C 1161 732 1590
1708 1141 1428* D 1272* 915 1629 172 1172 1462 D 1272* 843 1701
1752 1192 1472 E 1336 979 1693 1728 1148 1438 E 1336 907 1765
1858 1298 1578 F 1447 1090 1804 1818 1238 1528 F 1447 1018 1876
1802 1242 1522 G 1461 1104 1818 1922 1632 1342 G 1461 1032 1890
1908 1348 1628 H 1572 1215 1929 2012 1432 1722 H 1572 1143 2001

3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT 3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1442 Interflange 1295 1442 Interflange 1295
9 - 18 Rim W13-24 W8 - 16 Rim W12-24
10.5/80 - 18 Tyre 16.9 R 24 280/70 R 16 Tyre 380/70 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1542 1002 1272 A - - - 1591 1039 1315 A - - -
1648 1108 1378 B 1148 708 1588 1695 1143 1419 B 1148 772 1524
1592 1052 1322 C 1294* 854 1734 1675 1123 1399 C 1294* 918 1670
1698 1158 1428* D 1407 967 1847 1779 1227 1503* D 1407 1031 1783
1742 1202 1472 E 1203 763 1643 1671 1119 1395 E 1203 827 1579
1848 1308 1578 F 1316 876 1756 1775 1223 1499 F 1316 940 1692
1792 1252 1522 G 1462 1022 1902 1755 1203 1479 G 1462 1086 1838
1898 1358 1628 H 1575 1135 2015 1859 1307 1583 H 1575 1199 1951

3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT 3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1442 Interflange 1295 1442 Interflange 1295
9 - 18 Rim W13-24 W9 - 20 Rim W12-28
280/70 R 18 Tyre 420/70 R 24 280/70 R 20 Tyre 380/70 R28
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1552 992 1272 A - - - 1454 902 1178 A - - -
1658 1098 1378 B 1148 715 1581 1544 992 1268 B 1147 775 1519
1602 1042 1322 C 1294* 861 1727 1648 1096 1372* C 1161 789 1533
1708 1141 1428* D 1407 974 1840 1738 1186 1462 D 1272* 900 1644
1752 1192 1472 E 1203 770 1636 1714 1162 1438 E 1336 964 1708
1858 1298 1578 F 1316 883 1749 1804 1252 1528 F 1447 1075 1819
1802 1242 1522 G 1462 1029 1895 1908 1356 1632 G 1461 1089 1833
1908 1348 1628 H 1575 1142 2008 1998 1446 1722 H 1572 1200 1944

98
 Operation

4WD FRONT TRACKS - See Fig.4-38

REAR TRACKS - See Fig.4-40
* Tracks marked with an asterisk are reference tracks.
Est = outer width; Int = inner width; Car. = track
Tyre combinations for GT model tractors with 4WD front axle

3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT 3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1442 Interflange 1295 1442 Interflange 1295
9 - 18 Rim W13-24 W10 - 16 Rim W13-24
300/65 R 18 Tyre 440/65 R 24 300/65 R 16 Tyre 420/65 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1567 977 1272 A - - - 1610 1020 1315 A - - -
1673 1083 1378 B 1148 707 1589 1714 1124 1419 B 1148 727 1569
1617 1027 1322 C 1294* 853 1735 1694 1104 1399 C 1294* 873 1715
1723 1133 1428 D 1407 966 1848 1798 1208 1503 D 1407 986 1828
1767 1177 1472* E 1203 762 1644 1690 1100 1395* E 1203 782 1624
1873 1283 1578 F 1316 875 1757 1794 1204 1499 F 1316 895 1737
1817 1227 1522 G 1462 1021 1903 1774 1184 1479 G 1462 1041 1883
1923 1333 1628 H 1575 1134 2016 1878 1288 1583 H 1575 1154 1996

3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT 3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1442 Interflange 1295 1442 Interflange 1295
5.50F 18 Rim W12-28 9 - 18 Rim W14L-24
7.50 R 18 Tyre 360/70 R28 280/80 R 18 Tyre 16.9 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1488 1088 1288 A - - - 1562 982 1272 A - - -
1578 1178 1378 B 1147 790 1504 1668 1088 1378 B 1148 708 1588
1522
1611
1122
1212
1322*
1412
C
D
1161
1272*
804
915
1518
1629
1612
1718
1032
1138
1322
1428*
C
D
1294*
1407
854
967
1734
1847 4
1688 1288 1488 E 1336 979 1693 1762 1182 1472 E 1203 763 1643
1778 1378 1578 F 1447 1090 1804 1868 1288 1578 F 1316 876 1756
1722 1322 1522 G 1461 1104 1818 1812 1232 1522 G 1462 1022 1902
1812 1412 1612 H 1572 1215 1929 1918 1338 1628 H 1575 1135 2015

3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT 3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT
Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1442 Interflange 1295 1442 Interflange 1295
W9-20 Rim W12-28 W9 - 18 Rim W14L-24
280/80 R 20 Tyre 14.9 R 28 280/80 R 18 Tyre 440/80 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1470 886 1178 A - - - 1562 982 1272 A - - -
1560 976 1268 B 1147 744 1550 1668 1088 1378 B 1148 707 1589
1664 1080 1372* C 1162 758 1564 1612 1032 1322 C 1294* 853 1735
1754 1170 1462 D 1272* 869 1675 1718 1138 1428* D 1407 966 1848
1730 1146 1438 E 1336 933 1739 1762 1182 1472 E 1203 762 1644
1820 1236 1528 F 1447 1044 1850 1868 1288 1578 F 1316 875 1757
1924 1340 1632 G 1461 1058 1864 1812 1232 1522 G 1462 1021 1903
2014 1430 1722 H 1572 1169 1975 1918 1338 1628 H 1575 1134 2016

99
Operation

4WD FRONT TRACKS - See Fig.4-38

REAR TRACKS - See Fig.4-40
* Tracks marked with an asterisk are reference tracks.
Est = outer width; Int = inner width; Car. = track
Tyre combinations for 4-cyl. 3675F-3685F model tractors with 4WD front axle with brakes

3675F-3685F 4 cylinders 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders

Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
5.50F16 Rim W12-24 5.50F16 Rim W12-28
7.50-16 Tyre 13.6 R 24 7.50-18 Tyre 13.6 R 28
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1337 927 1132 A - - - 1336 922 1128 A - - -
1413 1003 1208* B 988 650 1330 1426 1012 1218 B 987 640 1334
1417 1007 1212 C 1134* 794 1474 1368 954 1162* C 1001 654 1348
1493 1083 1288 D 1247 905 1585 1459 1045 1252 D 1112* 765 1459
1497 1087 1292 E 1043 703 1283 1335 1121 1328 E 1176 829 1523
1573 1163 1368 F 1156 815 1495 1625 1211 1418 F 1287 940 1634
1577 1167 1372 G 1302 962 1642 1569 1155 1362 G 1300 954 1648
1653 1243 1448 H 1415 1075 1755 1659 1245 1452 H 1412 1065 1759

3675F-3685F 4 cylinders 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders

Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
5.50F20 Rim W12-28 W9 x18 Rim W13-24
7.50-20 Tyre 14.9R28 280/70R18 Tyre 16.9 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1332 932 1132 A - - - 1394 830 1112 A - - -
1422 1022 1222 B 987 607 1367 1500 936 1218 B - - -
1406 1006 1206 C 1001 621 1381 1442 878 1162 C 1134* 694 1574
1496 1096 1296 D 1112* 732 1492 1550 986 1268 D 1247 810 1690
1482 1082 1284* E 1176 796 1556 1594 1030 1312 E 1043 603 1483
1574 1174 1374 F 1287 907 1667 1700 1136 1418 F 1156 716 1596
1558 1158 1358 G 1300 918 1678 1642 1078 1362 G 1302 862 1742
1648 1248 1448 H 1412 1032 1792 1750 1186 1452 H 1415 978 1858

3675F-3685F 4 cylinders 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders

Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W8x16 Rim W12-28 W8x16 Rim W12-24
280/70R18 Tyre 360/70 R 28 260/70R18 Tyre 380/70 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car.
1437 873 1155 A - - - 1414 898 1155 A - - -
1541 977 1259 B 987 638 1342 1517 1001 1259 B 988 618 1358
1521 957 1239 C 1001 652 1356 1496 980 1239 C 1134* 765 1505
1624 1060 1343* D 1112* 760 1464 1601 1085 1343* D 1247 875 1615
1517 953 1235 E 1175 820 1524 1493 977 1235 E 1043 673 1413
1622 1058 1339 F 1287 942 1646 1598 1082 1339 F 1156 788 1528
1601 1037 1319 G 1301 949 1653 1576 1060 1319 G 1302 932 1672
1705 1141 1423 H 1412 1064 1768 1680 1164 1423 H 1415 1043 1783

3675F-3685F 4 cylinders 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders

Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W10x16 Rim W13-24 W9 x18 Rim W12-28
280/70R18 Tyre 420/70 R 24 280/70R18 Tyre 380/70 R28
Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car.
1437 873 1155 A - - - 1394 830 1112 A - - -
1541 977 1259 B - - - 1500 936 1218 B 987 617 1357
1521 957 1239 C 1134* 719 1549 1444 880 1162 C 1001 631 1371
1625 1061 1343 D 1247 835 1665 1550 986 1268* D 1112* 739 1479
1517 953 1235* E 1175 628 1458 1594 1030 1312 E 1176 806 1546
1621 1057 1339 F 1287 741 1571 1700 1136 1418 F 1287 917 1657
1601 1037 1319 G 1301 887 1717 1644 1080 1362 G 1301 931 1671
1704 1140 1423 H 1412 1000 1830 1750 1186 1452 H 1412 1042 1782

100
 Operation

4WD FRONT TRACKS - See Fig.4-38

REAR TRACKS - See Fig.4-40
* Tracks marked with an asterisk are reference tracks.
Est = outer width; Int = inner width; Car. = track
Tyre combinations for 4-cyl. 3675F-3685F model tractors with 4WD front axle with brakes

3675F-3685F 4 cylinders 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders

Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W10x16 Rim W12-24 5.50F16 Rim W12-24
280/70R18 Tyre 14.9 R 24 8.25-16 Tyre 14.9 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1437 873 1155 A - - - 1344 920 1132 A - - -
1541 977 1259 B 988 613 1363 1420 996 1208* B 988 615 1365
1521 957 1239 C 1134* 757 1507 1424 1000 1212 C 1134* 757 1509
1625 1061 1343 D 1247 872 1622 1500 1076 1288 D 1247 872 1622
1518 954 1235* E 1043 668 1418 1504 1080 1292 E 1043 668 1418
1621 1057 1339 F 1156 780 1530 1580 1156 1368 F 1156 780 1530
1601 1037 1319 G 1302 927 1677 1584 1160 1372 G 1302 927 1677
1704 1140 1423 H 1415 1040 1790 1660 1236 1448 H 1415 1040 1790

3675F-3685F 4 cylinders 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders

Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W9x20 Rim W12-28 W9x20 Rim W14L-28
280/70 R 20 Tyre 14.9 R 28 280/70 R 20 Tyre 420/70 R 28
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1300 736 1018 A - - - 1300 736 1018 A - - -
1390 826 1108 B 987 607 1367 1390 826 1108 B - - -
1494 930 1212* C 1001 621 1381 1494 930 1212* C - -

4
1584 1020 1302 D 1112* 732 1492 1584 1020 1302 D 1112* 697 1527
1560 996 1278 E 1176 796 1556 1560 996 1278 E 1176 761 1591
1650 1086 1368 F 1287 907 1667 1650 1086 1368 F 1287 873 1703
1754 1190 1472 G 1301 921 1681 1754 1190 1472 G 1301 886 1716
1844 1280 1562 H 1412 1032 1792 1844 1280 1562 H 1412 997 1827

3675F-3685F 4 cylinders 3675F-3685F 4 cylinders

Front tracks Rear tracks Front tracks Rear tracks
1282 Interflange 1135 1282 Interflange 1135
W10x16 Rim W13-24 5.50F16 Rim W12-24
280/65R16 Tyre 420/65 R 24 7.50-16 Tyre 14.9 R 24
Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car. Est. Int. Car. Position Est. Int. Car.
1437 873 1155 A - - - 1337 927 1132 A - - -
1541 977 1259 B - - - 1413 1003 1208* B 988 615 1365
1521 957 1239* C 1134* 713 1555 1417 1007 1212 C 1134* 759 1509
1625 1061 1343 D 1247 826 1668 1493 1083 1288 D 1247 872 1622
1517 953 1235 E 1043 622 1464 1497 1087 1292 E 1043 668 1418
1621 1057 1339 F 1156 735 1577 1573 1163 1368 F 1156 780 1530
1601 1037 1319 G 1302 881 1723 1577 1167 1372 G 1302 927 1627
1705 1140 1423 H 1415 994 1836 1653 1243 1448 H 1415 1040 1790

101
Operation

Wheels and tyres Wheel removing procedure [4.1.k]

Regularly check that the front and rear wheel nuts are WARNING: If a wheel has to be removed (e.g.
fully tightened. to remove a punched tyre), this operation
must be carried out by a suitably equipped
Tyre pressure must be checked and adjusted before us- workshop. If the suitable equipment or such
ing the tractor. Make further checks at regular intervals. a workshop are not available, take the tractor
to a specialised workshop, where the tractor
NOTE: Tractors are supplied by the manufacturer with will be lifted with an equipment suited to its
tyres inflated at higher pressures then recommended. weight and dimensions.
The pressure should be adjusted afterwards by the user
according to values given in the tables of tyre manufac- Procedure
turers and to the use anticipated for the tractor. - Turn off the engine, engage the parking brake and the
first gear. Engage the Park Lock (if equipped).
If these simple rules are carefully followed, they will - To remove a front wheel apply a jack lift of suitable ca-
ensure maximum working life for your tyres. pacity at the front axle next to the wheel to be remove
(Fig.4-40b).
If you notice any cuts in the tread or side walls, have - To remove a rear wheel, use wooden wedges on the
them vulcanized immediately to avoid further damage front axle to block completely any tractor swing. Use a
to the tyre. jack lift of suitable capacity in the centre of the rear axle
(Fig.4-40c).
Drive slowly on roads if the pressure in the tyres has - Loosen the nuts (bolts) fastening the wheel of about one
been reduced for use on soft earth. turn by the provided wrench.
- Before lifting the tractor, check there are no persons next
To obtain maximum efficiency, do not use tyres with to it and do not touch the tractor again until it is not again
more than 30-50% wear. lowered to the ground.
- Lift the tractor a few centimetres.
NOTE: If the tractor is not going to be used for a long - Unscrew all nuts (bolts) that fasten the wheel and re-
period of time, support it on raised blocks to remove the move the wheel
load from the tyres. - Inflate the tyre if required. See the inflating procedure
in this chapter.
NOTE: Avoid parking the tractor on floors which are - Mount the wheel taking to exactly match the locating
covered with oil or diesel fuel. Also avoid parking the pins. Screw the nuts (bolts) down again.
tractor where the tyres are permanently exposed to - Lower the tractor to the ground. Remove the jack and
direct sunlight, especially if the tractor is not going to be fully tighten the nuts (bolts) alternating a nut (bolt) with
used for some time. the opposite one.
- As soon as possible, take your tractor to the service
WARNING: Use a suitable hoist or lifting workshop to tighten the wheel nuts (bolts) to the pre-
device to handle, mount and dismount the scribed torque.
wheels.

Fig.4-40b Fig.4-40c

102
 Operation

Tyre inflation procedure

DO NOT inflate a tyre that has gone completely flat. If
the tyre has lost all air pressure, have a qualified tyre
mechanic service the tyre.

WARNING: A tyre must always be inflated

within a restraining device (tyre inflation cage)
(Fig. 4-40d).

Proceed as follows to inflate a tyre:

- Use a safety hose of suitable length, equipped with
air nozzle, double-valve gauge and graduated scale to
measure pressure. Fig.4-40d
- Keep a safe distance from the tyre and keep before
inflating the tyre completely.
- Inflate the tyre to the recommended air pressure. DO
NOT INFLATE THE TYRE MORE THAN THE RECOM-
MENDED PRESSURE.

Tyres 4
The following is a list of tyre types and front/rear com- NOTE: Tractors are supplied by the manufacturer with
binations. Please ask your Dealer for information on tyres inflated at higher pressures then recommended.
further combinations. The pressure should be adjusted afterwards by the user
On tractors with 40 Kph overdrive gearbox only tures according to values given in the tables of tyre manufac-
marked as «load index A8» may be used. turers and to the use anticipated for the tractor.

Tyre table for 2WD tractor versions - If available

Front tyres Rear tyres

Model
2WD Tyre Rim Tyre Rim

3670-3680-3685 F 6.50-16 (6Pr) 4.00E16 12.4R-28 (121A8) W 10x28

All F 6.00-16 (8Pr) 4.00E16 13.6R24(121A8) W 12x24

All F 6.50-16 (6Pr) 4.00E16 13.6R28(123A8) W 12x28

All F 7.50-16 (6Pr) 5.50F16 13.6R28 (123A8) W 12x28

All F 6.00-16 (8Pr) 4.00E16 380/70R24(125A8) W 12x24

All F 6.50-16 (6Pr) 4.00E16 360/70R28 (125A8) W 12x28

All F 7.50-16 (6Pr) 5.50F16 14.9R28 (129A8) W 12x28

All F 6.00-16 (8Pr) 4.00E16 14.9R24 (126A8) W 12x24

All F 7.50-16 (6Pr) 5.50F16 380/70R28(127A8) W 12x28

103
Operation

Tyre combinations for 4WD tractors

Front tyres Rear tyres

Model
GE 4WD Tyre Rim Tyre Rim

All GE 8.25-16 (8Pr) 5.50F16 360/70R24(121A8) 10x24 C.V.

All GE 9.0/75-16 (6Pr) W7x16 14.9LR20 (119A8) W11x20 C.V.

All GE 260/70 R 16 (109A8) W7x16 14.9LR20 (119A8) Grassland W11x20

All GE 280/70 R 16 (109A8) W7x16 360/70 R 24 (122A8) W12x24

Front Tyres Rear Tyres

Model
GT 4WD Tyre Rim Tyre Rim
All GT 8.25-16 (8Pr) 5.50 F-16 13.6 R24 (121A8) W 12-24

All GT 7.50 R20 (8Pr) 5.50 F-20 13.6 R28 (123A8) W 12-28

All GT 7.50 R18 (6Pr) 5.50 F-18 14.9 R24 (126A8) W 12-24

All GT 280/70 R18 (114A8) 9 x 18 14.9 R24 (126A8) W 12-24

All GT 280/70 R18 (114A8) 9 x 18 360/70 R28 (125A8) W 12-28

All GT 300/70 R20 (110A8) W9 x 20 420/70 R28 (133A8) W 14L-28

All GT 280/80 R18 W9 x 18 440/80 R24 (126A8) W 14L—24

All GT 300/70 R20 (110A8) W8x20 14.9 R28 (128A8) W 12-28

All GT 9.5 R20 (108A8) W9x20 14.9 R28 (128A8) W 12-28

All GT 280/70 R20 W9x20 14.9 R28 Grassland W 12-28

All GT 10,5/80 - 18 (10Pr) 9 x 18 16.9 R24 (134A8) W 13-24

All GT 7.50 R18 (102A8) 5.50F-18 360/70 R28 (125A8) W 12-28

All GT 280/70 R18 (114A8) 9 x 18 420/70 R24 (130A8) W 13-24

3680-3690GT 280/70 R20 (116A8) W9x20 380/70 R28 (127A8) W 12-28

All GT 8.25 - 16 (8Pr) 5.50 F-16 380/70 R24 (125A8) W 12-24

All GT 280/70 R16 (112A8) W 7x16 380/70 R24 (125A8) W 12-24

3690-36100-
36110-36120 GT 300/65 R18 (116A8)* W9x18 440/65 R24 (122A8)** W 13-24

All GT 300/65 R16 (114A8) W10x16 420/65 R24 (126A8) W 13-24

All GT 280/80 R18 W9x18 16.9 R24 (134A8) W 14L-24

* Inflating pressure 1.0 bar ** Inflating pressure 1.4 bar

104
 Operation

Tyre combinations for F model tractors with 4WD front axle with brakes

Front Tyres Rear Tyres

Model
F 4WD Tyre Rim Tyre Rim
All F 7.50 R16 (6Pr) 5.50 F-16 13.6 R24(121A8) W 12x24

3670-3685-3690F 8.25-16 (8Pr) 5.50 F-16 12.4 R 28 (121A8) W10-28

All F 7.50 R18 (6Pr) 5.50 F-18 13.6 R28 (123A8) W 12x28

All F 7.50 R20 (8Pr) 5.50 F-20 14.9 R28 (128A8) W 12-28

All F 280/70 R18 9 x 18 16.9 R 24 (134A8) W 13-24

All F 280/70 R16 (114A8) 9 x 18 360/70 R 28 (125A8) W12-28

All F 260/70 R16 W8x16 380/70 R 24 (125A8) W12-24

All F 280/70 R16 W10x16 420/70 R24 (130A8) W 13-24

All F 280/70 R18 9 x 18 380/70 R 28 (127A8) W12-28

All F 280/65 R16 W10x16 420/65 R24 W 13-24

All F 280/70 R16 W10x16 14.9 R24 (126A8) W 12-24

All F 8.25-16 (8Pr) 5.50 F-16 14.9 R24 (126A8) W 12-24

4
All F 280/70 R20 (116A8) W9x20 14.9 R28 (128A8) W 12-28

All F 280/70 R20 (116A8) W9x20 420/70 R28 (133A8) W 14L-28

3690-36100-
36110-36120F 280/65 R16 W10 x 16 440/65 R 24* W13-24

All F 280/70 R18 W9 x 18 440/80 R 24 W14L-24

* Inflating pressure 1.4 bar

105
Operation

Tyre combinations for 4-cyl. 3675F-3685F model tractors with 4WD front axle with brakes

Front Tyres Rear Tyres

Model
3675F-3685F
4WD Tyre Rim Tyre Rim
4 cyl.

Both models 7.50 R16 (6Pr) 5.50 F-16 13.6 R24 (121A8) W 12x24

Both models 7.50 R18 (6Pr) 5.50 F-18 13.6 R28 (123A8) W 12x28

Both models 7.50 R20 (8Pr) 5.50 F-20 14.9 R28 (128A8) W 12-28

Both models 280/70 R18 9 x 18 16.9 R 24 (134A8) W 13-24

Both models 280/70 R16 (114A8) 9 x 18 360/70 R 28 (125A8) W12-28

Both models 260/70 R16 W8x16 380/70 R 24 (125A8) W12-24

Both models 280/70 R16 W10x16 420/70 R24 (130A8) W 13-24

Both models 280/70 R18 9 x 18 380/70 R 28 (127A8) W12-28

Both models 280/65 R16 W10x16 420/65 R24 W 13-24

Both models 280/70 R16 W10x16 14.9 R24 (126A8) W 12-24

Both models 8.25-16 (8Pr) 5.50 F-16 14.9 R24 (126A8) W 12-24

Both models 280/70 R20 (116A8) W9x20 14.9 R28 (128A8) W 12-28

Both models 280/70 R20 (116A8) W9x20 420/70 R28 (133A8) W 14L-28

Both models 7.50 R16 (6Pr) Radial** 5.50 F-16 14.9 R 24 (126A8)** W12-24

** only for some markets.

106
 Operation

Ballast [4.2.h]
When the tyre is not sufficiently loaded in relation to
the traction the tractor must produce during work, it
may easily slip, causing loss of speed and wear on the
tread plus reduced efficiency on the job. To get the
most out of tractor power, it is therefore advisable to
ballast the tractor by applying cast iron rings to the driv-
ing wheels or by filling the tyres with water.

Front ballast
Do not hitch to the three point linkage any implements
that weighs more than indicated. If the implement weight
or the operating conditions (slope) might destabilise the
tractor, cast iron plates can be added to the front end.
(Fig.4-41).
Fig.4-41
The plates have handles so that they can be mounted
and demounted more easily.
They should be applied to the radiator core support and WARNING: Due to the great weight of each
fixed with the relative rods. ballast, manual lifting of front and rear ballast
weights could be dangerous for your safety.
Combinations: - Use exclusively a hook or suitable equipment
4 cast iron plates, 36 kg each = 144 kg to lift front and rear ballast weights.
6 cast iron plates, 36 kg each = 216 kg - Always use suitable personal safety devices
8 cast iron plates, 42 kg each = 336 kg North America (safety gloves and shoes) when applying or
only removing ballast.

Ballasting the rear wheels 4

Two or three cast iron rings can be applied to each
wheel, see Fig. 4-42. The first is fixed straight on to the
wheel while the second is fixed to the first ring and the
third to the second.

The total weight that can be applied is therefore:

4 rings (2+2) each weghing 45 kg: total 180 kg.

IMPORTANT:
- Do not ballast the tractor over its rated carrying
weight.
- When using the tractor for light work, transport and
on-road towing, remove the ballast to avoid unneces-
sary strain on the mechanical components.
- With semi-mounted and fully mounted implements
(which inevitably increase the load on the rear axle
of the tractor), ballast must only be used when strictly
necessary. There is no point in increasing grip be-
yond the level necessary for efficient work as this will
reduce tyre life. Fig.4-42 - Ballasting the rear wheels.
- Carefully check the tyre inflation pressure since this Max. 2 rings for each wheel.
will make the tyre last longer and ensure a wear
more evenly regular use.
- The softer the soil, the lower tyre inflation must be,
while the tyre should be inflated to a greater extent as
the soil becomes more compact.

107
Operation

Ballasting with water

In relation to ballasting with cast iron rings on the driv-
The tractor can also be ballasted by filling the tyres with ing wheels, this type of weighting offers the following
water. advantages:

To lower the freezing point a few degrees in winter, - Low cost.

add calcium chloride to the water in compliance with
the proportions given in the following table. The ballast - Easy preparation.
should evidently be removed when the job does not re-
quire excessive draft, otherwise the soil could become - Improved steering.
excessively compressed.
- The weight of the driving wheels can be regulated
The following table gives approximate values for the according to the real requirements.
liters of water and kilos of calcium chloride required to
prepare the antifreeze solution used to three-quarters CAUTION: Ballasting with water and calcium chlo-
(75%) fill each tyre. ride antifreeze solution can increase corrosion of
the components that come into contact with the
mixture.

Fig.4-43 TYRE CAPACITIES FOR BALLASTING WITH WATER

Ballasting with antifreeze solution for temperatures over – 20° C.
Capacity Water Commercial
Tyre to valve Kgs (litres) sodium Weight of
size level (75%) for chloride the solution
with water only antifreeze 70 to 72% Kgs
Kgs (litres) solution Kgs

12.4 - 28 103 89 26 115

13.6 - 24 120 103 30 133
13.6 - 28 120 103 30 133
360/70 - 28 122 108 32 140
380/70 - 24 130 116 35 151
14.9 - 24 148 128 38 166
14.9 - 28 164 141 42 183
420/70 - 24 166 149 44 193
16.9 - 24 210 187 57 244
480/70 - 24 213 189 58 247

NOTE: This table contains only indicative data. The operator should ballast wheels with water on the base of the tables
issued by the tyre manufacturer and according to the use anticipated for the tractor.

108
 Operation

How to fill the tyres with water How to deflate the tyres
WARNING: when you prepare a solution of – Jack up the tyre in question (Fig. 4-44) and set it
calcium chloride to ballast the tyres, NEVER with its valve pointing downwards.
EVER pour the water on to the calcium
chloride since this could lead to a violent – Unscrew the mobile union of the valve and allow the
reaction. This danger can be avoided by add- water to drain from the tyre.
ing the calcium chloride very slowly to the
water and stirring until it has completely – Tighten the relative union into the valve housing and
dissolved. place the tube (4) in contact with the tyre.

Jack up the wheel and position it with the valve right at – Blow in pressurized air through the union (2): the
the top (Fig. 4-44). remaining water will drain through the tube (4).
Unscrew the movable union of the valve and wait until
the tyre deflates. – Remove the union (3), replace it with the valve
Tighten the relative fitting (3 - Fig. 4-44) into the valve retainer and then inflate the tyre.
housing (1) and apply the tube (2). Air will escape from
the little tube (4) as the tyre is filled with water. NOTE - Never use ballasting systems differing from the
ones indicated above.
The tyres are filled to the three-quarter mark when wa-
ter escapes from the small tube (4) if this is positioned CAUTION: Ballasting with water and anti-freeze
completely downwards. solution containing calcium chloride might cause
corrosion of the parts in contact with the solution.
To add less water, i.e. obtain a lower weight, turn the
wheel so that the valve is in a more downward position.

Tighten the union on the valve casing again and inflate

the tyre with air until obtaining the prescribed pressure.

Take the following precautions when preparing the

4
water-calcium chloride mixture (antifreeze solution for
the cold season):

- Pour the necessary amount of water in a vessel and

then pour in calcium chloride until the established
quantity has been reached. Never pour water on to
the calcium chloride as this would cause a violent
reaction.

- Only use the solution after it has completely cooled.

To limit the acidity, add 1% of soda in proportion to
the calcium chloride used.

- After inflating the tyre, thoroughly rinse any metal

parts that may have been wetted with this corrosive
solution, with water.

Fig.4-44-Indicative layout for water ballasting.

1 - Valve housing.
2 - Water tube union.
3 - Special fitting to pour in and drain out the water.
4 - Air bleeding tube.

109
Operation

Implement hitch
The three point linkage is used to connect the tractor to
implements controlled by the hydraulic power lift.
The three point linkage is suitable for connection to im-
plements of various classes according to the layout and
data given in Fig. 4-45.
As a standard, the tractor is provided with a Class 2
three point linkage. Alternatively, a Class 1 linkage can be
provided.

Hitching the implement

To allow the lift to operate in the correct way, you must
carefully check the dimensions of the implements to be
coupled to the tractor.

These couplings must be the same standard size as the

three point linkage of the tractor to prevent the whole
assembly from being subjected to irregular stress during
work, caused by dimensional incompatibility. See dimen- Fig.4-45 - Implement hitch dimensions
sions shown in Fig.4-45. a - Horizontal distance between lower link pins of the
three-point hitch and the implement’s centre of grav-
Weight of the implement [4.2.g] ity.
To prevent the regular operation of the lifting system from As small as possible (the greater is the weight of the
being impaired, the weight of the implements must be implement, the smaller it is).
less than the maximum load the lift can raise. This value
(given in the specifications) is only indicative, since the b. Retraction of the third point: 0-80 mm
distance at which the center of gravity of the implement c. Height of hitch triangle: 460 mm
is set in relation to the three point linkage can also exer- d. Length of bar:
cise a notable influence. Class 1: 683 ± 1.5 mm
Class 2: 825 ± 1.5 mm
If an implement, even when lighter than the indicated
weight, is set at an excessive distance from the tractor, NOTE: The plough shown in the figure is purely
it will bear down on the three point linkage with a much indicative since the dimensions are valid for any type of
greater weight than the weight of the implement itself. implement.

Three point linkage

The articulated device with three point suspension mainly
consists of the following components (Fig.4-46):

Adjustable top link

The adjustable top link (1) is connected to the tractor
through a bearing with two holes (2). The connection hole
should be selected according to the reaction to the draft
control.

Connection to the top hole gives a lower sensitivity, to the

bottom hole a higher sensitivity to the hitch draft control.

The length of the link can be varied so that the angle of

the implement can be regulated in relation to the ground.

Shorten the top link to increase the angle of attachment,

lengthen it to decrease the angle.
Fig.4-46 - Three point linkage.
During work, the top link should go slightly down to- 1 - Top link with length adjustment sleeve.
ward the tractor, when the lower links are parallel to the 2 - Crank to adjust the length of rh lift rod (on re-
ground. quest).
3 - Rh lift rod.
For works in draft control mode, remember that it is bet- 4 - Side stabilizer (2 pcs).
ter to hitch the implement in the top hole if the carried 5 - Lower links.
load is particularly heavy. This way a greater uniformity of 6 - Lh lift rod with length adjustment device.
work is achieved. 7 - Adjustment screws for side swing of lower links.

110
 Operation

Adjustable rh lift rod

The length of the rh adjustable lift rod (3 - Fig. 4-46)

can be adjusted by means of the relative crank (2). This
adjustment is very useful since it levels the implement
depending on the type of work being carried out.

Turn the lever clockwise to shorten the rh vertical lift

rod.

Turn the lever anticlockwise to lengthen the rh vertical

lift rod.

On request the rh adjustable lift rod can be equipped

with a hydraulic jack (8 - Fig. 4-47), operated from the
driving seat and during the work, to adjust the cross
angle of the implement. Fig.4-47 - Rh lift rod, with hydraulic adjustment
8 - Hydraulic jack.

Side stabilizers
Class 1 crossbar (optional), only for tractors with kit for
The side stabilizers (4 - Fig. 4-46) can be set to reduce 3-point hitch upgrading from Class 2 to 1.
side swing of the lower links of the three-point linkage. Class 2 crossbar (optional)

When working with implements such as graders, roll-

ers, hoes, weeders, etc. the side swing of the lower
links can be adjusted according to the job on hand.

When working instead with ploughs, disk harrows, etc.

the stabilizers can be set to allow the lower links to
swing freely.
4
For the transport on road with lift links in high position,
lower links side swing must be restricted independently
of any previous adjustment during work.

Turn the stabilizers (7 - Fig.4-48) for the adjustment:

– turn anti-clockwise to increase side swing of three-
point linkage;
– turn clockwise to reduce or even stop side swing of
three-point linkage.

If the three-point linkage is set on float mode, it is nec-

essary to check that side swing is simmetrical on both
sides, taking the rear wheel rim as a reference.

Swing the three-point linkage all to the right and meas-

ure the distance from lower link to wheel rim.

Fig.4-48 - Adjustment screws for side swing of lower

links.
7 - Adjustment screw; 9 - Screw lock; 10 -
Grease nipple.

111
Operation

The same operation must be repeated on the left side.

Both dimensions should be identical. If not, use the
adjustment screws (7).

If a rigid three point linkage is needed, e.g. when

working with mounted sowing machines, the adjust-
ment screws (7) must be tightened to block lower links
swing.

Lower links

The lower links (5 - Fig. 4-46) transmit draft and support

to the implement. The lower links are available in the
following types:
Fig.4-49 - Lower links with interchangeable ball-ends
– lower links with fixed ball-ends, for all models; 1 - Ball-end.
2 - Safety pin.
– lower links with Class 1 and 2 interchangeable ball-
ends;

– lower links with quick hitch couplings.

Interchangeable ball-ends

To make it easier to adapt the three-point hitch to the

various types of implement used, Class 1 and 2 inter-
changeable ball ends (1 - Fig.4-49) are mounted on the
ends of the lower rods of the three-point linkage.

To change, remove the safety pin (2 - Fig.4-49) and turn

the ball end to align the shaped part with the race at the
end of the rod.

Mount the new ball end, then lock it in place with the
safety pin (2), checking to make sure that it is free to
turn in its housing.

Quick hitch couplings (Fig.4-50) - on request

To hitch an implement, reverse the tractor towards it so

that the lower links are in the direction of the ball-ends
fixed to the crossbar of the implement. Slowly raise the
links (4) of the power lift until the ball-ends automatical-
ly push against the spring-loaded quick-hitch couplings
(3) and are locked into place.

Three point linkage with quick hitch couplings Fig.4-50 - Quick hitch couplings
(Fig.4-50) - on request

Third point quick hitch coupling (1).

Quick hitch coupling on the lower links (2)

112
 Operation

LH adjustable lift rod

The left-hand adjustable lift rod (6 - Fig.4-46) can be
adjusted in length by means of the relative crank. This
adjustment is very useful since it levels the implement
depending on the type of work being carried out.

Two further adjustments are possible by turning the

backing plates through 90°. This gives two adjustments,
one with fixed plate (A - Fig.4-51), the other with the
plate free to slide (B - Fig.4-51). The latter position must
be used for wide implements, that require a certain
freedom of side swing (cultivators, spaders, harrows,
etc.).

Hitching the implement

1 - Allow the three point linkage to descend.
2 - Adjust the top links to have maximum side play.
3 - Back up the tractor.
4 - Connect the coupling bar of the implement to the
ball-ends of the lower links and lock it in place with
the safety pins.
5 - Adjust the length of the top links to give the imple-
ment freedom of sideways movement or lock it in
place according to the type of work required.
6 - Connect the top link.

Releasing the implement

1 - Lower the implement completely to the ground.
2 - Shorten the side stabilizers to give maximum play 4
to the lower hitching links.
3 - Remove the safety pins and release the coupling Fig.4-51 - Lh adjustable lift rod.
bar. A - Adjustment with fixed plate.
B - Adjustment with sliding plate.
Important recommendations when using and adjusting 1 - Backing plate; 2 - Backing plate stop; 3 -
the three point linkage. Lift rod backing plate.

Warning: before any adjustments in the

three point linkage, the following opera-
tions are required: engage the first gear,
engage the parking brake, turn the engine
off and remove the ignition key.

Warning: Always use the lift in position control

mode when transporting implements hitched
to the three point linkage.

Warning: Always use the lift in position con-

trol mode when an implement is hitched or
unhitched to or from the three point linkage.

Warning: When the tractor is stopped, always

lower any implements connected to the three
point linkage. [4.2.c]

Warning: Never work under an implement

that is kept raised only by the hydraulic hitch,
but always secure it with a suitable support.
Engage the first gear, engage the parking
brake, turn the engine off and remove the
ignition key.

113
Operation

Three-point linkage for Wide ver-

sion (optional)
Fig.4-51B
To be used for tracks from 1.3 meters.

Lower Links
The lower links (1) transmit to the implement the lug-
ging and support power. Various types are available:
- lower links with fixed ball ends or quick-hitch cou-
plings.

Left-hand lift rod.

The pin can be turned 90° to obtain two adjustments of
the fork (3-Fig.4-51B) of the LH lift rod (2-Fig.4-51B): one
Fig. 4-51B
with fixed pin (1 - Fig.4-52A), and one with the pin slid-
1. Lower links.
ing within groove (2 - Fig.4-52A). The adjustment with
2. Left-hand lift rod.
sliding pin is useful with very wide implements (rotary
3. Adjustable fork of left-hand lift rod.
ploughs, harrows, etc.) that need a certain amount of
4. Crank to adjust right-hand lift rod length.
free side swing.
5. Right-hand lift rod.
The length of the vertical rod can also be adjusted
6. Adjustable top links to limit rod swing of lower
loosening by screwing or unscrewing the lower fork.
links.
Remove the safety pin and draw the fixing pin out to
7. Adjustable top link.
release the fork.

Right-hand lift rod (Fig. 4-51B)

The length of the RH lift rod (5) can be adjusted by the
crank (4).

Turn it clockwise to reduce the length of the RH lift rod.

Turn it anti-clockwise to increase the length of the RH

lift rod.

Swing limiter top links - Fig.4-51B

The length of the top links (6) that limit implement
swing can be adjusted by means of a sleeve.

The length of the top links must be increased to limit

implement swing for:
• transport of any implement
• work with graders, rollers, hoes, weeders, seeders
and similar implements.

The length of the top links must be reduced for greater

freedom of movement when working with ploughs,
harrows, etc.

For special works, the length of the top links can be

adjusted so that the implement is off-centre with refer-
ence to the tractor axis. Always make sure that the
implement is blocked when the top links are adjusted
to different lengths.

Fig. 4-52A

114
 Operation

Adjustable top link Implement unhitching

The adjustable top link (4 - Fig. 4-51B) is connected to 1. Lower the implement completely.
the support through two holes. The hole to be used 2. Make the side links shorter to have the maximum
depends on the implement height. side play of the lower hitch links.
3. Remove the lock pins and the crossbar.
The length of the top link can be changed according to
the incidence angle of the implement to the ground.

The top link length must be increased to increase inci-

dence, or decreased to decrease incidence. Important noted on use and adjustment of the
three-point linkage.
During work, the top link should go slightly down
toward the tractor, when the lower links are parallel to Warning: Always switch off the engine
the ground. before any adjustments to the three-point
linkage or implement.
For works in draft control mode, remember that it is
better to hitch the implement in the top hole if the car-
ried load is particularly heavy. Warning: Always use the lift in position con-
trol mode for transports with implements
mounted on three-point linkage.
Implement hitching
1. Lower the three-point linkage.
Warning: Always use the lift in position con-
2. Adjust the top links to have maximum side play.
trol mode when hitching or unhitching an
3. Reverse the tractor.
implement to the three-point linkage.
4. Connect the implement crossbar to the ball ends of
the lower links and lock it with pins.
5. Adjust the top links length for side swing of the im- Warning: After stopping the tractor, always
plement or to block the implement according to work lower implements connected to the three-
conditions. point linkage. [4.2.c]
4
Warning: Never work under an implement
that is kept raised only by the hydraulic hitch,
but always secure it with a suitable hydraulic
support and turn the engine off.

External lift cylinder (optional for F and Wide ver-

sions) - Fig.4-52B

Fig. 4-52B

115
Operation

Mechanically controlled hydraulic

power lift
The hydraulic power lift allows the implements connect-
ed to the three point linkage to be lifted and lowered.
It consists of a lifting unit that includes the ram and
controls, a gear pump and the connecting tubes.

Description of controls - Fig.4-53

The lift link levers are provided with symbols to inform
the operator about the correct lever position for each
function.

1 - Lift link lever. Fig.4-53 - Power lift control levers of mechanically con-
trolled power lift
The lift links are completely down when 1 - Lift link lever.
the control lever is in this position 2 - Selector lever for draft, position and Intermix control.
3 - Nut to lock lever (1).

The lift links are completely up when

the lift links are in this position.

2 - Selector lever for draft control, position control,

and mixed draft and position control (INTERMIX).

= full draft control zone

= full position control position.

Lever between the two end of travel

INTERMIX
positions = mixed draft and position
control zone divided into two parts:
blue zone = position control increases
red zone = draft control increases

3 - Nut to lock lever (1).

116
 Operation

Work in position control mode

Position control mode allows the implement to be
brought to and kept in a certain position, whichever this
may be. This includes the highest and lowest positions
either in or out of the soil.

Position control mode (Fig.4-55) is used for:

• Mounted implements, i.e. without wheels or other

components allowing them to rest on the ground
(e.g.: graders, scrubbers, drills, fertilizer-spreaders,
etc.).

• Semi-mounted implements, i.e. equipped with

wheels or other components allowing them to
Fig.4-54
rest on the ground (e.g.: rotary ploughs, trenchers,
weeders, seeders, etc.).

Use of controls in control position (Fig. 4-54)

• Move the lever (2) to the position control setting.

• To regulate the work position of the implement, pro-

gressively move the control lever (1) downwards or
upwards until the desired position has been reached
and then lock the check nut (3) under the lever itself
to obtain the same work position on each run.
4

Fig.4-55 - Work in position control mode.

117
Operation

Work in draft control mode

Lift operation in draft control mode automatically keeps
the tractive force of the tractor at a steady rate regard-
less of variations in the soil conditions.

Draft control mode is used with all mounted tractor

implements which do not rest on the ground (e.g.: with
skids, wheels, etc.) (Fig.4-57).

Use of controls - Draft control mode (Fig.4-56)

• Move the selector knob (2) to the draft control func-
tion.

• To dig the implement in quickly at the beginning of

Fig.4-56
the furrow, move control lever (1) progressively for-
ward. After this, lift it gradually to set to the desired
work depth. The depth reached by the implement is
proportional to the extent of lever travel.

• When the desired position has been reached, lock

the lever with the check nut (3) to obtain the same
work position on each run.

• Move control lever (1) back to raise the implement

at the end of each run. Use the automatic up/down
buttons, if installed.

• When shallow depths are required, the control lever

travels only a very short length.
To avoid that the implement digs in too slowly, it is
better first to bring the lever fully forward at the be-
ginning of each run over the check nut (3). After this,
bring the lever progressively back to the desired
position, once again over the check nut (3).
Fig.4-57 - Lift in full draft control mode (selector lever
fully forward). The work depth of the implement may
vary considerably depending on the consistency of the
Swinging support soil (e.g.: zone 1 = normal soil, zone 2 = very hard and
compact soil).
A further control on the sensitivity can be obtained by
correctly choosing the top link connecting hole (A) on
the swinging support (Fig.4-58).

Set the top link in the lowest hole (1) to increase the
draft control sensitivity.

Set it in the top hole (2) for the least sensitivity.

WARNING: Never tow with the top link con-

nected to the swinging support of the hydrau-
lic hitch.

Fig.4-58 - Holes (1 - 2) to connect the top link (A) with

the swinging support.

118
 Operation

Mixed position and draft control

(Intermix)
When the lever (2 - Fig. 4-59) is placed in any intermedi-
ate position, the lift operates in Intermix mode, that is
in a mixed draft and position control mode.

The lever can assume as many positions as there is

space between the two ends of the sector. Its vicinity to
the front or rear part influences draft or position control
to a greater extent, as shown in the examples.

The operator must therefore identify the best position

for the selector lever according to the type of soil being
worked, thus obtaining the best compromise between
draft variations and depth. Fig.4-59

Work best carried out in mixed position and draft

control mode (Intermix) (Fig.4-60)

Work with the plough

a) When working soils of strongly different types (sandy
zones mixed with clayey ones) where full draft control
could lead to excessive depth variations.
b) When shallow depths are required.
c) To achieve the best work conditions with semi-mount-
ed ploughs with several shares.
4
Work with other implements
Whenever a certain draft control is required to obtain a
more regular draft from the tractor. A certain measure
of controlled draft causes variations in the work depth.
Thanks to such variations, the tractor’s draft power is
steadier.
Fig. 4-60 Lift in «Intermix» mixed position and draft con-
trol mode. The maximum and minimum work depths
of the implement are limited to the average work value
Floating position (e.g.: zone 1 = normal soil, zone 2 = very hard and
compact soil) since movement of the lever towards
This position is used for implements that must simply position control mode has reduced the operating sen-
rest on the ground and follow its contours (e.g.: roller, sitivity of draft control mode and has partially activated
seeder, etc.) (Fig.4-60b). position control.
In this case, the lift links are completely free to swing
and the lift just lowers and raises the implement at the
beginning and end of the run.

(Fig.4-59) Use of the lift in float mode is obtained by

setting the lever (2) fully back in the position control set-
ting and the link control lever (1) fully forwards. Just use
the control lever (1) to lift or lower the implement.

Fig.4-60b

119
Operation

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED 2 - Down speed selector:

0 - Does not lower. Lock - Turned in an anti-clock-
HYDRAULIC POWER LIFT wise direction.
Max. - Fast descent - Turned clockwise.
Description
3 - Electronic power lift “Check Control” indicator light.
The electronically controlled hydraulic power
lift is available as an option on certain tractor 4 - Maximum height limiter:
models, depending on the requirements of the Minimum height: turned anti-clockwise.
particular market. Maximum height: turned clockwise.

Electronic control of the power lift gives a number 5 - Up movement indicator light.
of major benefits. In particular, control and response
signals can be processed and action taken to adjust for 6 - Function selector:
variations in ground conditions encountered by the im- - Position Control, turned anti-clockwise.
plement in a fraction of the time possible with manual - Draft Control, turned clockwise.
controls. - Intermediate position: mixed Draft and Position
Control (INTERMIX).
To obtain the best results from the electronic control
system, you must be fully familiar with the controls on 7 - Down movement indicator light.
the power lift control panel. A full description is given
below. 8 -Implement work depth/height control:
0 - Maximum depth.
10 - Max. height from ground.
Power lift control panel (Fig.4-61)
9 - Transport shock absorber engaged indicator light
1 - Raise/lower switch and button
A: Lowering - Work position.
B: Stop - The lift arms are unable to move in any 10 - Quick soil engagement button
way in the stop position.
C: Raising - The fully raised position is established 11- External power lift controls - Buttons on the fend-
by the limiter (4). ers (Fig.4-63).

Fig.4-61 - Electronic power lift control panel.

120
 Operation

USE OF THE ELECTRONIC POWER

LIFT

Enabling the power lift (Fig.4-62)

The power lift incorporates a safety device which disa-
bles the hydraulic power lift controls when the engine
is off or if the external controls have been used. This
prevents accidental movement of the lift arms and links
as a result of interference with the controls or settings
while the tractor was stopped. When the engine has
been started, or after the external controls have been
used, simply turn the control switch (1) to position A or
C.
Fig.4-62 - Control panel - Activating the electronic power
lift.
WARNING: The lift arms will rise as soon as
the control panel is enabled. Limit the max.
lifting height with the control (4 - Fig.4-62)
before re-activating the electronic power lift.
- If you need to stop lift movement immedi-
ately, simply turn the switch (1) to position
B.
- Before you enable the power lift controls,
check that the settings of controls (6 and 8)
do not cause any dangerous movement of
the implement.

NOTE: The electronic power lift control system also in- 4

corporates safety devices which disable the lift functions
if any of the following faults are detected:
1 - Insufficient battery power.
2 - Short circuit in the power line.
3 - Position-control circuit malfunction.
If the electronic power lift fails to operate correctly after
the controls have been enabled as instructed above,
have the circuits checked by your local dealer.

Check-control indicator light

When the engine is started, the check-control indicator
(3) lights up. Once the electronic power lift is enabled
as already described, the check-control indicator should
go out.
If the indicator lights up and flashes during work,
consult your local dealer who will be able to locate the
fault. Fig.4-63 - External controls (11) for raising and lowering
the lift arms.

WARNING: External controls must be operated

at a safe distance, standing on one side outside
the tractor and out of the overall width of
mudguards. It is expressly forbidden to oper-
ate the controls from the rear of the tractor
or standing on the inner side of wheels. [4.2.b]

121
Operation

Hitching an implement
From the internal control panel (Fig. 7-23)

- Turn the power lift control switch (1) to position A or

C to enable the power-lift control panel.

- Turn the function selector (6) anti-clockwise to select

position control mode.

- Turn the knob (8) anti-clockwise to lower the arms.

The arms-down indicator (7) should light up.

- Manoeuvre the tractor to the right position and hitch

the implement’s ball-ends on to the ends of the links.
Fit safety pins to secure the hitch.
Fig.4-64 - Control panel - Hitching an implement from
Hitch up the top link.
the driving seat.
- Turn knob (10) clockwise to raise the implement.
The arms-up indicator (7) should light up.

With the external control buttons (Fig. 4-65b)

There is no need to enable the power lift in order to use

the external control buttons.

To use the external controls, just press on the buttons

to raise or lower the lift arms. Now enable the power lift
control panel by means of the switch (1- Fig.4-65).

NOTE:
- Arm movement stops as soon as the buttons are
released.
Fig.4-65 - Control panel - Hitching an implement with
- Descent speed is 30% slower than max. speed with
the external controls.
the external controls. Down speed regulation remains
disabled.
- To enable the control panel controls after the external
ones have been used, release the safety device by set-
ting the switch (1 - Fig.4-65) to position C and then to
working position (A).

WARNING: External controls must be operated

at a safe distance, standing on one side outside
the tractor and out of the overall width of
mudguards. It is expressly forbidden to oper-
ate the controls from the rear of the tractor or
standing on the inner side of wheels. [4.2.b]

Fig.4-65b - External controls (11) for raising and lower-

ing the lift arms.

122
 Operation

Working with tillage implements

(Fig. 4-66)
- If the implement pitches (makes large lifting and
lowering adjustments) in draft control mode, turn the
mode selector knob (6) anti-clockwise to introduce an
element of position control (Intermix).
The sensitivity of the electronic power lift to varia-
tions in the traction force required in working condi-
tions is automatically controlled and thus the opera-
tor need not intervene to make corrections.

Intermix/draft/position control ad-

justments (Fig. 4-67)
Fig. 4-66 - Control panel - Use during work
Function selector
Tillage work: position 3 or 4.
Ploughing: positions 3 - 4 - 5.
Light soil turning: positions 2 - 3.
Grubbing: position 3 or 4.
Carried implement: position 1 (position control).

These settings are purely indicative and may vary de-

pending on the implement used and the soil.

Headland manoeuvres (Fig. 4-66)

- Raise the implement at the end of the field by set-
4
ting the switch (1) to position C. The arms lift to the
height set on the lift height limiter (4). Adjust the lift
height limiter so that if a drive shaft is connected
between the PTO and the implement, it is not twisted
into narrow angles. This will also avoid wasting time
lifting the implement to transport height.

- To re-engage the implement, simply turn the switch

(1) to the working position (A). The implement will Fig. 4-67- Intermix/draft/position control regulation.
lower at the speed set with selector (2) until is
reaches the position selected with knob (8).

- Depress the orange button (10) to make soil engage-

ment of deep working implements easier.

Float mode (Fig. 4-66)

Used for implements that rest on the ground and follow
its reliefs.

- Turn switch (1) to position (A).

- Turn knob (8) to position (10), fully anti-clockwise as
far as it will go.

WARNING: Comply with the maintenance

and safety regulations governing the electri-
cal system of the tractor to safeguard and
protect the electronic power lift.

123
Operation

Transporting implements (Fig.4-68)

- Select the maximum transport height with the selec-
tor (4).
- Set the selector (6) to position control mode (Pos. 1)
by turning it in an anti-clockwise direction
- Raise the three-point linkage by turning the switch (1)
to position C..
- Set the down-speed selector (2) to position (0) (lock)
to prevent any accidental lowering movement should
the controls be accidentally operated.

If the control switch (1) is moved to the

links down position (A), the links may be
lowered according the control position (8)
of the operation height. Set the lowering Fig.4-68 - Control panel - Transporting implements.
speed control (2) to Pos. 0 (padlock) to pre-
vent any accidental movement.

Shock absorber function in the

transport position (Fig.4-69)
This function is activated by pressing the button (9)
when the transport position is reached with selector (1).
Indicator light (9) will come on.

Press the button (9) again to deactivate the shock-ab-

sorber function in the transport position. Indicator light
(9) will go out.

Operating the power lift

- Select the power lift operating mode by means of the
mode selector (6 Fig.4-68).

Position 1 Turn the knob anti-clockwise Fig.4-69 - Control panel - Shock absorber function dur-
for position control mode. ing transport.
The implement will remain at
a constant height or depth.

Position 6 Turn the knob clockwise for

draft control mode. Use for
ploughing and similar opera-
tions that require constant
tractive force.

Intermediate positions “Intermix” mode.

(2 - 3 - 4 - 5) Combining position control
and draft control; for use on
variable soils or with subsoil-
ers, etc.

- Use the selector (2) to set a suitable descent speed

for the type of implement being used.
- Turn the control knob (8) to obtain the correct working
depth/height.
- Set the switch (1) to working position (A).

124
 Operation

AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVES [4.2.f]

The auxiliary control valves for the external cylinders are

mounted on the RH side of the hydraulic hitch. These
auxiliary control valves can be driven by the power lift’s
hydraulic circuit and thus use the same oil.

The maximum number of control valves that can be

mounted depends on the tractor version (Fig.4-70):
- GE - F versions: max. 2 auxiliary control valves;
- GT versions: max. 3 auxiliary control valves.

The control levers of the auxiliary control valves are in-

stalled on the right-hand side of the driving seat.

The control levers (1) are matched each to its own Fig.4-70
auxiliary control valve connected to two «Push-Pull» quick 1. Auxiliary control valve levers
couplings with a device (2) for adjustment and neutral lock. 2. Conversion knobs SA/DA

The third lever (optional for GT) controls an auxiliary con-

trol valve connected to two «Push-Pull» quick couplings
with a device (2) for adjustment and neutral lock. Control-valve operation
Different types of control valves can be installed to suit
NOTE: Oil level in the transmission should be checked specific working requirements (Fig.4-70):
frequently for a regular operation of the hydraulic • Normal control valve to feed single or double acting
system. If the external circuits draw much oil, its level cylinders.
should be increased as described in the Maintenance The control lever (1), if released, goes automatically
chapter “Check oil level in the transmission”. back to the rest position, thus locking the implement
in the position it has reached.
• Control valve with automatic release (kick-out) (op-
4
CAUTION: The hydraulic rams of the implements be-
tional on some models) convertible single/double
ing hitched to the tractor contain the same oil used
acting. The control lever remains locked in the lift and
in the transmission of the tractor. This excludes any
lower positions. At the end of travel of the cylinder,
oil contamination that could cause malfunction.
the lever is automatically released by the pressure
and goes back to the neutral position, It is always
Match of control lever and quick couplings colours. possible to manually bring the lever back to the neu-
The control levers have colours matching the decals that
tral position before the cylinder reaches the end of
identify the corresponding quick couplings.
travel.
- Black lever: quick couplings with black decal.
• Control valve with float position (optional on some
- Blue lever: quick couplings with blue decal.
models): for implements requiring a continuous auto-
- Green lever: quick couplings with green decal.
matic adjustment of the working position. The float-
- Hydraulic motor: brown quick couplings (mounted as
ing position is obtained as follows. Shift the control
optional).
lever fully forward to the position in which it remains
locked at end of travel.
- The standard front control valves mounted with triple
• Specific control valve for use with hydraulic motors
pump have quick couplings with brown decal (mounted
(optional).
as optional).

Lock and SA/DA conversion knob (2-Fig.4-70).

Pos. A - Turned anticlockwise for SA (Single Acting) WARNING: The tractor must only be started
operation with the auxiliary valve levers are in neutral.
Pos. B - Turned to the centre for DA (Double Acting)
operation.
Pos. C - Turned clockwise for lever blocked in Neutral
position. IMPORTANT: As the front and rear control valves have
different configurations according to specific require-
ments of the user, please ask your Dealer for details
about the proper and safe use of hydraulic equipment.

125
Operation

Rear flow divider (optional)

On request, a flow divider can be mounted that is coupled
to the first auxiliary control valve, preset for this use. By
means of the governor knob (3 - Fig.4-71) a regulated
flow can be obtained on the first control valve next to
the flow divider.
Knob (3) turned clockwise: the flow to the nearest control
valve is reduced to a minimum 2 l/min. The exceeding
flow may be used by the next control valves or by the
hydraulic power lift.
Knob (3) turned anticlockwise: the flow to the nearest
control valve is increased up to the maximum permissible
flow. The exceeding flow may be used by the next control
valves or by the hydraulic power lift.
If the auxiliary control valve connected to the flow divider
is not used after adjusting this latter, the whole flow from
the hydraulic pump is available for the next control valves
or for the hydraulic power lift.

Rear quick-hitch couplings (Fig.4-

71b)
Each control valve is equipped with two quick-hitch fe-
male half-couplings of the “Push-Pull” type (1), that can
be joined to male half-couplings of any make, as long as
the dimensions are the same. Hitching and unhitching of
the half-couplings are very simple: only push to connect
and pull to detach.

WARNING: Discharge all pressure from the

system before hitching or unhitching the Fig.4-71
quick couplings. 1. Auxiliary control valve levers
2. Conversion knobs SA/DA
WARNING: When auxiliary control valves 3. Governor knob for rear flow (optional)
are used, their quick couplings can reach
high temperatures. Therefore, safety gloves
suitable for such temperatures must be
worn every time the connected implements
are connected to or disconnected from the
couplings.

Oil spillage collector (if installed)

Each quick coupling is connected to a tray that collects
oil spilt when connecting or disconnecting the quick
couplings. When oil reaches the maximum level in the
collector, this should be emptied into suitable containers
to avoid polluting the environment.

Free rear discharge

A union is provided for free discharge of oil to the gearbox
housing, to be used for hydraulic applications requiring
unhindered return of oil without passing through the quick
couplings provided on the tractor.
Rear free discharge (2-Fig.4-71b).

Fig.4-71b

126
 Operation

Auxiliary control valve with electro-

hydraulic diverter (Fig.4-72)
(optional)

An auxiliary control valve with electro-hydraulic diverter,

controlled by a lever with three buttons, is available as
an option. This type of valve controls three couples of
hydraulic outputs by a single lever.

If the button (1-Fig.4-72) is pressed, the valve supplies

the rear quick couplings (4-Fig.4-73) and operates the
external hydraulic rams.

If the button (2-Fig.4-72) is pressed, the valve operates

the hydraulic leveling ram of the three-point linkage (5-
Fig.4-73) or any other connected hydraulic user.
Fig.4-72
If the button (3-Fig.4-72) is pressed, the valve operates
the third hydraulic point (6-Fig.4-73) or any other con-
nected hydraulic user.

Refer to your Dealer for more information.

Oil sump (7 - Fig.4-73) that collects oil leaks due to hitch-

ing and unhitching of the quick couplings. The sump must
be emptied into a suitable container to avoid polluting the
environment.
4

WARNING: The tractor must only be started

with the auxiliary valve levers are in neutral.

WARNING: When auxiliary control valves are

used, their quick couplings can reach high
temperatures. Therefore, safety gloves suita-
ble for such temperatures must be worn every Fig.4-73 - Oil sump (7) (if equipped) (position may vary
time the connected implements are connected according to tractor model).
to or disconnected from the couplings. [4.1.n]

127
Operation

Front quick couplings and front NOTE: The following picture are used as example only
auxiliary control valve with double and illustrate only one specific combination among
many that are possible. Refer to your Dealer for more
pump (optional) information.

Front quick-hitch couplings (optional)

As an option, more than one pair of front quick couplings
(Fig.4-74) can be mounted. They are activated through
the rear auxiliary control valves by means of doubled
tubes and are operated by the levers on the RH console
(1 - Fig.4-76).

In this case the levers control both the rear and front quick
couplings (if equipped, optional).
For a safe use of the quick couplings, keep to the follow-
ing indications.
Use of rear quick couplings: disconnect the hydraulic
equipment from the front quick couplings of the same
colour.
Use of front quick couplings: disconnect the hydraulic
equipment from the rear quick couplings of the same
colour. Fig.4-74 - Example of front hitching obtained by dou-
bling the rear valve tubes (optional) with double pump.
NOTE: Refer to your Dealer for more information. 1 - Front - Rear (with doubled tubes, optional)
2 - Front - Rear (with doubled tubes, optional)
Valve for front hydraulic motor (optional) 3 - Free front discharge.
As an option, a valve for hydraulic motor (Fig.4-75) can
be mounted, with electric control by means of the switch
(2 - Fig. 4-76) and coupled to a flow divider controlled by
the knob (3 - Fig.4-76). By means of the knob (3) a regu-
lated flow can be obtained on the first control valve next
to the flow divider.
Knob (3) turned clockwise: the flow to the nearest control
valve is reduced to a minimum 2 l/min. The exceeding
flow may be used by the next control valves or by the
hydraulic power lift.
Knob (3) turned anticlockwise: the flow to the nearest
control valve is increased up to the maximum permissible
flow. The exceeding flow may be used by the next control
valves or by the hydraulic power lift.
If the auxiliary control valve connected to the flow divider
is not used after adjusting this latter, the whole flow from
the hydraulic pump is available for the next control valves
or for the hydraulic hitch.
This type of control valve can be associated (optional) to a
pair of rear quick couplings activated from the same front
auxiliary control valve by doubling the tubes..

NOTE: Refer to your Dealer for more information. Fig.4-75 - Example of front hitching obtained by dou-
bling the rear valve tubes and with front auxiliary control
valve with double pump.
1 - Front - Rear (with doubled tubes, optional)
2 - Front - Rear (with doubled tubes, optional)
3 - Free front discharge.
M - Front hydraulic motor, brown decal (optional)

128
 Operation

With mechanical hitch With electro-hydraulic hitch

Fig.4-76

WARNING: The tractor must only be started

with the auxiliary valve levers are in neutral.

WARNING: When auxiliary control valves are

used, their quick couplings can reach high
temperatures. Therefore, safety gloves suita- 4
ble for such temperatures must be worn every
time the connected implements are connected
to or disconnected from the couplings. [4.1.n]

129
Operation

Front quick couplings and front NOTE: The following picture are used as example only
and illustrate only one specific combination among
auxiliary control valves with triple many that are possible. Refer to your Dealer for more
pump - Fig.4-77 information.

On request a triple pump (2) can be installed, to be

coupled to the front control valves (4), which are fed by
a separate circuit.
Maximum 3 control valves with flow divider.
- First valve for hydraulic motor, controlled by a switch,
coupled to a flow divider.
- Second and third standard valve, electric control by
joystick, each coupled to a flow divider.
The three pumps feed three separate and independent
circuits:
- Steering circuit and hydraulic services of transmission.
- Circuit of front auxiliary valves
- Circuit of hitch and rear auxiliary valves.

Hydraulic valve controls (Fig.4-78)

- Control levers (1) of rear and front quick couplings (1 & Fig. 4-77 - Example of front coupling with triple pump
2 - Fig.4-77) (if equipped). and doubled tubes from rear valves (optional).
- Control lever (2) with 3 electric buttons for rear quick 1 - Front - Rear (with doubled tubes, optional)
couplings and multi-purpose electro-hydraulic diverter 2 - Front - Rear (with doubled tubes, optional)
(if equipped). 3 - Free front discharge.
- Switch (3) on the RH console to control the front hy- 4 - Front valves combined with triple pump.
draulic motor A - B -C - D: quick couplings with brown decals, oper-
- Electric joystick (4) to control the front standard valves ated by joystick in the positions A - B -C - D.
with electro-hydraulic control. M - Front hydraulic motor with brown decal (optional).
- Knob (5) on the RH console to control the flow governor
for the front hydraulic motor.

WARNING: DO NOT use the hitch and front valves

circuit continuously and at the same time: use the
two circuits alternately.

Front flow divider - Fig.7-77 IMPORTANT: As the front and rear control valves have
(optional) different configurations according to specific require-
The first control valve for hydraulic motors is coupled to ments of the user, please ask your Dealer for details
a flow divider controlled by knob (5) that allows the flow about the proper and safe use of hydraulic equipment.
to the hydraulic motor to be regulated.
Knob turned clockwise: reduces flow to hydraulic motor
turned anti-clockwise: increases flow to hydraulic mo-
tor.

With mechanical hitch With electronic hitch

Fig. 4-78

130
 Operation

Joystick - Fig.4-79

The joystick (1) controls the standard front valves.

The lever has a safety switch (2).

Press and hold the button (2) to activate joystick opera-

tion.

Release the button (2) to deactivate the joystick.

The joystick lever is connected to the front brown col-

oured quick couplings.

Fig. 4-79

WARNING: The tractor must only be started

with the auxiliary valve levers are in neutral. Control functions of joystick

WARNING: When auxiliary control valves are

used, their quick couplings can reach high
temperatures. Therefore, safety gloves suita-
ble for such temperatures must be worn every
time the connected implements are connected
to or disconnected from the couplings. [4.1.n]

Fig. 4-79b
A - 1st valve lowering
B - 1st valve raising
C - 2nd valve lowering
D - 2nd valve raising

131
Operation

Safety frame
The tractor is equipped with a safety frame (Fig.4-80)
mounted behind the driving seat and approved accord-
ing to the CURRENT OCSE and EEC STANDARDS. The
protective structure is formed by two parts, one upper
and one lower, which are bolted together.
The tractor must only be used with the protec-
tive structure in the upright position (Fig. 4-80).

WARNING: The tractor could tip up if used
incorrectly. Protection is only guaranteed
when the protective structure is in its
original upright position with the fixing
bolts tightened as described in the assembly Fig.4-80
instructions.
While the safety frame protects the opera-
tor in case of the tractor overturning, it WARNING
does not guarantee, however, the operator’s
safety. Avoid injury! Make certain all parts are installed
correctly if the safety structure is loosened or
WARNING: It is absolutely forbidden to tie removed for any reason.
towing chains or ropes to the safety frame The protection offered by the safety frame will be
or the tractor could jack up. Always tow impaired if it is is subjected to structural dam-
using the proper devices supplied with the age, as in an overturn accident, or is in anyway
tractor. altered by welding, bending, drilling or cutting.
A damaged safety structure should be re-
Safety belts can be fitted, depending on the laws in placed, NOT reused. Always keep upper part of
force in the various countries of use. Always wear the the safety structure pinned in vertical position
safety belts with the protective structure in the upright (as in the above Fig. 4-80) when operating the
position. tractor. If the tractor is operated with the safety
Never wear the safety belt when the protective structure folded down (e.g. to enter a low build-
structure is lowered. ing) drive with extreme caution and DO NOT use
seat belt.
If the tractor there must pass through low Fold the safety structure up again as soon as
places or be parked their for maintenance the tractor is operated under normal conditions.
purposes and the top part of the protective
structure must be folded at an angle, remem- WARNING: If the operator wishes to use the
ber that there is not enough protection for the tractor with a tilted down ROPS frame, he
tractor driver in this position and that he could should precisely consider all risks due to
risk serious injury. Remember that after use in tractor overturning. The tractor should be
low places, it is absolutely necessary to set the used with a tilted down ROPS frame only
protective structure back in its upright position if there are no risks of overturning. Please
(Fig. 4-80) before continuing with any work. also consider that who takes charge of the
risks connected to incorrect use, also takes
Comply with the following procedure if it is essential on the relative liability.
to fold down the protective structure for the above
reasons (Fig.4-80 and Fig.4-81):

- Remove the beacon (2) to avoid damaging it.

- Remove the safety pins and the fixing pins (3) from
both sides.
- Overturn the protective structure (1) and insert the
pins (3) in the front holes of the support on both
sides (Fig.4-81). Rest the structure on the support.
- Fit the fixing pins in their seats again.
- Before you use the tractor again in any way,
set the protective structure (1) back in the
upright position by carrying out the opera-
tions described above in reverse order.
- Fit the beacon (2) again if it had been removed.
Fig.4-81

132
 Operation

Tractor transport [4.1.j]

Towing the tractor
If you need to tow or push the tractor for a brief distance,
remember that the power steering system will allow you
to drive and steer it for a short way with the engine off.
Put the following controls in NEUTRAL (Fig. 4-82
Controls with Powershuttle and Fig.4-83 Controls
with mechanical reverse shuttle):

1- Reverse shuttle lever (1)

2- Gearshift lever (2)
3- Range selector lever (5)
4- (With Powershuttle only) Disengage the Park Lock (7
- Fig. 4-82)
5- Disengage the parking brake (6)
6A- Ensure that the electro-hydraulic PTO switch is in
disengaged position (4 - Fig. 4-82) Fig.4-82 - Controls with Powershuttle
6B- Ensure that the PTO lever (mechanical version) is in
disengaged position (4 - Fig. 4-83)

How to drive the tractor

• To drive the tractor, you will need to excercise
greater effort if the engine is at a standstill.
• Slow and stop the tractor with the brake pedals
latched together (3)
• Tow or push the tractor at moderate speed.
How to safely drive the tractor 4
• Affix the slow moving vehicle card (SMV-Slow
Moving Veicle).
• Use the revolving beacon and the hazard lights.
• Strictly comply with the laws in force in the country
where the tractor is used.

Tractor transport
The tractor must be transported with a suitable vehicle.
Engage the first gear, then apply the parking brake. (6 - Fig.4-83 - Controls with mechanical reverse shuttle
Fig.4-82 - Fig.4-83).
Engage the Park-Lock (with Powershuttle only) (7 - Fig.4-
82).
Firmly fasten the tractor to the transport vehicle using
suitable chains or straps.(Fig.4-84)
Use the tow bar or its supports as rear fixing points for
the tractor.

CAUTION: Never hitch or connect chains around the

tractor components as these could be damaged by
the chains themselves or by excessive loads.

The trailer must be provided with the warning signs and

lights required by the local laws in force.

WARNING: If the tractor needs to be transported, it

should not be lifted, but should be driven onto the
transport means.
If the tractor cannot be driven owing to a fault or
malfunction, the operation should be entrusted to
specialised firms having a suitable equipment. Fig.4-84

133
Operation

Towing the tractor Towing the tractor with the engine off or low pres-
Towing the tractor is not recommended, but if it should be sure hydraulic circuit not operating.
absolutely necessary, the procedure is different depending
on the fact that the engine is on or off, and that the low WARNING: If the machine is towed with the
pressure hydraulic circuit is operating or not operating. engine off (or with the low pressure hydraulic
circuit not operating), the brakes and steering
Use the following procedures as applicable, at the fol- will not be power assisted if this depends on
lowing conditions: the low pressure hydraulic circuit. The park-
- Connect safely one the tow hooks of the machine to the ing brake must be disengaged.
towing vehicle by means of a rigid drawbar, or a chain, or
a metal cable of suitable size. - The machine can be towed for max. 10 Km at a max.
- In the middle of the linking means a red flag is to be speed of 8 Kph.
hanged so that it is visible to other drivers on the road.
- The towing vehicle must keep the rotating beacon light WARNING: Make sure that the weight of a
operating. The towed tractor must keep the flashing hazard trailed vehicle that is not equipped with
lights operating (turn indicators flashing contemporarily). brakes NEVER EXCEEDS the weight of the trac-
tor that is towing the vehicle or any national
- Make sure that the brakes of the machine are operating. weight limitations which may apply. Stopping
- It is recommended that the machine is escorted by two distance increases with increasing speed as the
cars, one in front of it and one at the rear, at a distance of weight of the towed load increases, especially
75÷150 m from the machine. These cars must carry danger on slopes.
signals according to the rules and laws of the country.
Towing the tractor with the engine on or low pressure
NOTE: For the tow hooks fixed on the machine, see the hydraulic circuit operating.
Towing Attachments chapter in the Technical specifica-
tions section of this book. - Check that all controls are in neutral.

CAUTION: Use only the appropriate tow hooks to - If possible, level the machine and lower the telescopic
tow the tractor. boon completely.

- Check that the parking brake is disengaged.

- Do not exceed a speed of 20 Kph when towing the trac-

tor and check that the rear differential lock is disengaged.

- Run the engine at 1200 RPM at least, if possible.

134
 Maintenance

Chapter 5
Maintenance
5

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the park-
ing brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

135
Maintenance

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE TABLE

The numbers in the second column refer to the operations described in the following pages, listed on chronological
order.

Check for function

Operation number

Top up level
Work hours

Lubricate
Replace
Adjust
Description

Clean

Page
1 Engine oil level 142
2 Oil level in gearbox,
power lift and steering systems 143
3 Battery 144
4 Fuel filter 145
5 Engine coolant expansion tank 145
6 Engine radiator, Aftercooler radiator,
transmission oil radiator and hydraulic circuits 146
Variable
mainte-
7 Dry air filter discharge valve 147
nance
(4) 8 Dry air filter cartridge 148
9 Alternator and fan belt 149
10 Air conditioning compensator belt (cab version) 149
11 Mechanical clutch pedal - Speed Five 150
12 Mechanical PTO clutch hand lever 150
13 Brake oil level 151
14 Brake pedals (3) 152
15 Parking brake 153
16 Oil level in rear final drives 154
17 Oil level in front differential housing and front final drives 154
18 Tyre pressure 155
Miscellaneous

Wheel nut tightness 155

Tightness of nuts and bolts in general 155
Tightness of safety frame fixing pins 155
Windscreen wash liquid 155

Every 100 19 General lubrication 156

hours 20 Lubrication of 4WD front axle 157
service 21 Lubrication of 2WD front axle (if mounted) 158
22 Engine sump (5) 159
23 Engine oil filter (5) 159
Every 250 24 Clean oil filter on intake (2) of steering and hitch circuits 160
hours
service 25 Oil filter on the delivery (2)
of the steering circuit and Power Shuttle (if mounted) 161

136
 Maintenance

Check for function

Operation number

Top up level
Work hours

Lubricate
Replace
Adjust
Description

Clean

Page
26 Fuel filter (6) 162
Every 500
hours Bleed air from fuel system 163
service 27 Front wheel hubs 2WD (if mounted) 164
28 Engine valves 165
29 Injectors and injection pump 165
30 Oil in transmission, power lift
circuit and steering circuit (1) 166
Every 1000 30B Clean and replace, if needed,
hours oil filter on intake of the hydraulic pumps 166
service or 1
year 31 Rear final drives 167
32 Steering cylinder knuckle joint 167
33 Replace oil in front differential housing and front
final drives 168
34 Starter motor and alternator 169
35 Dry air filter 170
36 Engine cooling system 171
37 Drain sludge from fuel tank 172
Bleed air from rear and front brake circuit 173
General mainte-
nance Cab - Maintenance 178
Electrical system 185
Long idle periods of the tractor 193
5

NOTES (4) CAUTION: Use your own discretion and experience when
deciding the actual intervals for variable interval service
Operations that must be performed by an author- and maintenance operations. Always remember, however,
that it is better to perform them too often than not often
ized dealer or service agent. enough.

(1) Change the gearbox oil for the first time after 500 (5) CAUTION: Change the engine oil and relative filter car-
hours, then change it after every 1000 hours service tridge after the first 50 hours work. After this, change
(1000-2000-3000 etc...) the engine oil and engine oil filter at the intervals
given in the ‘Routine Maintenance Table’.
(2) CAUTION: To safeguard the power lift filter and the
steering circuit, wash the filter on pump intakes and (6) CAUTION: Replace the fuel filter twice during the first
change the filter on the steering circuit delivery and 100 hours service (after 50 hours and after 100 hours).
Powershuttle for the first time after 50 hours. After After this, replace the fuel filter at the intervals speci-
this, repeat the same operations after every 250 hours fied in the ‘Routine Maintenance Table’.
service (250-500-750 etc...).

(3) Have the brakes adjusted after the first 50 hours work.

137
Maintenance

WARNING: Do not carry out inspections,

maintenance work or adjustments on the - Every time you start the engine from cold, let it run
tractor whilst the engine is running, except slowly without load for a few minutes to warm up.
when specifically requested. Wait for all This is particularly important with turbo-charged
moving parts to come to a complete stop. engines.
- If the maintenance operation must be car-
ried out while the engine is hot (e.g. when - Avoid idling the engine for long periods.
changing engine oil), start the engine and
let it idle for the required time, then turn it - Regularly check for oil leaks.
off before the maintenance operation.
- If you need to open the bonnet, follow the - To ensure long clutch life, carefully run in the clutch
procedure indicated under “How to open plates. To do this, operate the clutch frequently but
the bonnet”. In this case beware the risk of gradually during the first 15 hours service.
burning and shearing.
- Always use specific personal safety devices After the first 50 hours
for each service operation.
• Change the engine oil and relative filter cartridge.
After this, change the engine oil and engine oil filter
Lubrication and maintenance at the intervals given in the ‘Routine Maintenance
Table’.
Foreword
This section described the operations required to correctly • Replace the fuel filter twice during the first 100
service your tractor and keep it in top condition. The Rou- hours service (after 50 hours and after 100 hours).
tine Maintenance Table serves as quick reference. Each After this, replace the fuel filter at the intervals
operation is numbered for easier reference. specified in the ‘Routine Maintenance Table’.

WARNING: Park the tractor on flat ground and, if

• Hydraulic systems: clean the filter on the intake of
the steering and power lift circuit pumps, then clean
possible, extend all the cylinders before you check after every 250 hours service.
the oil levels.
• Replace the filter on the delivery of the steering and
Powershuttle circuit (if equipped), then replace it
Safety precautions every 250 hours service.
Read and comply with all the safety precautions in the
“Tractor maintenance” part of the Safety Notes Section.
• Check clutch pedal travel in the mechanical version.
• Check the brake pedal travel.
NOTE: Always dispose of replaced parts or substances
(filters, oil, battery etc.) according to rules and laws. Re- • Check all oil levels. If necessary, top up with oil of
the prescribed type.
fer to the manufacturer’s specifications on the Material
Safety Data Sheet. • Check the tension of the fan belt.
Sealed units • Grease all points with grease nipples.
Do not remove the seals from the following parts:
injection pump and overspeed screw.
• Check to make sure that all bolts, screws and nuts
are correctly torqued.
If you need to repair or adjust any of these units, con-
tact your local dealer or authorized repair shop. • Check the tyre pressures.
The warranty is automatically invalidated if these seals
are tampered with.
How to prevent pollution
Running in To prevent pollution when oil, filters and so forth are
Fade-free efficiency and a long working life largely depend changed, always clean the zone around fill, level and
on how the new tractor is treated during the running in drain plugs, dipsticks and filters. Before connecting the
period. It is therefore extremely important to follow these auxiliary cylinders, make sure that the oil they contain is
instructions: clean, that it has not deteriorated owing to long storage
and that it is of the prescribed type.
- Your engine does not require any special running
in when new. You can use it at full power from the
start but you must never overload it. Avoid using the
engine at full power before it reaches an operating
temperature of at least 60°C (140°F).

138
 Maintenance

Servicing intervals Fuel Injection Pump

The intervals suggested in the lubrication and mainte- Only your Dealer’s specialized personnel may be allowed
nance table are indications to use when the tractor is to work on the injection pump during the warranty pe-
used in normal conditions. riod. Removal of the seals from the pump will relieve
the manufacturer from all and every liability in relation to
These intervals should be adapted to the real environmen- warranty coverage.
tal and operational conditions. Servicing must be more
frequent in adverse work conditions (in the presence of
humidity, mud, sand, very dusty environments).
Keeping the environment Clean
When you need to fill the fuel tank or change the lubri-
cating oil, never forget to position a vessel under the
CAUTION: If carried out at the prescribed intervals,
component in question in order to collect any fuel or oil
the operations described in this section will ensure
that spills out. These products are polluting, so it is very
that the tractor operates in a regular way. However,
important to protect the environment in this way.
remember to carry out the inspections and adjust-
ments (of variable frequency depending on the envi-
ronmental conditions and type of work carried out) Engine Cooling System
according to your discretion and experience. It is advisable to replace the fluid in the system at least
once a year even if you have not reached 1000 hours
Miscellaneous inspections service in total.
Periodically check the following components. If faults are
discovered, contact your Dealer’s specialized personnel Radiator
and have the damaged parts replaced if necessary : To ensure that the cooling circuit operates in a perfect
way, it is important to prevent the radiator fins from be-
· Hydraulic hoses: the hoses must not be squeezed coming clogged.
or cracked. The outer sheath must not be swollen. These fins should be cleaned often, even several times a
There must be no oil leaks between the hoses and day if the place of work is particularly dusty.
their unions.

· Hand brake lever: make sure that the ratchet locking Lubrication
mechanism is secure and reliable. Before lubricating any parts provided with grease nipples,
carefully clean the fittings surfaces and be sure that their
· Make sure that all nuts are well tightened; seal ball moves freely.
After the lubrication, remove any trace of grease to avoid
· Make sure that the safety frame bolts are well tight- collecting dirt or dust.
ened.

· Make sure that all other nuts and bolts are well tight- 5
ened.

Indicator lights
Your tractor is equipped with indicator lights that keep
you informed about the condition of your machine. Some
of these indicate faults, so act promptly if they come on.

139
Maintenance

Fuel tank filling [4.1.l] Fuel

Use only good quality diesel fuel. Poor quality fuel can
CAUTION: Comply with the following instruc- reduce the efficiency of the injection system.
tions when working with diesel fuel. Diesel fuel must be free from particles in suspension. If
Do not smoke near diesel fuel. In no case must necessary, decant the fuel for two or three days before
petrol (gasoline), alcohol or mixtures of diesel using it in the tractor.
fuel or alcohol be added to the diesel fuel as Fuel oil can be decanted with a cheap, but safe system,
such action would notably increase the risk of as illustrated in (Fig.5-1).
fire outbreaks or explosions. In a closed vessel, Never use fuel which has been left in an open can
such as a can, they are even more explosive for any length of time and which could contain dirt or
than pure petrol (gasoline). water.
- Never use such mixtures. Moreover, mixtures Fill the tractor’s fuel tank in the evening after finishing
of diesel fuel and alcohol are not approved the day’s work. This prevents condensation from form-
since the resulting lubrication of the fuel in- ing inside the tank.
jection system is insufficient.
- Clean around the plug where the fuel is
poured and keep it clean.
- Fill the tank at the end of the day to prevent
the formation of overnight condensation.
- Never remove the plug or fuel the tractor
whilst the engine is running. Keep control of
the pump nozzle whilst the tank is being filled.
- The tank must not be completely filled. Allow
space for an increase in volume. If the original
tank plug is lost, it must be replaced with an
original spare which must be fully tightened.
- Dry up any fuel spill immediately.

Fig.5-1 Setting up a tank for fuel storage and decant-

ing.
a. Slope 25%.
b. Condensation water.
c. Sludge drain plug.

NOTE: Never use galvanised containers to store fuel.

Fuelling Fig. 5-2 The filler on the fuel tank (1 - Fig.5-2b) is provided with
a wire mesh filter (2) that can be removed for cleaning.
WARNING: Do not smoke while filling the
fuel tank. Keep clear of any sort of flames.

Fig.5-2a Fig.5-2b

140
 Maintenance

Access for inspection and mainte-

nance
It may be necessary to open the bonnet in order to ac-
cess the engine components and carry out inspections,
lubrication and servicing operations.

WARNING: In particular cases it may be re-

quired that an operation is carried out with
open bonnet and running engine. In such
cases, pay special attention to moving and
hot parts, wear the required personal safety
devices and work only with the minimum
number of persons strictly required for the
operation.

WARNING: All the surfaces inside the bonnet Fig.5-3a

are hot. High burning danger. Be extremely
careful and wait for the surfaces to cool
down before operating inside the bonnet to
avoid burns.

WARNING: Danger of shearing. Open the

bonnet and remove the side panel only with
engine off and rotating parts completely at
standstill.

WARNING: A gas ram controls opening and

closing of the bonnet. Replace the gas ram
if not properly operating to avoid accidental
fall of the bonnet.

WARNING: If the tractor is equipped with front

hitch and power take-off, before opening the
bonnet lower the links completely, whether
there are implements or not.

How to open the bonnet

Park the tractor on hard, level ground, engage the first Fig.5-3b
5
gear, engage the parking brake, turn the engine off and
remove the ignition key.
- To open the bonnet, insert the tool (1-Fig.5-3a) in the front
slit and hook up the bonnet closure device.
- Release the locking mechanism.
- Raise the bonnet (1) that is kept raised by the gas ram
(Fig.5-3b).
- To shut the bonnet again, lower the bonnet against the
resistance of the gas ram (Fig.5-3b). Rest the bonnet and
close by turning the tool in the opposite direction.
- Remove the tool.

How to remove the side panels

The side panels (2 - Fig.5-3b) can be easily removed for
maintenance operations on the engine.
Loosen the panels by pulling on the rear corner, then pull
to remove the panels when released.
To mount the panels again, align their front edges, then
fasten with the front fixing screws and the rear fixing pins.

WARNING: NEVER use the tractor without

the bonnet and side panels.

141
Maintenance

VARIABLE MAINTENANCE

WARNING: Use your own discretion and experience

when deciding the actual timing for variable interval
service and maintenance operations. It is obviously
better to carry out these operations too often than
not often enough.

OPERATION 1
Engine oil level
Fig. 5-4

For the engine, it is necessary to use a detergent oil

Supplement 3 as indicated in the Lubricants and Fuels
Chart.

WARNING: The following operations must be car-

ried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and
the parking brake are both engaged and that the
ignition key has been removed.

Personal safety devices must be worn for the indicated

operations.
Beware of burns caused by hot oil and engine parts.
If required, let the engine idle for the prescribed time to
reach the required temperature to let the oil flow easily.
Then turn off the engine.
If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure
indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.

Leave the tractor parked on a flat surface for at least five

minutes before checking the level, to allow the oil to set-
tle in the sump:

- take out the dipstick (2), wipe it with a rag and then
dip it into the filler again;

- wait 10—15 minutes, then remove the dipstick again

and make sure that the oil level reaches and does not Fig.5-4 - Engine oil
exceed the level marked on it.

- If necessary, pour additional oil through the filler (1)

until the required MAX level has been reached.

Never fill up to a level higher than the MAX mark on the

dipstick.

CAUTION: Never ever use the engine with the oil

level below the “MIN” mark.

142
 Maintenance

OPERATION 2
Oil level: mechanical transmission,
power lift circuit and steering cir-
cuit (Fig. 5-5a/b/c)

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices

for each operation.

Check at regular intervals the oil level in the mechanical

transmission and in the power lift and steering circuits.

Park the tractor on flat ground, stop the engine and lower
the power lift links. Remove the dipstick (1) and check
the oil level .
Fig. 5-5a.
NOTE: Allow the oil to settle in the transmission and 1. Dipstick and
rear final drives before checking the level. A: Normal level marks
Min. - no oil consumption
The oil level in the transmission must be over the mid- Max. - max. consumption 5 litres
line, between the minimum and maximum marks of the B: Level to be maintained if using a front loader or
dipstick (Fig. 5-5a) with the lift links in the up position. If other hydraulic implements
needed, fill up through the filler (2) to the required level 2. Transmission oil filler
with oil of the prescribed type.

To bleed air from the circuits when filling up the transmis-

sion, remove the plug on the PTO hydraulic clutch housing
(3 - Fig.5-5b) or on the transmission housing (3 - Fig.5-5c)
for the mechanical version.

When operating external hydraulics, such as hydraulic

front loaders, rams, motors etc. that require a certain
amount of oil, top up the oil level to the B mark on the
dipstick (corresponding to about 10 litres). This ensures
a correct oil level in the transmission at any time.

NOTE: The level must never be under the Min. mark.

5
When using external hydraulics, the level must always
be between the Min. and Max. marks.

NOTE: When working with the tractor on slopes, add 5

extra litres of oil to guarantee a minimum oil level even Fig. 5-5b. Air bleeding plug (3), version with hydraulic
in the most difficult conditions. PTO

NOTE: The hydraulic rams of the implements being

hitched to the tractor contain the same oil used in the
transmission of the tractor. This excludes any oil con-
tamination that could cause malfunction.

Oil in the gearbox

The tractor’s transmission and the steering and power
lift circuits contain the same type of oil. See Lubricant
and Fuel Chart.

NOTE: The Powershuttle contains a different oil from

the mechanical transmission. The two types of oil must
NEVER be mixed together.

Fig. 5-5c. Air bleeding plug (3), version with mechani-

cal PTO

143
Maintenance

OPERATION 3 WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the

procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
Battery 1-Fig.5-6
Periodically check the level of battery acid and add dis- WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices
tilled water if necessary. If you need to top up too often, for each operation.
have the battery charging system checked by a qualified
technician.

WARNING: Battery electrolyte contains sulfu-

ric acid and can cause serious burns.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes. Keep na-
ked flames, sparks and lighted cigarettes well
clear of batteries which are being charged.
Keep the area in which batteries are being
charged well ventilated. [4.1.l]

WARNING: When connecting the battery to a

charger, make sure that the positive (+) lead
of the charger is connected to the positive of
the battery and the negative (-) to the negative.
Incorrect connection will damage the diodes
and the other circuit components. [4.1.l] Fig.5-6 Battery

NOTE: The level of the electrolyte must be checked with

the engine off, the tractor parked on flat ground and the Battery master disconnect switch
battery cold.
IMPORTANT: Do not use the master disconnect switch
NOTE: Make sure that the battery terminal nuts are well
(Fig.5-6) to STOP the Diesel engine, or the machine
fixed to their terminals.
power units will be damaged. Such operation can only
be considered as an emergency intervention.

Even if not actually required, it is advisable to insulate the

WARNING: machine electric system at the end of each work day by
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories means of the master disconnect switch. This operation
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals increases safety and prolongs battery life.
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after NOTE: The master disconnect switch must be used for
handling these parts. any operation on the electric system. It is at any rate ad-
visable to disconnect the battery completely if welding is
carried out on the machine.

WARNING: Do not use acid to top up the bat- Proceed as follows to remove the battery:
tery. The electrolyte will boil over. Use only - Operate the parking brake switch and check that all
deionised distilled water and top up to a level electrical equipment is off;
of 5/6 mm over the battery cells. - Open the bonnet and find the battery and the master
disconnect switch, that must be on OFF (see Fig.5-6);
WARNING: According to the Law it is manda- - Disconnect the negative cable first then the positive;
tory to dispose of batteries in suitable con- - Remove the screw and bracket that retain the battery;
tainers provided to this purpose at author- - Proceed in reverse order to reassemble and reconnect
ized centres. DO NOT dispose of them in the the cables.
environment.
IMPORTANT: In case of fire, immediately detach the
cable from the positive terminal or, if equipped, operate
the master disconnect switch.

144
 Maintenance

OPERATION 4
Fuel filter Fig. 5-7
Regularly drain off the water that collects from
the cock (1) of the water/fuel separator filter (2).
Regularly drain off any dirt from the cock (3) of
the filter (4).
For this operation the tractor’s engine must be running.

Replace the fuel filter (4) for the first two times
every 50 hours (at 50 and 100 hours) during the
running in period. After this, replace the fuel filter
after every 500 hours service.

In this type of engines, the fuel system is generally bled

automatically.
However, when the filters are removed, you may need to Fig.5-7
completely bleed the system.
WARNING: To open the bonnet, follow the proce-
dure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
To completely bleed the system see “Fuel bleeding”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot water and hot motor parts. [4.1.n]
Shift the gear to neutral and engage the parking brake.

OPERATION 5
Cooling circuit expansion reservoir
Fig. 5-8
70-80-8-90; 75F-85F
Periodically check the level in the expansion reservoir (2)
of the engine cooling circuit.Top up through the plug if
necessary (1).
100-110-120
Periodically check the level in the expansion reservoir (2)
of the engine cooling circuit.Top up through the plug if
necessary (1).
5
Periodically check the level in the reservoir (4) of the engine
cooling circuit Top up through the plug if necessary (3).

WARNING: NEVER remove the plug from the

reservoir while the engine is still hot.
Fig.5-8 - 3670-3680-3685-3690; 3675F-3685F - Aspirated and
Always unscrew the plug slowly by one posi-
turbo engines
tion and allow the pressure to drop before
you loosen it completely.

Precautions against freezing temperatures

To prevent ice from forming in the radiator, add specific
products according to the instructions given by the anti-
freeze manufacturer.
Antifreeze also possesses antioxidant and rust-inhibiting
properties and is suitable for all seasons.
The following amounts are indicatively required:

Degrees C° - 8° - 15° - 25° - 35°

Percentage of antifreeze
20 30 40 50
per volume %
Fig.5-8 - 36100-36110-36120 -Turbo Aftercooler engines

145
Maintenance

OPERATION 6
Cleaning the engine radiator, trans-
mission oil radiator, aftercooler
radiator (if equipped) - Fig.5-9
Periodically check to make sure that the radiator sur-
faces are not clogged.

WARNING: These operations must be carried

out when the engine is cold. When hot, the
grilles and radiator will burn the hands and
fingers. [4.1.n]

NOTE: The best results are obtained with a steam cleaner

that softens up the dirt. Shine a lamp to check the clean-
ing between the radiator fins. We recommend a daily
cleaning when front implements are used, especially front Fig.5-9
mower-conditioners.
WARNING: To open the bonnet, follow the proce-
Lift the bonnet to access the engine coolant radiator dure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
(1), the transmission oil radiator (3) and the aftercooler
radiator (4) (if equipped). WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
To maintain the system in good operating conditions, hot water and hot motor parts. [4.1.n]
blow compressed air to remove dust and other dirt from Shift the gear to neutral and engage the parking brake.
the grille and the radiating surfaces.

Remove the two side panels from the engine.

Loosen the clips (2) and remove the grille (5), then clean
grille and radiators by blowing compressed air, max.
pressure 7 bar, preferably in direction opposite to normal
air flow.

146
 Maintenance

OPERATION 7
Air filter discharge valve (if NOTE: A few models have a dust ejector, therefore are
equipped) Fig.5-10, Fig.5-11 not provided with the discharge rubber valve.
Everyday or whenever required by ambient conditions,
clean the dry air filter (1) by pressing on the rubber end
(2) to remove any dust or dirt.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow

the procedure indicated under “How to open the
bonnet”.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation.

Fig.5-10 - Type A

Fig.5-11 - Type B

1. Dry air filter

2. Discharge valve
3. Primary (outer) filter element
4. Secondary (inner) filter element

IMPORTANT: ONLY use approved air filters, as these

filters are specifically designed to provide superior
engine protection.

147
Maintenance

OPERATION 8
External cartridge of dry air filter
Fig. 5-12

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot water and hot motor parts. [4.1.n]
WARNING: To open the bonnet, follow the proce-
dure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.

The filter cartridge can be cleaned with a blast of com-

pressed air.

WARNING: Always stop the engine before

demounting the filter elements. Fig.5-12 Type A

Periodically release the clips (2), remove the cover (3) of

the filter housing (1), take out the external cartridge (4)
and clean it (this operation should be carried out more
frequently if you work in a very dusty environment):
- with a jet of compressed air at a pressure of no more
than 5.9 bar (6 Kg/cm2), directed towards the outside
of the filter cartridge (Fig.5-13);
or:
- with water and a non-foaming detergent. After clean-
ing, rinse the filter cartridge with a jet of water at a
pressure of no more than 2.9 bar (3 Kg/cm2) and dry
it with dry air at a temperature of no more than 50°C.

Never ever clean the cartridge with products other than

those indicated above, or by tapping it on a hard surface.

Thoroughly clean all the internal parts of the housing (1) Fig.5-12 Type B
with a damp cloth before remounting.

Replace the external element (4) after three clean-

ing operations and at least once a year or after
every 1000 hours service.

Replace the internal safety element (5) once a

year or after three cleanings of the outer element.

Always check to make sure that the filter housing is not

damaged and make sure that all the pipes and unions
are tight.

WARNING: The internal filter element must not be

replaced. NEVER attempt to clean the internal safety
element.

WARNING: NEVER attempt to clean the filter elements

with exhaust gas from the engine. NEVER EVER use Fig.5-13 - Cleaning the filter by compressed air (max.
oil on a dry filter. NEVER EVER use wash oil, diesel pressure 4 bar).
fuel, paraffin or solvents to clean the filter elements.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filters correctly inaccordance

with local regulations. Be responsiblefor the environ- WARNING: Before cleaning the filter with
ment. compressed air, wear individual protections,
in particular goggles and a mask to protect
your airways.

148
 Maintenance

OPERATION 9
Alternator and fan belt
Fig. 5-14

Periodically check the tension A of the alternator and fan

belt in the middle of its long side. It should give 10 - 15
mm.

To adjust the belt tension, loosen the fixing screws and

check nut (1) on the idler and move the alternator until
the correct tension has been obtained. Now tighten all
the screws and check nuts.
Also check the tension on the air conditioning compres-
sor, operation 12.

NOTE: Check the belt tension frequently. The belt must

be replaced if it is cracked or needs to be frequently Fig.5-14
adjusted. This operation must be carried out by author-
ized service personnel.
WARNING: To open the bonnet, follow the proce-
dure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot water and hot motor parts. [4.1.n]
OPERATION 10
Compressor drive belt - Fig. 5-15
Regularly check the tension of the A/C compressor
drive belt and adjust (1) in the following way if neces-
sary (Fig. 5-15).

1 - Loosen the fixing nuts (2).

2 - Move the idler (3) until the belt (4) gives about 15
mm when pressed in the middle of the longest
side. 5
3 - Tighten all the nuts (2).

4 - Also make sure that the alternator-fan belt is cor-

rectly adjusted (operation 11.

WARNING: Always check and adjust the fan and al- Fig.5-15 - Checking and adjusting the compressor drive
ternator belt first, and the compressor drive second. belt.

149
Maintenance

OPERATION 11
Mechanical gearshift clutch pedal
Fig. 5-16

If you note that clutch pedal (1) operation becomes spongy

or if the clutch slips, check that the idle travel A of the
pedal is between 15 and 25 mm. If necessary, adjust the
travel in the following way:

- Loosen the check nut (2);

- Disconnect the adjuster fork (1) and tighten it or

loosen it to obtain the correct travel A;

- Lock the check nut. Fig.5-16 Adjusting the clutch pedal travel. Pedal travel
A= 1.5 to 2.5 cm
NOTE: The electro-hydraulic clutch of tractors with
electro-hydraulic reverse shuttle needs no adjustment.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts.

OPERATION 12
Engine - Mechanical PTO clutch
adjustment Fig.5-17
Check at suitable intervals the lever adjustment. It must
have a free travel of 4 to 5 cm. For the adjustment, loosen
the jam nut (2) and screw or unscrew the adjustment fork
(1) on the control rod.
Lock the jam nut (2) again.

The mechanical clutch is hydraulically controlled and

needs no adjustment. Consult your dealer if necessary.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n] Fig.5-17 - Check and adjustment of the free travel “A”
(3,5-4 cm.) of the mechanical PTO disengagement
lever.

150
 Maintenance

OPERATION 13
Brake fluid reservoir
At suitable intervals, check the level of the fluid in the
brake reservoir. The reservoir (1 - Fig. 5-18) must always
be kept full. Top up only with the correct brake fluid, as
indicated in the Lubricants and Fuels chart. An indicator
light in the instrument panel comes on whenever the
fluid level is too low; in this case top up to the required
level.

IMPORTANT: Pay attention to maximum and minimum

levels on the brake fluid reservoir. Do not fill over the
maximum level when filling up.

Bleeding air from the rear brake

circuit Fig.5-18 - Brake fluid reservoir(1)

It becomes necessary to bleed the circuit when air en-

ters owing to lack of oil in the relative reservoir or when WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the
the braking system is serviced. procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
This operation should be carried out by specialized
personnel. If, however, you decide to do it yourself, pro-
ceed as described in the General Maintenance section. WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
WARNING: When changing and topping up the fluid hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]
in the brake reservoir (1 - Fig. 5-18), be absolutely
sure to use the correct type of fluid as different
varieties have totally different properties. These ma-
chines use a mineral-based. Never mix or exchange
these two types of brake fluid as this could rapidly
bring about brake failure.

151
Maintenance

OPERATION 14
Adjusting the brakes
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

Rear brakes
Adjust the brakes for the first time after the first 50
hours, then according to the work conditions.

The braking system must be adjusted when the free

travel of the pedals (A - Fig. 5-19) becomes excessive
and the pedals are near to end of travel.
Proceed in the following way to restore free pedal travel
to its normal value of about 3.5 cm (1.4 in.) (dimension Fig.5-19 - Travel (A) of brake pedals
A):

1 - First make sure that there is no air in the hydraulic

brake circuit. Bleed if necessary. (The presence of
air in the circuit is normally denoted by a spongy
braking action).

2 - Jack up the rear wheels of the tractor.

3 - Make sure that the parking brake is off.

4 - Free the brake pedals by raising the lock.

5 - Unscrew the check nut (1 - Fig. 5-21). Slowly

tighten the adjuster nut (2 - Fig. 5-21) until you can
no longer turn the wheel by hand.

6 - Make a reference mark on the adjuster nut (2 - Fig.

5-20) and on the support, then slacken off the
adjuster nut by 1 and 1/4ths of a turn, i.e. until the
wheel can be freely turned. Now lock the adjuster
with the relative check nut (1 - Fig. 5-21). Fig.5-20 - Check nut (2).

7 - Check that the brake pedal has a free travel of 3.5

cm (1.4 in.) and repeat the adjustment if necessary.

8 - Repeat the procedure for the other side (Fig. 5-22).

Finally, check that the free travel is the same for
both pedals and that the brakes engage simultane-
ously on both sides.

9 - Check that the parking brake lever has not been

affected and adjust if necessary (Operation 15).

Front brakes
No periodic adjustment is required as the front brakes
are self-regulating.

Fig.5-21 - Adjusting the rh brake.

1 - Check nut
2 - Adjuster nut

152
 Maintenance

OPERATION 15
Parking brake - Fig. 5-22a
The parking brake hand lever (1 - Fig.5-22b) is directly
linked to the brake pedals.
Make sure that free travel is identical for both pedals,
since free travel of the pedals determines the free travel
of the parking brake and left/right distribution of the
braking action when the brakes are locked.

Once you have adjusted the brake pedals, adjust the free
travel of the parking brake by means of the adjuster nut
(3 - Fig.5-22a) on the brake lever on the RH side of the
tractor, so that the parking brake engages after 2 clicks
of the ratchet mechanism.

Fig.5-22a - Travel adjustment of the RH brake pedal and

parking brake hand lever.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
1 - Fixing and adjuster nut of the parking brake.
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]
2 - Rear brake check nut.
3 - Rear brake adjuster nut,
4 - Parking brake disengagement adjuster rod .

Fig.5-22b

153
Maintenance

OPERATION 16
Rear final drives
Fig. 5-23
1. Park the tractor on level ground.

2. Position the final drive plugs (1- Fig.5-23) on the wheel

center line. Remove the plugs and check the oil level.
The oil level is correct if it flows from the hole. Top up
if necessary with oil of the specified type through the
plugs.

NOTE: See the Fuel and Lubricant chart for the correct
type of oil.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by Fig.5-23 - Rear final drives
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

OPERATION 17
Front axle oil level

4WD front axle

Regularly check the oil level in the differential of the
front axle and in the front axle side final drives.

1. Park the tractor on level ground

2. Position the final drive plugs (1- Fig.5-24) on the wheel

center line. Remove the plugs and check the level.
Top up if necessary with oil of the specified type
through the plugs.

3. Remove the level plug (2 - Fig. 5-25) from the central Fig.5-24 - Front axle final drive:
axle housing. The oil level must reach the hole. Top 1 - Filler, drain and level plug
up if necessary with oil of the specified type through
the plug (2 - Fig. 5-25).

NOTE: See the Fuel and Lubricant chart for the correct
type of oil.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

Fig.5-25 - Front axle

154
 Maintenance

OPERATION 18
Miscellaneous inspections
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
• Power steering cylinder hoses: the tubes must not vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
be crushed or cracked. The outer sheath must not hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]
be swollen in any way and there must be no oil
leaks between the tubes and unions. [4.1.i]

• Hand brake lever: make sure that the ratchet mecha-

nism locks in a secure and stable way.

• Make sure that the wheel nuts are correctly torqued.

• Make sure that the safety frame screws are well
tightened.

• Check to make sure that all other nuts and bolts are
well tightened.

• Check the tyre pressures.

• Check the fluid level in the window washer reservoir
- Cab version.

Safety frame

Have your Dealer’s specialized personnel check to make

sure that the safety frame fixing screws are correctly
tightened (Fig.5-26).

WARNING: The safety frame complies with

certain safety standards. It must never be
drilled or modified in order to install acces-
sories or implements. It is FORBIDDEN to

5
weld on accessories or repair the safety frame
by welding.

Fig.5-26

155
Maintenance

EVERY 100 HOURS WORK

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by hot trac-
tor parts. [4.1.n]

OPERATION 19
General lubrication
Lubricate the grease points every 100 hours or more
often, depending on the working conditions.

- Grease nipples on brake control cross link, two

points (Fig.5-27)

- Three point linkage: 7 grease nipples (Fig.5-28)

- Disengagement collar of the PTO mechanical clutch:

inject grease of the prescribed type (max. two pump
feeds) every 100 hours of actual PTO operation.
(Fig.5-29). Fig.5-27 Brake control cross link (2 nipples). Inject
grease of the prescribed type.
- 4WD drive shaft thrust bearing (Fig.5-30).

Fig.5-28 - Grease nipples of the three point linkage.

Fig.5-29 Fig.5-30

156
 Maintenance

OPERATION 20

4WD front axle greasing

Lubricate the following greasing nipples every 100
hours or more frequently, depending on work condi-
tions:

• Kingpins of 4WD axle (2 pcs). (1, Fig.5-31)

• Central pivot bushings of the front axle (1, Fig.5-32)

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]
Fig.5-31

Fig.5-32 - Front axle. 5

1 - Grease nipple of front pivot bushing of the
front axle.

157
Maintenance

OPERATION 21
2WD front axle
(Optional for some markets only)

Lubricate the following greasing nipples every 100

hours or more frequently, depending on work condi-
tions:

Fig.5-33 Not-driving front axle kingpin (2 nipples).

Inject grease of the prescribed type.

Fig.5-33

Fig.5-34 Not-driving front axle kingpin (2 nipples).

Inject grease of the prescribed type.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

Fig.5-34

158
 Maintenance

EVERY 250 HOURS SERVICE

For the engine, it is necessary to use a detergent oil
Supplement 3 as indicated in the Lubricants and Fuels
Chart.

WARNING: The following operations must be car-

ried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and
the parking brake are both engaged and that the
ignition key has been removed.

Personal safety devices must be worn for the indicated

operations.
Beware of burns caused by hot oil and engine parts.
If required, let the engine idle for the prescribed time to
reach the required temperature to let the oil flow easily.
Then turn off the engine.
If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure
indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.

OPERATION 22
Engine oil sump Fig. 5-35; Fig. 5-36 Fig.5-35 - Engine oil

During the running in period, the engine oil must be

changed after the first 50 hours. Following this, change the
oil after every 250 hours service (250, 500, 750 hours, etc...)

1. Change the oil whilst the engine is hot.

2. Remove the drain plug (3) after parking the tractor
on a flat surface.
3. Fit the drain plug back on and tighten it (3.5 daNm
driving torque).
4. Fill with oil of the recommended type until reaching
the maximum level mark on the dipstick (2).

NOTE: Allow the oil to settle in the engine sump before

checking the level. 250 hours is the maximum tolerated
frequency for oil changes. The oil must be changed
5
more frequently (e.g. every 125 hours) if the tractor is
used in heavy duty conditions).

If the tractor is used infrequently, change the engine oil Fig.5-36

at least once a year regardless of the actual number of
hours worked.

OPERATION 23
Engine oil filter Fig. 5-35
During the running in period, the engine oil must be Never fill up to a level higher than the MAX mark on the
changed after the first 50 hours. Following this, change the dipstick.
oil after every 250 hours service (250, 500, 750 hours, etc...)
NOTE: Consult the lubricant and fuel chart for the type
1. Unscrew the old filter (4) from its housing. of oil required.
2. Smear the housing in which the new filter is to be
mounted with clean oil. Make sure that the new WARNING: Only use genuine filter cartridges. Use
filter fits correctly into its housing. of spurious cartridges could damage the engine and
3. Fully tighten the new filter into its housing, then shorten its working life.
hand tighten a further half turn.
4. Top up the level with new oil.

159
Maintenance

Oil filters of the transmission and

of the steering and hitch circuits
The following operations for the transmission oil filters
must be carried out not only at the prescribed intervals,
but also whenever the indicator lights on the instrument
panel come on.

Warning lights for transmission and hydraulic sys-

tem oil filter blockage (Fig.5-37)

1 - Fixed light: Red warning light for low pressure in

transmission hydraulic circuit. When it lights up during
operations, a buzzer sounds. In this case, ask your
Dealer’s specialised workshop for help.
Fig.5-37
2 - Fixed light: Orange warning light for blockage of the
oil filter of transmission and hydraulic circuit. The filter
is mounted on the intake part of the hydraulic pumps.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

OPERATION 24
Oil filter of the transmission, steer-
ing and power lift circuits, mounted
on the intake part of the hydraulic
pumps.
Fig.5-38
WARNING: Clean the filter on the intake of the steer-
ing and hitch circuit pumps after the first 50 hours,
then every 250 hours service.

1 - Loosen the screws (1) and remove the cover (3) of

the intake filter (2).
2 - Remove the filter cartridge (2) and wash it in a
suitable solvent. Be sure to remove any metallic
fragments from the filter cover and housing.

NOTE: Replace the filter if damaged.

3 - Clean and reassemble the cover.

4. Check the oil level. Top up if necessary with oil of
the prescribed type. Fig.5-38

NOTE: After you have fitted the filter, allow the engine to
run and make sure that there are no leaks. Check the oil NOTE: Use the oil prescribed in the Lubricants and
level and top up if required. Fuels chart.

NOTE: Make sure that the hydraulic equipment con-

nected to the tractor’s hydraulic circuit uses the same
type of oil. Use of different types of oil could damage
the hydraulic circuit.

160
 Maintenance

OPERATION 25
Filter on the delivery (Fig. 5-39)
of the steering circuit (and of the
Powershuttle circuit, if installed)
WARNING: Change the paper filter on the delivery
after the first 50 hours service and then after every
250 hours.
Also change the filter whenever the red indicator
lights on the instrument panel come on (Fig.5-37)

Change the element of the filter on the delivery of the

steering circuit:

1 - Unscrew the holder (1), remove and discard the

filter element (3).

2 - Fit the new filter element (3) into the cover of the
filter (2). Fig.5-39 - Oil filter of steering, power lift and Powershut-
tle (if installed) circuits.
To prevent the filter element from being dirtied (with 1 - Holder.
mud, etc.) only completely remove the plastic protec- 2 - Cover.
tion after fitting. 3 - Filter element.
4 - Washer.
3 - Mount the holder (1) after having oiled its threaded 5 - Ring seal.
part, the washer (4) and seal (5) with clean new oil.
Take great care to fit the individual parts in the right
directions.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
Change the seal (5) and the washer (4) every vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
1000 hours service or whenever necessary. hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]
4 - Fully screw on the holder (1) by hand.

NOTE: After changing the oil and filters, run the engine
for a while and make sure there are no leaks. Check the 5
oil level again and top up if necessary.

NOTE: Use the oil indicated in the Lubricants and Fuels

chart.

NOTE: Make sure that the hydraulic equipment con-

nected to the tractor’s hydraulic circuit uses the same
type of oil. Use of different types of oil could damage
the hydraulic circuit.

161
Maintenance

EVERY 500 HOURS SERVICE

OPERATION 26
Fuel filter Fig.5-40

When the engine is running in, during the first 100

hours service, the filter should be changed for
the first two times after every 50 hours. After this,
change the fuel filter cartridge after every 500 hours
service (500,1000, etc.).

To change the fuel filter

Proceed in the following way:
1 - Clean the outside of the filter.
2 - Open the drain plug (2) at the bottom of the filter
to let all fuel out.
3 - Unscrew the filter housing (1). Remove housing Fig.5-40
and filter element from the filter head.
4 - Press the filter element against the spring and turn
it anti-clockwise to release it from the housing.
5 - Put a new filter element into the housing, press it
against the spring and turn clockwise to lock it in The following operations must be carried out with the
the housing. engine off. Check that the gear and the parking brake are
6 - Put a new seal into the housing and smear it with both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
clean fuel.
7 - Check the thread within the element for damage. WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
8 - Place the filter unit on the filter head and screw vices for each operation.
down by hand until both parts contact. Tighten by If you need to open the bonnet, follow the proce-
hand of a further 1/4th of a turn, without using any dure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
keys. Beware of burns caused by hot water and engine
9 - Close the drain plug (2). parts. [4.1.n]
10 -Bleed the fuel circuit if needed. See the General
Maintenance chapter.
11 -Start the engine and check for leaks.

In this type of engines, the fuel system is generally bled

automatically.
However, when the filters are removed, you may need to
completely bleed the system.

To completely bleed the system see “Fuel bleeding”.

CAUTION: Do not operate the electric starter

motor for more than 20 seconds at a time to avoid
overheating the windings.
If the engine fails to start, wait a while to let the
starter motor cool down before trying again.

162
 Maintenance

Bleeding air from the fuel system

Air is normally expelled automatically from this type of

system.
However, if such an operation should be necessary,
proceed in the following way (Fig. 5-41).

1 - Make sure that the fuel tank contains a sufficient

quantity of fuel.

2 - Slacken off one of the fittings (3) that connect

the injectors and allow the engine to turn over by
means of the starter motor until bubble-free fuel
flows out of the bleeder.

CAUTION: Do not operate the electric starter motor

for more than 20 seconds at a time to avoid over- Fig. 5-41 Injection pump, injectors and filters - 4-cyl.
heating the windings. If the engine fails to start, engine. The position of the fuel filters may be different
wait a while to let the starter motor cool down according to the type of engine.
before trying again. 1 - Fuel filter.
2 - Injection pump.
3 - Shut off the injector fitting when bubble-free fuel 3- Injector fittings.
flows from the fitting itself.

4 - Check all the fuel lines and seals for leaks.

WARNING: If you need to open the bonnet, follow
the procedure indicated under “How to open the
bonnet”.
Two persons are required to carry out this operation
safely.

Shift the gear to neutral and engage the parking brake.

Always use specific personal safety devices for each

operation. Beware of burns caused by hot water and
engine parts. [4.1.n]
5

163
Maintenance

OPERATION 27
Front wheel hubs for 2WD front
axle - Fig. 5-42 (If fitted)

Front wheel hubs: inject grease of the prescribed type

by means of a pump (2 grease nipples).

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n] Fig.5-42

164
 Maintenance

EVERY 1000 HOURS SERVICE OR ONCE A YEAR

CAUTION: If you need to open the bonnet, follow the procedure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation.
WARNING: Maintenance operations must be carried out with the engine off. Check that the gear and the park-
ing brake are both engaged and that the ignition key has been removed.
WARNING: Beware of burns caused by hot tractor and engine parts. [4.1.n]

OPERATION 28
Engine valves Fig. 5-43

Have the tappet and valve gaps checked by your Dealer’s

authorized personnel.

Fig.5-43

OPERATION 29
Injectors and fuel system Fig. 5-44
5
Have these checked by your Dealer’s specialized person-
nel.

NOTE: Thoroughly clean the area in which you must

work before loosening or disconnecting any part of the
injection system.

NOTE: Place covers on all the tubes and injector ori-

fices to prevent dirt from penetrating.

Fig.5-44

165
Maintenance

OPERATION 30
Oil changes for the transmission,
steering circuit and power lift hy-
draulic circuit
Fig. 5-45a and 5-45b

NOTE: It is advisable to change the oil for the first time

after 500 hours. After this, change the oil after every
1000 hours service.

Transmission housing

1 - Lower the lift arms to the ground.

2 - Remove the plug (see Operation 2).

3 - Place vessels under all seven drain plugs to collect Fig.5-45a

the oil as it drains out.

4 - Remove the plugs and drain out the oil.

5 - Fit the drain plugs back in place, then pour oil of

the approved type into the transmission until the
correct level has been reached (see Operation 2).

NOTE: Let the oil stabilize before checking its level.

WARNING: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for

the type of oil to be used according to the transmis-
sion type.

Fig.5-45b

OPERATION 30B
Check and replace (if needed) the
filter on the intake.

CAUTION: When changing transmission oil at 1000

hours service, carefully check the conditions of the
filter on the intake of the hydraulic pumps. Replace
the filter if clogged or damaged.

1 - Completely drain the transmission oil (Fig. 5-45a/b).

2 - Remove the screws (1) and the hose (3) of the
intake filter (2 - Fig.5-45c).
3 - Remove and discard the filter cartridge (2). Remove
any metal fragments from the cover and the filter
housing. Fig.5-45c
4 - Mount the new filter (2) and the intake hose (3).
5 - Clean and remount the drain plugs and fill up with
oil of the prescribed type to the right level. Consult WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
the Lubricant and Fuel chart for the oil type. vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

166
 Maintenance

OPERATION 31
Rear final drives

Rear final drives

Oil draining (Fig.5-46)

Position the plugs (1) of the rear final drives downward.
Place a vessel under the plugs (1) (one for each final drive).
Remove the plugs and drain out oil from the final drives.

Oil filling (Fig.5-47)

Position the plugs (1) on the horizontal wheel centre line
and fill with oil of the prescribed type up to the holes.
Wait for the oil to stabilize before checking the level. Top
up if necessary. Fig.5-46
Fit the plugs (1) back.

NOTE: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for the cor-
rect type of oil.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

Fig.5-47

5
OPERATION 32
Steering cylinder knuckle joints
Have the knuckle joint nuts (1) checked by an authorized
service center after the first 50 hours and then after every
1000 hours service (Fig. 5-48).

REX05-48

Fig.5-48

167
Maintenance

OPERATION 33
Oil changes in 4WD front axle
Axle housing Fig.5-49
Place a vessel under the plug (1), remove the plug and
drain out all oil.

Side final drives Fig.5-50

Position the final drive plugs (1) downward. Place a vessel
under each final drive plug (1) (one for each final drive).
Remove the plugs and drain out all oil.

Oil filling in 4WD front axle

Fig.5-49
NOTE: See the Lubricants and Fuels chart for the cor-
rect type of oil.

Front axle housing

Fit the plug (1 - Fig.5-49) back when no more oil is coming
out and fill up with fresh oil through the filler (1- Fig.5-52)
up to the level of the plug (1 - Fig.5-50).

Wait for the oil to stabilize before checking the level. Top
up if necessary.

Fit the plug back (1 - Fig.5-52).

Side final drives

Position the plugs (1 - Fig.5-51) on the wheel center line. Fill
up with oil of the specified type to the level of the holes.
Wait for the oil to stabilize before checking the level. Top
up if necessary. Fit the plugs back (1 - Fig.5-51) Fig.5-50

Fig.5-51-Front final drive: (1) filler plug

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

Fig.5-52 - Front axle

168
 Maintenance

OPERATION 34
Starter motor Fig.5-53
Have the condition and operation of the alternator checked
by a specialized workshop.
The starter motor (1) should be thoroughly cleaned at
least once a year. Particularly check the condition of the
brushes and collector.

Fig.5-53

Alternator – Fig.5-54
Have the condition and operation of the alternator checked
by a specialized workshop.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot water and engine parts. [4.1.n]
5
Fig.5-54

169
Maintenance

OPERATION 35
Dry air filter Fig.5-55

WARNING: Always stop the engine before

removing the filter elements.

The cartridges of the engine air filter should be replaced

every 1000 hours service (or once a year) or more often
if operating in a very dusty environment.

Release the clips (2), remove the cover (3) and replace the
external cartridge (4) along with the internal safety car-
tridge (5). Carefully clean the filter cover (3) and bowl (1).

NOTE: It is advisable to replace the two filter cartridges

at least once a year even if you have not reached 1000 Type A
hours service in total.

WARNING:The internal cartridge (5) must always be

replaced. It must never be cleaned.

IMPORTANT: Dispose of filters correctly in accordance

with local regulations. Be responsible for the environment.

WARNING: To open the bonnet, follow the proce-

dure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
Type B
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de- Fig.5-55
vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot water and engine parts. [4.1.n]

170
 Maintenance

OPERATION 36
Cooling system
Fig.5-56 and 5-57
Cleaning
Remove the filler cap (1) from the expansion reservoir (2)
to make coolant draining easier.

WARNING: NEVER remove the radiator cap

when the engine is hot. Unscrew the cap
very slowly to release the pressure before
taking it off completely.

Set a suitable vessel in position and drain out the coolant

through radiator plug and through plug (1 - Fig.5-57) of Fig.5-56
the engine block.

Shut off the drain plugs and fill the system with coolant
fluid until the level reaches 20-25 mm below the edge of
the fill plug (1 - Fig. 5-56) of the expansion reservoir (2).
Remove the fill plug (1) and allow the engine to run at
1000 RPM for a few minutes. Now check the level and
top up if necessary. Shut the fill plug (1) once the cleaning
operation has terminated.

NOTE: In an emergency, to make up for sudden leaks,

the system can be topped up with water by pouring this
through the filler plug (1)

CAUTION: Have the fault repaired as soon as possible.

Fill with mixture as indicated in the table below.

Fig.5-57 5
Precautions against freezing tem-
peratures
WARNING: To open the bonnet, follow the proce-
The system is filled with a mixture of water and antifreeze. dure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
Add the proportion of antifreeze given in the following
table.
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
Degrees C° - 8° - 15° - 25° - 35° hot water and engine parts.

Percentage of antifreeze
20 30 40 50
per volume %

This mixture can be permanently maintained in the circuit

for 1 year so long as you have not totalized 1000 hours
service during this period. In this case, the mixture must
be changed.

Flush out the system whenever you change from using

pure water to antifreeze mixtures and vice versa.

171
Maintenance

OPERATION 37
Fuel tank Fig.5-58
The fuel tank is cleaned by removing the plug (1 - Fig. 5-58).

NOTE: Drain off the sludge when the tank is almost

empty and only after having placed a suitable vessel
under the drain plug.

NOTE: Air in the fuel circuit makes starting the engine

difficult. Bleed the circuit as described under General
Maintenance in this section.

Fig.5-58
WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

172
 Maintenance

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Brakes

Bleeding the air from the rear brake

circuit
It becomes necessary to bleed the circuit when air en-
ters owing to lack of oil in the relative reservoir or when
the brake system is serviced.
This operation should be carried out by specialized
personnel. If, however, you decide to do it yourself,
proceed in the following way.

1 - Make sure that the reservoir (1 - Fig.5-59) is full.

2 - Thoroughly clean the area around the bleed screw.

3 - Fully depress the right-hand brake pedal.

Meanwhile, unscrew the bleed screw (1 - Fig.5-60) Fig.5-59 - Brake fluid reservoir (1).
a half-turn and allow any air and oil to flow out. Re-
tighten the bleed screw and release the pedal.

4 - Repeat this operation until bubble-free oil flows

from the bleed screw. WARNING: To open the bonnet, follow the proce-
dure indicated under “How to open the bonnet”.
5 - Make sure that the clutch pedal travel is firm and
not spongy. WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-
vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
6 - Carry out the operations described above for the hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]
left-hand brake pedal (Fig.5-61).
WARNING: When changing and topping up the fluid
7 - On completion of bleeding, top up the fluid level in in the brake reservoir (1 - Fig. 5-59), be absolutely
the reservoir (1 - Fig. 5-59). sure to use the correct type of fluid as different
varieties have totally different properties. These
NOTE: Never reuse previously bled oil without having machines use a mineral-based fluid. Never mix
first filtered it. or exchange these two types of brake fluid as this
could rapidly bring about brake failure. 5
IMPORTANT: Pay attention to maximum and minimum
levels on the brake fluid reservoir. Do not fill over the
maximum level when filling up

Fig.5-60 - Right-hand brake bleed screw. Fig.5-61 - Rear brake circuit bleeding
1 - Left-hand brake bleed screw.

173
Maintenance

Bleeding air from the front brake

circuit
After having carefully carried out operations 1 to 7 to
bleed the rear brakes, proceed in the following way:

1 - Depress both brake pedals at the same time.

Use the special coupling lock to keep the pedals
together. Unscrew the bleed screw (2 - Fig.5-62) on
the on-off valve (3) until bubble-free oil flows out.
Re-tighten the screw and release the pedals.

2 - Depress both pedals at the same time and slacken

off the two bleed screws (1 - Fig.5-63) at the rear
of the central part of the front axle.
Repeat this operation until bubble-free oil flows Fig.5-62 - Brake fluid reservoir (1) - Bleeder screw (2),
out. on-off valve (3).

NOTE: if the tractor is equipped with a valve for hydraulic

trailer braking, it will also be necessary to bleed off
any air in the piloting tube of this valve. A screw on WARNING: The oil in the brake circuits has been
the body of the valve allows this operation to be easily studied to operate at a temperature of 100°C but
carried out. only if not polluted by other substances, e.g. water
in considerable quantities will turn into vapour
3 - Check free pedal travel and that the front brakes and prevent the braking system from operating in
act at the same time. Do this by testing the action the correct way. Take the necessary precautions to
on the road. prevent water from penetrating into the system:
protect the front axle and the components in the
4 - After having done this, top up the level in the reser- braking system when the tractor is washed; store oil
voir (1 - Fig.5-62) with oil of the prescribed type. in sheltered places where water cannot infiltrate. If
you think that there is water in the braking system
WARNING: Always keep the brake pedals you must contact your dealer’s specialized person-
coupled for on-road driving in order to nel and have it removed. In this case, the rear brake
ensure simultaneous braking on both sides. cylinders will have to be demounted and emptied
Never use the brakes independently on and particularly the brake housing of the front axle
public roads. which, being the lowest part of the system, is the
one most exposed to this type of fault.
When working on slopes, avoid using the
brakes as much as possible. Instead, select a
lower gear and use engine braking.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

Fig.5-63 - Bleeding air from the front brake circuit.

1 - Bleeder screws (2 screws).

174
 Maintenance

Hydraulic trailer brakes

To brake the trailer along with the tractor, the flexible
tube of the trailer brakes must be connected to the fit-
ting at the rear of the tractor (1 - Fig.5-64). Always make
sure that the two parts are clean before you connect
them, to ensure that the various components operate in
a perfect way.

WARNING: Trailer brake approved for ITALY. When

the tractor is operating, it is absolutely essential to
engage the parking brake when either connecting or
detaching the tube that links the tube of the trailer
braking system to the quick coupling (1 - Fig.5-64).

NOTE: Air may enter the hydraulic trailer brake circuit

during normal servicing operations such as oil changes,
Fig.5-64 - Hydraulic trailer braking tap (1).
cleaning of oil ducts. Air in the circuit leads to vibra-
tions on the pedal when the brakes are used. Air can be
easily bled from the circuit by pulling the parking brake
lever and depressing the brake pedal several times.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

Dashboard control coatings

CAUTION: Use water and a neutral detergent to

clean the coatings of dashboard and controls. Any
commercial product to clean car interiors may be
used. DO NOT use any kind of solvents or alcohol.

175
Maintenance

Page left intentionally blank

176
Cab - Electrical system

Section 6
Cab - Maintenance 6
Electrical system

177
Cab - Electrical system

AIR CONDITIONED CAB

The cab can be fitted with an air conditioning system on
request.
Besides being able to provide an optimum temperature
in the cab, this system also lowers the degree of humid-
ity in the air.

SAFETY NOTES
The air conditioner is a safe system that is able to en-
sure lasting and risk-free use. However, it is important
to comply with certain simple precautions (listed below)
in order to prevent possible accidents.

• Never work on the conditioning system yourselves.

Always contact the specialized technicians of the
Assistance Service (Fig. 6-1).

• Keep naked flames well away from the air condi-

tioning system (Fig. 6-2) as leaking coolant could Fig. 6-1
give rise to a deadly gas: phosgene.

• The mixture of oil and coolant in the air condition-

ing system is under pressure. Never ever loosen
any unions or tamper with the pipes.
For the same reason, you must never unscrew the
compressor’s oil level check plug.

• Coolant can freeze the skin and particularly the

eyes.
Proceed in the following way if accidents occur:
– if coolant has splashed into the eyes, wash them
out immediately with a few drops of mineral oil,
then continue to wash them with a solution of bo-
ric acid and water (one teaspoon of acid in 1/4 of a
cup of water) and immediately seek medical help;
– areas frozen by coolant fluid can be treated by
progressively warming the injured zone with cold
water and then applying a greasy cream.
However, always seek medical help if such acci-
dents occur.
Fig. 6-2
• Keep the air conditioning system well away from
heat sources as explosions could occur (Fig. 6-3).

Fig. 6-3

178
 Cab - Electrical system

PERIODICAL INSPECTIONS GENERAL CAB MAINTENANCE (ALL

VERSIONS)
At least once every three months:
After servicing the external parts of the cab, proceed with
– remove any foreign bodies from between the the following inspections:
evaporator and condenser fins;
1. Periodically check to make sure that no water
– check the tension of the compressor belt; has collected in the zones covered with mats or
upholstery.
– allow the engine to run at a rate of 1500 rpm. In 2. Protect the hinges and locks of the doors, sun
the meantime keep the dehydrator filter under roof and openable windows with water-repellent
observation: the glass should be clear, without air lubricating products.
bubbles or white liquid. 3. Use special cleaning products to clean the
windows, or sulphuric ether, if necessary.
– check the conditions of the pipes, unions and 4. Detach the windscreen wiper and sprinkle talcum
supporting brackets; on the rubber wiper.
5. Leave the doors or sun-roof partially open.
– make sure that the drain pipes are efficient and
remove the condensation from the evaporator;
CAB UPHOLSTERY
– make sure that the screws and fixing nuts of the
pulleys and compressor are well tightened. CAUTION: Use water and a neutral detergent to
clean the polyurethane cab upholstery or the spe-
– Grease Door Locks and Hinges cific products available on the market for cleaning
car interiors. Any commercial product for car uphol-
stery cleaning may be used.
Do NOT use any products deriving from hydro-
MAINTENANCE carbons, ketonic or aromatic solvents, or cleaning
spirits of any kind.
If the conditioning system remains unused for a long
period of time, it must be turned on for a few minutes SPECIFICATIONS
each month to allow the oil to circulate around the circuit
and to keep the seals in an efficient condition.
Only operate the conditioner when the engine is hot and Coolant fluid.......................................................... R134 A
the temperature in the cab has reached 20°C.
Air conditioning system reloading

- Quantity of gas to be loaded: 1000 g (+/- 50 g)

YEARLY MAINTENANCE - Keep the gas unit steady when filling the circuit,
in order to allow for a precise reading of the gas
Have your Dealer’s specialized personnel carry out the weight.
following operations at the beginning of the season: - Operating pressure (20 bar).

– check the level of the oil in the compressor and top it IMPORTANT: This tractor uses a R134A coolant that does
up if necessary; not damage the ozone layer. Do not introduce any coolant

– make sure that the system is tight by means of a leak

different from the prescribed one into the air condition-
ing system. This could jeopardize the cooling power and
6
tester and top up the HFC 134a gas if necessary, or irremediably damage the system.

– replace the dehydrator filter only if strictly necessary; Check the tension of the compressor belt as indicated
in Operation 10 in the Periodical Maintenance chapter.
– carry out a functional test on the system.
DANGER: Wear safety garments and goggles
in case of leaks. Coolant can injury the eyes.
The coolant produces a toxic gas if it con-
tacts a flame.

179
Cab - Electrical system

Cab air filter Fig.6-4

WARNING: Remember that the cab filter is not
suitable for chemicals in general.
Absolute protection against these products
can therefore only be achieved by taking
the precautionary measures required by the
degree of harmfulness of the actual products
used.
It is essential to strictly conform to this lat-
ter precaution for all types of filter whose use
requires compliance with the envisaged opera-
tion and maintenance instructions.
However, even use of filters to protect against
chemicals in general does not exempt opera-
tors from taking all the personal precautions
recommended for use of such products. Fig. 6-4
These specific filters must only be mounted
when the actual chemicals are being used and
must then be replaced with the normal paper
filters supplied with the machine at the end
of each treatment.
Do not use them during the other processes
since the dust would quickly clog them.
Carefully comply with the operating instruc-
tions on the filter packages or labels. Contact
your Dealer if specific filters against chemicals
must be used.

CAUTION:Take the filter off before washing the cab.

If the cab is washed and the special filter has not been
demounted, take care to prevent the jet of water from
splashing on to the protective grille (Fig.6-5) otherwise
your cab’s special filter will be irreparably damaged. Fig. 6-5

CAUTION: If active carbon filters are used, mount only

original filters supplied in a sealed package: follow the
instructions for use on the container and attached to
any filter package. Carefully comply with the operating
instructions on the filter packages or labels. Replace the
filters at the intervals specified by the filter manufacturer.
Contact your Dealer if specific filters against chemicals
must be used. Protection level [4.1.p][4.5.3]
Always wear individual protections suitable to the harm-
fulness of the actual product used.

CAUTION: The Manufacturer has no responsibility

whatever, either direct or indirect, for application of spe-
WARNING: Tractors with cab have no pro-
cial filters and/or changes to the air intake system of the
tection against harmful substances, but is
cab. Every change to the cab intake system can result
protected from dust (protection level 2). If
in a health hazard for the operator and significantly alter
the tractor is used to spray phytosanitary
the performance of the air conditioning system. In any
products or chemicals generally thought of as
case, the cab is not guaranteed as perfectly dust-tight.
hazardous to health, the operator must wear
Always wear individual protections when working in
individual protections (mask) suitable to the
particularly dusty environment.
harmfulness of the actual product used.

180
 Cab - Electrical system

Fuses - Fig. 6-6

FU6 - 60A fuse, cab power (Fig.6-5b)

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation.

Fig. 6-5b

The box (1) contains the fuses that protect the cab’s
electrical system.

Fuse Function Amps

1 AC electric fan 20
2 Air conditioner thermostat 5
3 Air conditioner compressor 7.5
4 Rotating beacon and ceiling light 10
5 Radio, direct 5
6 Radio, key-operated 5
7 Not used -
8 Windscreen wiper 5
9 Front and rear window washer 5
10 Rear window wiper 5
11 Front field lights 10
12 Rear field lights 10
13 Radiator fans 25

Fig.6-6

Cab relays - Fig.6-13b 6

The relays of the cab electric system are located under
the cab roof lining.

Relays Description

KC1 Auxiliary roof relay

KC2 Air conditioner compressor relay
KC3 Auxiliary roof relay
KC4 Cab front field lights relay
KC5 Cab rear field lights relay
KC6 Air conditioning exchanger electric fans relay

Fig.6-6b

181
Cab - Electrical system

CAB - MAINTENANCE ON REQUEST

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by hot trac-
tor parts.

Operation 1

Cab air filter Fig. 6-7

1 - Unscrew fixing knobs of the cover.

2 - Remove the cover.
3 - Unscrew the two knobs (2) fixing the filter.
4 - Remove the filter (1) and clean as follows (Fig.6-7b):

– delicately tap it on a flat surface with the external

side pointing downwards;

or:

– use a jet of compressed air at a pressure of less

than 6.9 bar (7 kg/cm2); Fig.6-7

Clean the filter housing with a cloth.

When the filter is remounted, the cartridge (1) must be
oriented as indicated on the cartridge itself.

Fig.6-7b

Operation 2

Compressor belt Fig. 6-8

Periodically check the tension of the compressor belt.

If the belt (1) is slack, loosen the fixing screw (2) and move
the idler (3) until the correct tension is obtained.

NOTE: Replace the belt if it is cracked or needs fre-

quent adjustments.

CAUTION: Always check the fan and alternator belt

first, and the air conditioning compressor belt after-
ward.
Fig.6-8

182
 Cab - Electrical system

Operation 3

Cleaning the air conditioning con-

denser. Fig. 6-9

Remove the rear panel from the cab roof to get to the air
conditioning condenser (1).

- Clean the condenser surface with and air jet directed

from the inside to the outside.

- Also check that the surfaces you clean are not

warped. In this case the damage must be repaired. Fig.6-9
Proceed in inverse order to remount.

Operation 4 6
Window washer liquid reservoir
Fig. 6-10
Check the window washer liquid level (1) at regular inter-
vals. Fill it up if required.

Fig.6-10

183
Cab - Electrical system

CAB
AFTER EVERY 1000 HOURS SERV-
ICE OR ONCE A YEAR

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety de-

vices for each operation. Beware of burns caused by
hot tractor parts. [4.1.n]

Operation 5

Cab air filter Fig. 6-11a/b

Remove the cover (1-Fig.6-11a) (Operation 1) and replace
the filter cartridge inside (1-Fig.6-11b).

NOTE: The filters must be replaced every time the

air conditioning system is serviced. In such occasions, Fig.6-11a
check the oil level in the compressor.

IMPORTANT: Respiratory protection equipment and

protective clothing appropriate to the environment that
the filter has been in contact with MUST be used during
the cleaning of the filters.

IMPORTANT: The old element MUST be put into a

sealed container and disposed of in accordance with
local regulations. Be responsible for the environment.

NOTE: Replace the element(s) with genuine parts.

Fig.6-11b

Operation 6

Compressor Fig. 6-12

Have the air conditioning system operation checked. Also

check the lubricating oil level in the compressor (1).

Fig.6-12

184
 Maintenance

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery Fig.6-13 [4.1.l]
Your tractor is equipped with a maintenance free battery.

WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices

for each operation.

Keep the battery clean and dry, particularly on top.

Check the electrolyte level: it should just touch the upper
mark and never be under the bottom mark.
If necessary, open the covers (1) and add distilled water.

WARNING: NEVER top up with SULFURIC

ACID.
Fig.6-13 Battery
WARNING:
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories Recommendations
contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals The following rules must be respected to preserve an
known to the State of California to cause cancer efficient battery:
and reproductive harm. Wash your hands after - Keep the battery clean and dry, particularly on top.
handling these parts. - If the battery acid must be topped up, use distilled
water only,
- Make sure that the cable terminal nuts are well fixed
to the battery terminals.
Check the charge condition with a voltmeter. Do not use - Always use a wrench and not pliers to tighten and
quick battery chargers to recharge the batteries. loosen the terminal nuts.
- Smear terminals with petroleum jelly (not grease) to
NOTE: if the battery must be topped up frequently or protect them from oxidation.
tends to discharge, have the electrical system of your - Never let the battery run completely down. If possi-
tractor checked by your area Dealer’s specialised per- ble, recharge monthly.
sonnel.

WARNING: Remember to disconnect the wires

before you recharge the battery. It is advisable
to remove the battery from its housing and to
recharge it well away from the tractor.

WARNING: The place in which the battery is

5
recharged must be well ventilated. Do not
smoke or produce sparks whilst the battery
is being recharged.

NOTE: See the Maintenance section of this manual for a WARNING: Battery electrolyte contains sul-
description of battery replacement procedure. furic acid and can cause serious burns. The
following good practices are therefore recom-
CAUTION: Dispose correctly of batteries, piles and mended.
accumulators to places and containers provided for - Wear leather heavy-duty gloves and protective
separate waste collection according to local rules. DO clothes. In case of contact with the skin, wash with
NOT dispose of them in the environment. plenty of water.
- Batteries release flammable gases that can cause an
explosion.
- DO NOT go near the battery with naked flames or
cigarettes.
- In case of contact with the eyes, first flush with water,
then seek medical help.
- Keep batteries well out of children’s reach.
- It contains lead: NEVER dispose of batteries in gen-
eral waste.
- Deliver and dispose of exhausted batteries only
in suitable containers provided to this purpose at
authorised centres, according to local rules.

185
Maintenance

Starter motor Electrical system - Warnings

It is absolutely forbidden to make changes or connections
The starter motor should be thoroughly cleaned after to the data interconnecting lines between control
periods of 1000 hours or at least once a year. units (CAN-BUS lines). They are to be considered as
Particularly check the condition of the brushes and col- INVIOLABLE. All diagnostic and maintenance operations
lector. may only be carried out by authorized technicians, with
specific appliances approved by Landini.
Use only fuses with the rated capacity for their specific
Alternator function. Do not ever use fuses with higher rated capacity.
The alternator keeps the battery fully charged. Replace a blown fuse only after correcting the relative
The alternator is a brushless model and requires no special malfunction and turn off any keys and users before
maintenance. However, the following precautions must replacing.
be observed. Please keep in mind that electrical systems made by
unqualified persons might severely damage the systems
1 - When fitting a battery, make sure that the positive on board the tractor (control units, harnesses, sensors
and negative terminals are connected to the same etc.), and jeopardize the riding safety and good operation
leads as the alternator. If the battery terminals are of the tractor. Such damages ARE NOT COVERED BY OUR
inverted, you will short circuit the battery through CONTRACT WARRANTY.
the alternator diodes. Never disconnect control unit and sensor connectors
while the engine is running and the control units are
2 - When connecting the battery to a charger, make powered.
sure that the positive (+) lead of the charger is Negative conductors connected to a grounding point
connected to the positive of the battery and the of the system must be as short as possible and star
negative (-) to the negative. Incorrect connection connected with each other.
will damage the diodes and the other circuit As a principle, the grounding connections of the tractor
components. may not be changed.
If the creation of further grounding points is required, the
3 - Never run the alternator unless it is properly holes already provided on the frame must be used, taking
connected. care of the following
If the battery is not connected, high voltages can - remove lacquer from the frame
build up inside the alternator that can be extremely - use a suitable highly conductive lacquer between frame
dangerous if the output terminal is touched. and cable terminal.
Make sure that all connections are firm and tight - connect the ground within 5 minutes from lacquer
before carrying out any inspections or tests on the application
electrical system.
THE POINTS PROVIDED FOR ENGINE CONNECTION
4 - Never short circuit or earth any of the alternator TO GROUND MUST BE ABSOLUTELY AVOIDED FOR
terminals. This could damage the electrical system. GROUND CONNECTIONS - Fig.6-14
5 - Never invert the alternator connections. The battery 1 - Ground connection; A. Efficient grounding point; B.
and alternator earths must be of the same sign or Not efficient grounding point;
the alternator diodes will be damaged. 2 - Cable fastening: A. Screw; B. Cable terminal; C.
Washer; D. Nut
6 - Always disconnect both alternator terminals before 3 - Correctly grounded cable.
undertaking any electric arc welding on the tractor.

A B
Fig.6-14

186
 Maintenance

Headlights
As you can use your tractor on public roads, the light-
ing must comply with the applicable traffic and road
regulations. Periodically check headlight alignment in
the following way:

Checking headlight alignment (Fig. 6-16).

- Halt the tractor on level ground facing a shaded wall

(preferably white). The tractor must be unloaded and
the tyres correctly inflated. Mark two crosses on the
wall in front of the tractor headlights (Fig. 6-16).

- Reverse the tractor 5 meters (16.4 ft) away from the

wall.

- Switch on the main beam. The center of each beam

must be vertically aligned with the crosses on the
wall. A maximum outward divergence of 130 mm (5 Fig.6-15- Headlight alignment adjusters.
in) is acceptable.

- Switch on the dipped beam. The line separating the

lighted area from the dark area must fall below the
crosses and must be separated from their centers by
at least 1/20th of the height of the crosses from the
ground.

- Adjust the headlight alignment screws to correct

alignment as necessary (Fig. 6-15).

H
20

5 m.

Fig.6-16 - Checking headlight alignment.

187
Maintenance

How to replace the headlight bulbs

Fig.6-17

1 - Remove the connector (2).

2 - Remove the rubber guard (1).
3 - Slacken off the retention spring (4).
4 - Remove the defective bulb (1).
5 - Fit in a new bulb. Remember not to hold the bulb in
your hand. Use a cloth to handle the bulb whilst it is
being fitted.
6 - Fit the parts back in place by proceeding through the
instructions in reverse order.

Fig.6-17

How to replace the bulbs in the rear

side lights and hazard lights
Fig.6-18

1 - Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the glass cover.

2 - Press down the bulb and turn it in the anti-clockwise
direction.
3 - Replace the faulty bulb.

Fig.6-18

How to replace the bulbs in the

front side lights and hazard lights
Fig.6-19

1 - Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the glass cover.

2 - Replace the faulty bulb.
Ref.2- Intermittent turn indicator light
Ref.3- Side light
To replace the faulty bulb, press it down and turn it
in the anti-clockwise direction.

Fig.6-19

188
 Maintenance

FUSES AND RELAYS

The tractor’s electrical system is protected by fuses

against short circuits and excessive power draw. The
number of the fuses in the electrical system depends
on the tractor model.

NOTE: Before replacing a blown fuse with a new, WARNING: Always use specific personal safety devices
equivalent one, the cause that led to the fault should be for each operation.
ascertained and removed.

WARNING: To carry out this operation, engage the

first gear, turn off the engine, engage the parking
brake and remove the ignition key.

Fig. 6-20
FU1 Users supply 100 A
FU2 Alternator 80 A
FU3 Glow plug 50 A

K16 Glow plug relay (pre-heating)

5
Fig.6-20 - Power box, front fuse box

189
Maintenance

FUSES AND RELAYS - Techno

Fig.6-21
Fuses and relays in the main fuse box on the left side of
dashboard.

FUSES
Fuse Circuit protected Amps
FA1 Safety 5
FA2 Auxiliary relays 5
FA3 Electronic hitch (key operated
positive), hydraulic motor 7.5
FA4 Rear Power Take-Off 5
FA5 Instrument, key-operated 5
FA6 Engine power supply 7.5
FA7 Four-Wheel drive 5
FA8 Not used -
FA9 Differential lock 7.5
FA10 Dipped beams 10
FA11 Headlight main beams 15
FA12 Turn indicators 10
FA13 Rh side lights 7.5
FA14 LH side lights 7.5
FA15 Side lights, general 10
FA16 Not used -
FB1 Key switch power 20
FB2 Starter motor 15
FB3 Power unit for flow selector and
underbelly front valves 15
FB4 Glow plugs 5
FB5 Differential lock, brake lights 15
FB6 Emergency 15
FB7 NAO power unit 7.5
FB8 Horn + revolving beacon 15
FB9 Auxiliary socket A, direct 5
FB10 Auxiliary socket 20A, key-operated 20
FB11 Air suspension seat 15
FB12 Rear and front work light (cab) 7.5 Fig.6-21 - Main relay and fuse box.
FB13 Not used - F = Fuses
FB14 Instrument and buzzer power line, K = Relays
direct 5
FB15 Rear + front trailer brake solenoid
valve 5
FB16 Electronic hitch (D+ alternator) 5

Relays - Fig. 6-21

KA1 Starter motor
KA2 Auxiliary relays
KA3 Auxiliary relays
KA4 Auxiliary relays
KA5 Auxiliary relays
KB1 Rear PTO fuse
KB2 Dipped beams
KB3 Headlight main beams
KB4 Diff lock release, brake lights
KB5 Differential lock

K21 Hydraulic trailer brake (Fig.6-21b)

Fig.6-21b

190
 Maintenance

FUSES AND RELAYS - Top Power-

shuttle - Fig.6-22

Fuses and relays in the main fuse box on the left side of
dashboard.

FUSES
Fuse Circuit protected Amps
FA1 Rear PTO fuse 5
FA2 Auxiliary relays 5
FA3 Electronic hitch (key operated positive),
hydraulic motor 7.5
FA4 Not used -
FA5 Instrument, key-operated 5
FA6 Engine power supply 7.5
FA7 Four-wheel drive 5
FA8 Not used -
FA9 Differential lock 55
FA10 Dipped beams 10
FA11 Headlight main beams 15
FA12 Turn indicators 10
FA13 Rh side lights 7.5
FA14 LH side lights 7.5
FA15 Side lights, general 10
FA16 Not used -

FB1 Key switch power 20

FB2 Starter motor 15
FB3 Power unit for flow selector and
underbelly front valves 15
FB4 Glow plugs 5
FB5 Differential lock, brake lights 15
FB6 Emergency 15
FB7 NAO power unit 7.5
FB8 Horn + revolving beacon 15
FB9 Auxiliary socket A, direct 5
FB10 Auxiliary socket 20A, key-operated 20 Fig.6-22 - Main relay and fuse box.
FB11
FB12
Air suspension seat
Rear and front work light (cab)
10
7.5
F = Fuses
K = Relays
5
FB13 Gearbox power unit 10
FB14 Instrument and buzzer power line, direct 5
FB15 Rear + front trailer brake solenoid valve 5
FB16 Electronic hitch (D+ alternator) 5

Relays - Fig. 6-22

KA1 Starter motor
KA2 Auxiliary relays
KA3 Auxiliary relays
KA4 Auxiliary relays
KA5 Auxiliary relays
KB1 Rear PTO fuse
KB2 Dipped beams
KB3 Headlight main beams
KB4 Diff lock release, brake lights
KB5 Differential lock

K21 Hydraulic trailer brake (Fig.6-22b)

Fig.6-22b

191
Maintenance

7-pole power socket for trailer

A 7-pole power socket is installed on the rear of the

tractor (1 - Fig. 6-24). This socket is used to connect the
light circuits of the trailer.

Connections (Fig.6-23)
1. Lh turn indicator; 2. Not used; 3. Earth; 4. Rh turn
indicator; 5. Rh rear side light; 6. Brake lights; 7. Lh rear
side light.

Fig.6-24

Fig.6-23 Connections and correspondances for

7-pole power socket according to ISO-SAE
standards.

Auxiliary power socket12V

(2-Fig. 6-24)
A 3-pin 12 volt auxiliary power socket is mounted on the
rear of the tractor.

Connections (Fig.6-25)
1- Key-operated positive - Max. load 5A
2- Negative
3- Direct battery positive - Max. load 25A

Fig.6-25

192
 Maintenance

Long idle periods

Take the following precautionary measures when your - Place stands or other supports under the axles in
tractor is not going to be used for a long period of time. order to take the weight off the wheels. When the
tractor is raised in this way, it is advisable to deflate
To carry out the operations described hereunder, see the the tyres. If this is not possible, the tyre pressure
sections relative to the maintenance of the various parts. must be periodically checked.
Always use specific personal safety devices for each
service operation. - Cover the tractor with a tarpaulin (not plastic or
waterproof).
- Park the tractor in a dry, sheltered place.
CAUTION: At the end of the idle period, when
- Drain the coolant from the radiator and engine. you start the engine again, pay particular at-
tention to the instructions about starting the
- Grease all points provided with grease nipples. engine in the Operation chapter.

- Clean the fuel filter.

- Remove the injectors and squirt a small quantity of

engine oil into the cylinders. Turn the engine over by
hand, then fit the injectors back in place.

- Generally clean the tractor, particularly the bodywork

components. Protect the painted parts by applying
silicone wax and the unpainted metal parts by ap-
plying protective lubricant. Park the tractor in a dry,
sheltered and possibly ventilated place.

- Make sure that all controls are in neutral (including

the electric switches and parking brake controls).

- Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.

- Make sure that the cylinder stems (of the power

steering, power lift systems, etc.) are positioned.

- Empty the fuel tank and fill it with new diesel fuel 5
until the maximum level is reached.

- Remove the battery, clean the cover and spread

Vaseline on the terminals and terminal caps. Now
connect the battery in a ventilated place where the
temperature is not liable to drop below 10°C and
where it is not exposed to direct sunlight.

- Check the battery charge with a voltmeter as de-

scribed in the battery part of this section. Recharge
if it is necessary.

193
Maintenance

Page left intentionally blank.

194
 Technical specifications

ARGO TRACTORS constantly updates its range of products and

therefore reserves the right to undertake modifications, if appro-
priate ad necessary, without prior notice.
All data and information contained in this publication could be
subject to changes.
Dimensions and weights are only approximate values and the
equipment shown by the pictures could not correspond to stand-
ard models.
Precise data and information about models and equipment are
available at your ARGO TRACTORS Dealer.

Chapter 7
Technical specifications
7

195
Technical specifications

General data 3675F

4 cylinders
With tyres 2 WD 4WD
– Front
7.50-16 280/70R20
– Rear 14.9 R 28

Weights

In running order, with full fuel tank, without ballast, with

safety frame...................................................................... kg 2615 2615
As above, with cab............................................................ kg 2760 2990

Dimensions
A- Height at bonnet........................................................mm 1280
A2-Height at steering wheel...........................................mm 1450
B- Cab height max..........................................................mm
2260
Height at safety frame max.......................................mm
2312
C- Wheelbase.................................................................mm 2174 2134
D- Max. length without front ballast
and links.....................................................................mm 3709
E- Ground clearance .....................................................mm 390 260
F- Min. width..................................................................mm
See track
G - Front track..................................................................mm
H - Rear track...................................................................mm tables

196
 Technical specifications

General data 3685F

4 cylinders
With tyres 2 WD 4WD
– Front
7.50-16 280/70R20
– Rear
14.9 R 28

Weights

In running order, with full fuel tank, without ballast, with

safety frame...................................................................... kg 2615 2615
As above, with cab............................................................ kg 2760 2990

Dimensions
A- Height at bonnet........................................................mm 1280
A2-Height at steering wheel...........................................mm
1450
B- Cab height max..........................................................mm

7
Height at safety frame max.......................................mm 2260
2312
C- Wheelbase.................................................................mm 2174 2134
D- Max. length without front ballast
and links.....................................................................mm 3709
E- Ground clearance .....................................................mm 390 260
F- Min. width..................................................................mm
G - Front track..................................................................mm See track
H - Rear track...................................................................mm tables

197
Technical specifications

3670-3685GE 3670-3685F
General data 3 cylinders TA
2 WD 4WD 2WD 4WD
With tyres
– Front 9.00-10 260/70R167.50-16 280/70R18
14.9 LR 20 14.9 R 24
– Rear

Weights

In running order, with full fuel tank, without ballast, with

safety frame...................................................................... kg 2425 2600 2500 2675
As above, with cab............................................................ kg — — 2650 2825

Dimensions

A- Height at bonnet........................................................mm 1230 1280

A2-Height at steering wheel...........................................mm
1375 1430
B- Cab height max..........................................................mm
Height at safety frame max.......................................mm — 2660
2155 2312
C- Wheelbase.................................................................mm 2065 2017 2065 2017
D- Max. length without front ballast
and links.....................................................................mm 3600 3600
E- Ground clearance .....................................................mm 360 245 380 250
F- Min. width..................................................................mm
G - Front track..................................................................mm See track See track
H - Rear track...................................................................mm tables tables

198
 Technical specifications

3680GE 3680F 3680GT

General data
2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD
With tyres
– Front 9.00-10 260/70R16 7.50-16 280/70R20 7.50-16 275/80R18
– Rear 14.9 LR 20 14.9 R 28 360/70R24

Weights

In running order, with full fuel tank, without ballast, with

safety frame...................................................................... kg 2450 2615 2615 2845 — 2865
As above, with cab............................................................ kg — — 2760 2990 — 3010

Dimensions

A- Height at bonnet........................................................mm 1230 1280 1280

A2-Height at steering wheel...........................................mm 1375 1450 1450
B- Cab height max..........................................................mm
Height at safety frame max.......................................mm
—
2155
2260
2312
2260
2322
7
C- Wheelbase.................................................................mm 2174 2134 2174 2134 — 2134
D- Max. length without front ballast
and links.....................................................................mm 3709 3709 3709
E- Ground clearance .....................................................mm 360 245 390 260 390 260
F- Min. width..................................................................mm See track See track See track
G - Front track..................................................................mm tables tables tables
H - Rear track...................................................................mm

199
Technical specifications

3690GE 3690F 3690GT

General data
2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD
With tyres
– Front 9.00-10 280/70R16 7.50-16 280/70R20 7.50-16 275/80R18
– Rear 14.9 LR 20 14.9 R 28 16.9R24

Weights

In running order, with full fuel tank, without ballast, with

safety frame...................................................................... kg 2450 2615 2615 2845 — 2865
As above, with cab............................................................ kg — — 2760 2990 — 3010

Dimensions
A- Height at bonnet........................................................mm 1230 1280 1280
A2-Height at steering wheel...........................................mm 1375 1450 1450
B- Cab height max..........................................................mm
— 2260 2260
Height at safety frame max.......................................mm
2155 2312 2322
C- Wheelbase.................................................................mm 2174 2134 2174 2134 — 2134
D- Max. length without front ballast
and links.....................................................................mm 3709 3709 3709
E- Ground clearance .....................................................mm 360 245 390 260 390 260
F- Min. width..................................................................mm See track See track See track
G - Front track..................................................................mm
tables tables tables
H - Rear track...................................................................mm

200
 Technical specifications

36100GE 36100F 36100GT

General data
2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD
With tyres
– Front 9.00-10 280/70R16 7.50-16 280/70R20 7.50-16 275/80R18
– Rear 360/70R24 14.9 R 28 16.9R24

Weights

In running order, with full fuel tank, without ballast, with

safety frame...................................................................... kg 2450 2615 2615 2845 — 2865
As above, with cab............................................................ kg — — 2760 2990 — 3010

Dimensions
A- Height at bonnet........................................................mm 1230 1280 1280
A2-Height at steering wheel...........................................mm 1375 1450 1450
B- Cab height max..........................................................mm
— 2260 2260
Height at safety frame max.......................................mm

2174
2155
2134 2174
2312
2134
2322
— 2134
7
C- Wheelbase.................................................................mm
D- Max. length without front ballast
and links.....................................................................mm 3709 3709 3709
E- Ground clearance .....................................................mm 360 260 390 260 390 260
F- Min. width..................................................................mm See track See track See track
G - Front track..................................................................mm
tables tables tables
H - Rear track...................................................................mm

201
Technical specifications

36110-36120 GE 36110-36120 F 36110-36120 GT

General data
2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD 2 WD 4 WD
With tyres
– Front 9.00-10 280/70R16 7.50-16 280/70R18 7.50-16 275/80R18
– Rear 360/70R24 14.9 R 28 16.9R24

Weights

In running order, with full fuel tank, without ballast, with

safety frame...................................................................... kg 2450 2615 2615 2845 — 2865
As above, with cab............................................................ kg — — 2760 2990 — 3010

Dimensions
A- Height at bonnet........................................................mm 1230 1280 1280
A2-Height at steering wheel...........................................mm 1375 1450 1450
B- Cab height max..........................................................mm — 2260 2260
Height at safety frame max.......................................mm
2155 2312 2322
C- Wheelbase.................................................................mm 2174 2134 2174 2134 — 2134
D- Max. length without front ballast
and links.....................................................................mm 3709 3709 3709
E- Ground clearance .....................................................mm 360 260 390 260 390 260
F- Min. width..................................................................mm See track See track See track
G - Front track..................................................................mm tables tables tables
H - Rear track...................................................................mm

202
 Technical specifications

Engine 3675F 3685F

Type Perkins Diesel, 4 stroke
direct injection

Model 1104C-44 1104C-44

Fuel supply Natural Natural
Number of cylinders 4 4
Bore mm 105 105
Stroke mm 127 127
Displacement litres 4.4 4.4
Max. power rating HP/kW 68/50 81.6/60
Max. rated speed RPM 2200 2200
Max. torque rating Nm 273 294
Max. torque speed RPM 1400 1400
Idling speed RPM 750 750

Timing system

Type With overhead valves

controlled by tappets
Fuel system

Injection pump rotary

Filter replaceable cartridge
Firing order 1-3-4-2 1-3-4-2
Cold starting device Thermostarter
Air filter dry type, with two elements

Engine approved to CE 97/68 standard, Phase 2, Tier II

Engine lubrication Cooling

Pump driven forced lubrication.
Water cooling, forced circulation by centrifugal pump.
Oil filtration by:
– Gauze filter at pump intake. Vertical tube type radiator.
– Replaceable cartridge filter on engine delivery
line.
Thermostat control for water circulation. 7
Oil pressure with engine at rated power speed: 3.5/4.2
bar. Normal temperature: 77°/ 85° C.

Anti-freeze needed for very low temperatures (see “Main-

Engine starting tenance” chapter).

Thermostarter device for starting at low temperatures.

203
Technical specifications

Engine 3670GE-3670F 3685GE-3685F

Type Perkins Diesel, 4 stroke Perkins Diesel, 4 stroke

direct injection direct injection

Model 1103D-33TA 1103D-33TA

Fuel supply Turbo Turbo
Number of cylinders 3 3
Bore mm 105 105
Stroke mm 127 127
Displacement litres 3.3 3.3
Max. power rating HP/kW 68/50 78,9/58
Max. rated speed RPM 2200 2200
Max. torque rating Nm 280 310
Max. torque speed RPM 1400 1400
Idling speed RPM 750 750

Timing system
Type Overhead valves, controlled by Overhead valves, controlled by
rocker arms rocker arms

Fuel system

Injection pump rotary rotary

Filter replaceable cartridge replaceable cartridge
Firing order 1‑2-3 1‑2-3
Cold starting device Thermostarter Thermostarter
Air filter dry type, with two elements dry type, with two elements

Engine lubrication Cooling

Pump driven forced lubrication.
Water cooling, forced circulation by centrifugal pump.
Oil filtration by:
– Gauze filter at pump intake. Vertical tube type radiator.
– Replaceable cartridge filter on engine delivery line.

Oil pressure with engine at rated power speed: 3.5/4.2 Thermostat control for water circulation.
bar.
Normal temperature: 77°/ 85° C.
Engine starting
Anti-freeze needed for very low temperatures (see “Main-
tenance” chapter).
Thermostarter device for starting at low temperatures.

204
 Technical specifications

Engine GE-F-GT 3680 3690 36100 36110 36120

Type Perkins Diesel, 4 stroke

direct injection

Model 1104D-44 1104D-44T 1104D-44TA 1104D-44TA 1104D-44TA

Fuel supply Natural Turbo Turbo Turbo Turbo
Aftercooler Aftercooler Aftercooler
Number of cylinders 4 4 4 4 4
Bore mm 105 105 105 105 105
Stroke mm 127 127 127 127 127
Displacement litres 4.400 4.400 4.400 4.400 4.400
Max. power rating HP/kW 74/54.4 83/61 92.5/68 101,9/74,9 110,2/81
Max. rated speed RPM 2200 2200 2200 2200 2200
Max. torque rating Nm 261 345 393 405 416
Max. torque speed RPM 1650 1400 1400 1400 1400
Idling speed RPM 750 750 750 750 750

Timing system
Type Overhead valves, controlled by rocker arms

Fuel system
Injection pump rotary
Filter replaceable cartridge
Firing order 1‑3‑4‑2 1‑3‑4‑2 1‑3‑4‑2 1‑3‑4‑2 1‑3‑4‑2
Cold starting device Thermostarter
Air filter two dry elements two dry elements
with turbolators

Engine lubrication Cooling

Pump driven forced lubrication.
Water cooling, forced circulation by centrifugal pump.
Oil filtration by:
– Gauze filter at pump intake. Vertical tube type radiator.
– Replaceable cartridge filter on engine delivery line.

Oil pressure with engine at rated power speed: 3.5/4.2 Thermostat control for water circulation. 7
bar.
Normal temperature: 77°/ 85° C.
Engine starting
Anti-freeze needed for very low temperatures (see “Main-
tenance” chapter).
Thermostarter device for starting at low temperatures.

205
Technical specifications

CAUTION: The technical specifications given here Rear axle

are only of a general kind. For technical specifica-
tions of each market, please refer to the information Rear axle with bevel gear pair and epicyclical rear final
material supplied by your Dealer. drives.

Transmission Front and rear axle ratio

Clutch with mechanical PTO GE 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120
Two single disc dry clutches in a single unit with sepa- with creeper.............................................................1.462
rate controls: without creeper........................................................1.459
One hand lever to control the disengagement of the GT 3680-3690-36100-36110-36120
PTO clutch, and one pedal lever to control the bearbox with creeper...........................................................1.4878
clutch. without creeper......................................................1.4846
F 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120
Mod. 3670-3685 3 cylinder TA - 3680 with creeper...........................................................1.5565
Mod. 3675 4 cylinder without creeper......................................................1.5531
11” (279.4 mm.) F 3675-3685 4 cylinder engine
with creeper...........................................................1.5565
Mod. 3690-36100-36110-36120 standard; Mod. without creeper......................................................1.5531
3680 optional
Mod. 3685 4 cylinder
12” (304.8 mm.) diameter Differential lock
Clutch for Speed-Five mechanical gearbox with Rear differential lock with electro-hydraulic control and
hydraulic PTO hydraulic engagement.
12” (309.8 mm) diameter single disc dry clutch.
Mechanical control. In all models, the diff lock is disengaged by means of
the brake pedals.
The Power Shuttle gearbox has two hydraulic
clutches with oil cooled discs. Front and rear differential locking takes place at the
same time by means of the Twin-Lock system in four-
wheel drive tractors.
Transmission

Gearbox
Speed-Five
Standard gearbox with helical gears and 5 synchronized
speeds with 4 speed ranges (Creeper - Low - Stand-
ard - High) offering 20 forward speeds and 20 reverse
speeds by means of the synchronized reverse shuttle.

Powershuttle
Gearbox with 5 speeds for 4 speed ranges (Low - Nor-
mal - High and Creeper on request) with electrohydraulic
Powershuttle reverse shuttle, for a total 20 forward + 20
reverse speeds
Powershuttle + Power Five.
Made up by Powershuttle gearbox and hydraulic HI-LO.
Gearbox with 5 speeds for 4 speed ranges (Low - Normal
- High and Creeper on request) with electrohydraulic Pow-
ershuttle reverse shuttle and electro-hydraulically engaged
Power Five, for a total 40 forward + 40 reverse speeds.

2WD version for 30 Kph max. speed

Gearbox with 4 synchro speeds for 4 ranges: 16 forward
+ 16 reverse speeds with electro-hydraulic synchro re-
verse shuttle.
With hydraulic HI-LO: 32 forward + 32 reverse speeds.

206
 Technical specifications

Power take off [4.2.d] Brakes

Two types are available.
Rear brakes
Power take off with mechanical engagement
PTO engaged and disengaged by means of a hand lever Multidisc oil-cooled brakes mounted on rear differential
on the front instrument panel. half shafts.
Engagement through a dry disc clutch.
Number of friction plates:
Mod.3675-3685 4 cylinder F.................. 6 (3 per side);
Electro-hydraulic power take off
PTO engaged through a hydraulic clutch with electro- Mod.3670-3685 3 cylinder TA - 3680-3690-36100-36110-
hydraulic control by means of a button in the cab. 36120 GE/F.................................................. 6 (3 per side);
Engagement is modulated by a hydraulic accumulator. Mod.3680-3690-36100-36110-36120 GT ... 8 (4 per side);
The PTO driveline is stopped through an electro-hydrau- Friction material .................................... resin-graphite
lically controlled brake by means of the same switch
used to control the PTO itself. Hydraulic control by means of the two pedals on the
driver’s right: the two pedals can be coupled together
Speeds by a locking device to provide simultaneous braking
Two speeds: action on both sides.
1st type: 540/540ECO RPM
2nd type: 540/1000 RPM Parking brake controlled by an independent hand lever
and linkage acting directly on the main brakes.
PTO type PTO RPM Engine RPM
Hydraulic trailer brake mounted on request.
540 540 1944
540ECO 540 1377 Compressed air trailer brake mounted on request.
1000 1000 1917

Front brakes for 4WD tractors

Different PTO output shafts are available, in compliance Multidisc oil-cooled brakes mounted on front differen-
with A.S.A.E. standards. tial half shafts.

- 1 3/8” (34.9 mm) diameter shaft with 6 splines (standard Number of friction discs:
assembly).
All models...................................................4 (2 per side).
- 1 3/8” (34.9 mm) diameter shaft with 21 splines (standard Friction material..........................................resin-graphite.
assembly).
IBS-Integral Braking System hydraulic control ensuring
PTO proportional to ground speed simultaneous braking along with the rear brakes when
the brake pedals are coupled together by means of the
Engagement and selection of the PTO operating mode relative locking device.
by means of a lever on the left-hand side of the gear-
box. 2 WD front axle
Rotation speed in synchronized mode (PTO driveline Boxed front axle turning around the central pivot.
turns per rear wheel turn):
Track adjusted by telescopic sliding at the axle ends.
PTO output shaft revolutions
Models Max. turning angle ......................................................58°
540 RPM 540E RPM 1000 RPM
7
3670-3680-3685 GE 6.957 9.712 13.068
3690-36100-
36110-36120 GE 6.957 9.822 13.068
3680 F/GT; 3670-3685F 8.274 11.549 15.540
3690-36100-
36110-36120 F/GT 8.274 11.680 15.540
3675F - 3685F Tier 2 8.274 11.549 15.540

207
Technical specifications

4WD front axle Steering components

Front axle in spheroidal cast iron pivoting around two
central supports. Power steering

Max. steering angle.............................................over 55° Power steering system controlled by the steering wheel
with independent hydraulic system. Double-acting
Mechanically engaged differential lock engaged with steering cylinder, mounted on the axle casing.
electro-hydraulic “HYDRALOCK” control.
Oil supplied by a gear pump. driven by the input shaft,
Electro-hydraulic front drive engagement by means of with paper filter on the delivery side.
hydraulic clutch of the Spring-On/Pressure-Off type.
Max. pump delivery with engine at
Propeller shaft without universal couplings installed top RPM rating:.........................................29.9 litres/min
along the longitudinal axis of the tractor.
Track adjustment
Transmission through central differential and epicyclic
final drives in the wheel hubs. Track is adjustable on 2WD and 4WD front axles and on
rear axles. See the Tables in the “Operation” chapter.
On request: electro-hydraulically controlled HY-
DRALOCK differential lock.

Front differential lock

On request: electro-hydraulically controlled HY-

DRALOCK differential lock.

The front diff lock is engaged at the same time as the

rear diff lock.
Disengagement by means of both brake pedals.

208
 Technical specifications

Hydraulic circuit Electronic hitch - Landtronic

Standard double pump (optional)
Draft control, position control, “Intermix” combined
Two stage hydraulic gear pump powered directly by the draft and position control, and float mode.
gears of the timing system with filter on the intake. Monitoring system............................................Electronic
Type of control.......................................Electro-hydraulic
The two pump stages supply: Electronic plant, sensors
and electro-distributor...........................................BOSCH
1st Stage: delivery 29.9 l/min at a 2200 RPM engine Draft control by means of sensors mounted on the
rate. lower link of the three-point linkage.
20 micron paper filter on the delivery. Operating voltage rating........................................12 Volt
Supplies: - The power steering circuit, max. operating
pressure 150 +/- 5 bar.
- The 17-18 bar low pressure circuit includ- Mechanically controlled power lift
ing Powershuttle, Power-Five, the four-wheel Draft control, position control, “Intermix” combined
drive, the hydraulic Power Take-Off, the draft and position control, and float mode.
hydraulic brake of the Power Take-Off, and Automatic lifting/lowering device (on request, available
the differential lock. according to the market).
- The oil cooling circuit, max. pressure 5 bar.
- The lubricating circuit of the gearbox, Pow- Three-point linkage [4.2.g]
ershuttle and Power-Five, max. pressure 1.5 Class 2 three-point linkage. Class 1 on request.
bar.
Adjuster crank on RH vertical link rod. Optional hydrau-
2nd Stage: delivery 52.3 l/min at a 2200 RPM engine lic adjuster jack, operated by auxiliary control valve.
rate.
Supplies: - The hydraulic trailer brake, max. operating LH link rod with two positions at the top end: one fixed
pressure 130 +/- 10 bar (on request). and the other sliding.
- The auxiliary control valves (max. 4), max.
operating pressure 180 +/- 5 bar. Adjustable side stabilizers.
- The hydraulic power lift, max. operating
pressure 180 +/- 5 bar. Lower links with quick hitch mechanisms on request.

Triple pump Straight lower links, for Wide version as optional.

On request a triple pump can be installed, to be
coupled to the front control valves, which are fed by a Top link with quick hitch mechanism, optional hydraulic
separate circuit. adjuster jack.
The three pumps feed three separate and independent
circuits: Three point linkage powered by one single-acting hy-
1 - Steering circuit and hydraulic services of transmis- draulic cylinder.
sion: 29.9 l/1’ at 2200 RPM engine rate, max. steer-
ing pressure 160 bar. Max. lifting capacity at the ends of lower rods in horizontal
2 - Front valves circuit: 39.6 l/1’ at 2200 RPM engine position:..............................................................1900 Kg
rate, max. pressure 180 bar. with 1 auxiliary cylinder, for F versions and Wide version
3 - Circuit of hitch and rear valves: 29.9 l/1’ at 2200 RPM as optional:.........................................................2500 Kg
engine rate, max. pressure 180 bar.
Auxiliary control valves
Open center auxiliary control valves with rapid “Push-
Pull” attachments.

The auxiliary control valves use the same pump as the

power lift, thus the max. operating pressure is 180 bar.

NOTE: Ask your Dealer for complete configurations of

7
auxiliary control valves.

209
Technical specifications

Electrical system Fuses

Voltage: 12 V negative earth. Consult the description in the “Electrical system” chap-
ter for the fuses that protect the electrical system.
Battery
“Maintenance Free” type. Complies with SAE J537
regulations.

Specifications:
Voltage.......................................................................12 V
Charge .................................................................. 100 Ah
Charge reserve.....................................................170 min

Alternator
Type................................................................... 85 Amp/h

Automatic voltage regulator incorporated in alternator.

Remote charge indicator with light.

Starter motor
Continuous power 2.9 kW (4 HP).
Automatic pinion engagement by means of electro-
magnet.

210
 Technical specifications

Cab - Safety frame

Cab, platform and safety frame tested to OECD interna-
tional standards.
Noise level complies with EEC standards.
Platform completely supported on Silent Block damp-
ers and cab in pressed structural steel with isothermal
blue-tinted glass panes.
Heating, ventilating and air-conditioning systems.
Openable roof with wide visibility in an upward direc-
tion.

Seat
Standard padded seat with adjustable suspension.
The seat is also adjustable for height and distance from
controls.

Bonnet
Upper bonnet in sturdy plastic, in a single back-tilting
piece, to easily reach main engine organs, battery and
engine air filter.

211
Technical specifications

Noise levels as perceived by the operator [4.3]

THE FOLLOWING TABLES GIVE THE NOISE LEVEL VALUES, MEASURED FROM THE DRIVER’S SEAT
IN INSTANTANEOUS CONDITIONS IN COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS 2009/76/EC (DBA) - ANNEX
II (WITHOUT LOAD) - AND WHEN DRIVING IN COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD 2009/63/CE (DBA).

Tractors with safety frame

Noise level at Noise level at
Model
driver’s seat driving by
2WD/4WD
2009/76/EC - 2009/63/CE
dBA dBA

Mod.3670GE-F 3 cylinders TA 84 85

Mod.3685GE-F 3 cylinders TA 83 83

Mod.3680 GE-F-GT 86 85

Mod.3690 GE-F-GT 85 82

Mod.36100 GE-F-GT 86 86

Mod.36110 GE-F-GT 86 86

Mod.36120 GE-F-GT 85 84

TRACTORS WITH CAB

Noise level at driver’s seat Noise level at
Model 2009/76/EC - dBA driving by
Rear door and 2009/63/CE
Closed doors
side doors open dBA

Mod.3670F 3 cylinders TA 80 82 85

Mod 3685F 3 cylinders TA 81 81 83

Mod 3680F-GT 80 81 85

Mod 3690F-GT 80 81 82

Mod 36100F-GT 80 81 86

Mod 36110F-GT 80 81 86

Mod.36120 GE-F-GT 81 83 84

212
 Technical specifications

INFORMATION PAGE ON VIBRATION LEVELS OF THE TRACTOR EXPOSITION

TO VIBRATIONS [4.4]
WARNING: The vibration level transmitted IMPORTANT: More information on Whole Body Vibration
to the body as a whole depends on different (WBV) on agricultural tractors can be found in more specific
parameters, some of them relating to the publications. In order to correctly estimate values based on
machine, others to the terrain, others to the your daily work on the tractor, a specific measure instru-
type of work and to any connected machine ment is required, such a three-axis accelerometer applied
and many specific for the operator. The to the seat.
prevailing parameters are the type of terrain
or work surface, the ground speed and the NOTE: Visit the dedicated Internet web sites for further
type of work. information and documentation on risks of whole body
vibration.
WARNING:
Machine vibrations are transmitted to the
operator, who in some cases may undergo
risks for his/her health and safety. There-
fore you must:
- Make sure that the tractor is in good condi-
tion and that all routine servicing is cor-
rectly and regularly carried out.
- Check that the operator’s seat and adjust-
ment systems are in good condition, then
adjust the seat to the operator’s weight and
size.
- Evaluate the vibration level transmitted
to the operator from the tractor or from
the tractor-machine assembly and schedule
work hours so as to alternate suitable rest
periods concerning exposure to vibrations.

In accordance to EU Directive 78/764/EC the following table shows vibration levels measured on seats, in aws.

Seat type Vibrations * m/s2 at the (applied test weights)

Light-weight operator Heavy-weight operator

SC84-M91 aws* = 1.13 m/s2 aws* = 0.75 m/s2

(Mechanical)

SC84-M91A aws* = 1.05m/s2 aws* = 0.91 m/s2

(Air suspension)

MSG93/511 aws* = 1.21m/s2 aws* = 1.05 m/s2

(Air suspension)

* aws = correct weighted value of the vibration acceleration (m/s2)

213
Technical specifications

‘CE’ DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY

“ Every tractor is accompanied by a CE Declaration of Conformity to Directive 2006/42/EC that you should receive in
original together with the tractor.
This Declaration indicates with which European Directive the machine complies”.

The following picture is a fac-simile copy of such CE Declaration of Conformity.

Argo Tractors S.p.A.

42042 Fabbrico [RE] Italia
via G. Matteotti, 7 E
t. +39.0522.656111
IL
f. +39.0522.656476
IM

[email protected]
www.argotractors.com
S
C
FA

214
 Technical specifications

Issue of authorization
To install any type of mounted or semi-mounted equipment not provided for by road traffic laws, it is mandatory to
request the express written authorization of the vehicle manufacturer.
We insist at any rate on our recommendation to mount always exclusively CE marked equipment complying with the
Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC.

Weights [4.2.h]

Maximum weight declared by the manufacturer for road circulation

IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceed the maximum load capacity of the tyres on your tractor. See Loads and Inflation Pressures
recommended by tyre manufacturers.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT exceed the local legal limitations of the axle loads and the total weight on the road.

Maximum permitted tractor operating weight

The MAXIMUM PERMITTED TRACTOR OPERATING WEIGHT includes the tractor, tractor equipment and ballast.

The MAXIMUM PERMITTED AXLE OPERATING WEIGHT includes the tractor, tractor equipment, ballast and three-point
hitch mounted equipment.

Model Front kg Rear kg Total kg

4WD 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 GE 2050 3300 5050

2WD 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F 1200 3300 4300
4WD 3670-3680-3685-3690-36100-36110-36120 F-GT 2150 3300 5250

IT IS RECOMMENDED to use the tractor always with a load on front axle over 25% or not under 55% of the total weight.

215
Technical specifications

Page left intentionally blank.

216
 Technical specifications

TOWING ATTACHMENTS

Front tow hook

The tractor is equipped with a front tow hook for emer-

gency operations for towing the tractor.

Height adjustable rear trailer hitches, with safety

guards:
- C tow hook.
- D2 tow hook (hydraulic trailer brakes).
- CUNA drawbar, Class A.
- EEC swivel hook, manual, not automatic. Front pull hook.

Rear sliding STD trailer hitches:

- CUNA C tow hook.
- D2 CUNA tow hook (hydraulic trailer brakes). WARNING: DO NOT raise the tractor using the tow-
- CUNA C hook with CUNA Class A drawbar. ing hook.
- CUNA D2 hook with CUNA Class A drawbar.
CAUTION: Use exclusively the provided hooks to
Rear sliding STD trailer hitches, EEC markets: tow the machine.
- EEC hook, not automatic
- EEC hook, automatic.
- EEC hook, not automatic with EEC drawbar.
- EEC hook, automatic with EEC drawbar.

NOTE: Rear “Slider” hooks for 60-70-80 HP tractors can-

not be mounted if a electronic hitch is installed.

CAUTION: Refer to licensing documents issued by

the Ministry of Transport to know data relating to
max. vertical and horizontal loads on tow hooks and
max. trailer weights.

217
Technical specifications

Class C tow hook

A Class C tow hook can be used for agricultural

implements and one or two-axle trailers.

The height of the tow hook can be adjusted to make

hitching the implement easier. The device can also be
positioned either over or under the PTO shaft, for a total
of 4 positione.

To adjust the height, remove the pins (1) to release the

hook and move it to a more suitable position.

This operation requires great attention. A well adjusted

hook means easier handling of the tractor and, above
all, safety and stability of the tractor.

If the towing attachment is placed in the highest

position, towing is easier, but the tractor might pitch up Adjustment of Class C tow hook.
at the front.

When using 4-wheel drive, place the tow hook in the

lowest position, with the drawbar almost horizontal. In this
way no excessive weight is unloaded from the front axle.

Class C tow hook with quick height adjustment

On request, the tractor can be provided with a Class

C tow hook with quick height adjustment. It is thus
possible to have six different heights above the ground.
A lever (A) releases the tow hook. This can now slide up
or down as required.

Rear tow hook with quick height adjustment.

218
 Technical specifications

Class A tow hook

The tractor may be equipped with an A-type tow hook that

consists of a drawbar, for use with agricultural implements
and one or two-axle trailers. Never use this type of attach-
ment to tow single axle trailers, because they can apply
too much weight to the drawbar. The drawbar might be
damaged because it is not built to sustain vertical loads.

The drawbar (1) can be adjusted in height for a proper

coupling both to trailed implements and to PTO driven
implements.

There are two possible adjustments:

– the bar can be rotated 180° so that the clevis is Class A rear tow hook.
oriented upward or downward; 1 - Drawbar
2 - Side swing limiting pins
– the turning point of the sector on the tractor’s 3 - Puns to adjust height above the ground.
support cen be varied.

Moreover, the sector of the towing jig allows for an

ample horizontal adjustment at the bar, as required by
implements that need free swinging.

The swinging action can be limited or reduced by

means of the pins (2).

Warning: When implements connected to the

PTO are used, the drawbar must be regulated
in height so that it is between 150 and 300
mm (from 5.91 to 11.82 in.) below the axis of
the PTO shaft.

219
Technical specifications

WARNING!
There are other types of tow hooks in addition to the ones listed below, always consult the documents
attached to the registration certificate of your tractor in order to know the towing capacity and maximum
vertical loads.

Max. towable weights [4.2.l]

GRASSI/V. ORLANDINI

GRASSI/V. ORLANDINI
Coupling CBM/ARIES
EEC Drawbar
EEC Coupling

Coupling

Drawbar
Hitch type
CARICO VERTICALE MASSIMO IN RELAZIONE AI PNEUMATICI ED AL TIPO DI
CARICO VERTICALE MASSIMO IN RELAZIONE
GANCIO/BARRA AI PNEUMATICI ED AL TIPO DI
DI TRAINO
GANCIO/BARRA DI TRAINO
ATTENZIONE!!
Models 2WD 4WD
ATTENZIONE!!
Sono previsti altri tipi di ganci di traino oltre quelli elencati di seguito, consultate sempre i
Trailers with no brakes 3000 3000
Sono previsti
documenti altri alla
allegati tipi carta
di ganci di traino oltre
di circolazione dellaquelli elencati
vostra di per
trattrice seguito, consultate
conoscere sempre lai
esattamente
Trailers with
documentidi allegati mechanical brakes 5000 5000
capacita’ traino edalla carta verticali
i carichi di circolazione
massimi della vostra trattrice per conoscere esattamente la
ammessi.
capacita’Inertia-braked
di traino ed trailer 6000
i carichi verticali massimi ammessi. 6000
Hydraulic/pneumatic braking system trailer === 10000 22000 13000
80F (2WD)
80F (2WD)
2WD tractors - models: 3680F [4.2.j]
Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)
Maximum CBMMaximum
/ ARIES vertical loadGRASSI
at the coupling point (kg)
/ V.ORLANDI
Load
Tyres Maximum
weight CBM / ARIES EG39/ GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
EG 37
Load Max height (mm) AH31H
Tyres weight
capacity technically EG39/
MH31-S EG 37
(drawbar)
technically Max height (mm) MH31-S
capacity permissible AH31H
Max height (mm) (drawbar)
Overhang (mm)
permissible 490 540 670 Max
520 height
360(mm)
520 840Overhang
890 (mm)
990
490 540 670
13.6-R-24 (121A8) 2900 2900 520 360 520 840 890 990
13.6-R-24 (121A8)
12.4-R-28 (121A8) 2900 2900
12.4-R-28 (121A8)
13.6-R-28(123A8) 2900
3100 2900
3100
13.6-R-28(123A8)
14.9-R-24 (126A8) 3100
3400 3100
3300
915 850 600 850 900 650 800 750 600
14.9-R-24
14.9-R-28 (126A8)
(128A8) 3400
3600 3300 915 850 600 850 900 650 800 750 600
14.9-R-28 (128A8)
360/70-R-28 (125A8) 3600
3300 3300
360/70-R-28
380/70-R-24 (125A8) 3300 3300
380/70-R-24 (127A8)
380/70-R-28 (125A8) 3300
3500 3300
380/70-R-28 (127A8) 3500 3300

90F, 100F, 110F, 120F (2WD)

2WD100F,
90F, tractors
110F,- 120F
models: 3690F, 36100F, 36110F, 36120F
(2WD) [4.2.j]

Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)

Maximum
CBM vertical load atGRASSI
/ ARIES the coupling point (kg)
/ V.ORLANDI
Maximum
Load CBM / ARIES EG39/GRASSI / V.ORLANDI EG 37
Tyres Maximum
weight Max height (mm) AH31H
Load EG39/
MH31-S EG 37
(drawbar)
Tyres weight
capacity technically Max height (mm) AH31H
capacity permissible
technically MH31-S (drawbar)
Overhang
Max height (mm)
permissible 514 550 600 980 730 Overhang
(mm)
Max height (mm)
514 550 600 980 730 520 360 520 840 (mm) 890 990
13.6-R-24 (121A8) 2900 2900 520 360 520 840 890 990
13.6-R-24 (121A8)
12.4-R-28 (121A8) 2900 2900
12.4-R-28 (121A8)
13.6-R-28(123A8) 2900
3100 2900
3100
13.6-R-28(123A8)
14.9-R-24 (126A8) 3100
3400 3100
3300
14.9-R-24 (128A8)
(126A8) 3400 930 850 750 600 500 850 900 650 800 750 600
14.9-R-28 3600 3300
930 850 750 600 500 850 900 650 800 750 600
14.9-R-28 (128A8)
360/70-R-28 (125A8) 3600
3300 3300
360/70-R-28
380/70-R-24 (125A8) 3300 3300
380/70-R-24 (127A8)
380/70-R-28 (125A8) 3300
3500 3300
380/70-R-28 (127A8) 3500 3300
219/1
 Technical specifications

70F, 85F (2WD)

2WD tractors - models: 3670F, 3685F [4.2.j]

Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)

Maximum CBM / ARIES GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
Load
Tyres weight Max height EG39/ EG 37
70F, 85F (2WD) capacity technically AH31H
(mm) MH31-S (drawbar)
permissible Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)
670
Maximum vertical load
520 360 at the
400coupling
520 point
840 (kg)
890 990
13.6-R-24 (121A8) 2900 Maximum
Load 2900 CBM / ARIES GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
800 730 700
Tyres
12.4-R-28 (121A8) 2900 weight
2900 Max height EG39/ 1060 EG 37
capacity technically AH31H
13.6-R-28(123A8) 3100 3100 (mm) MH31-S (drawbar)
permissible Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)
14.9-R-24 (126A8) 3400 3300 670
550 830
520 360 400 520 800 840 890 990 600
14.9-R-28 (128A8) 3600 3300
1060 830 750
13.6-R-24 (121A8)
360/70-R-28 (125A8) 2900
3300 2900
3300 1200 800 730 700
12.4-R-28 (121A8)
380/70-R-24 (125A8) 2900
3300 2900
3300 1060
13.6-R-28(123A8)
380/70-R-28 (127A8) 3100
3500 3100
3300
14.9-R-24 (126A8) 3400 3300
550 830 800 600
14.9-R-28 (128A8) 3600 3300
1060 830 750
360/70-R-28 (125A8) 3300 3300 1200
80F (4WD)(125A8) 3300
380/70-R-24 3300
380/70-R-28 (127A8) 3500 3300
Load capacityLoad capacity

Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)

Maximum CBM / ARIES GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
Tyres weight EG39/ EG 37
80F
4WD (4WD)
tractors - models: 3680F
technically Max [4.2.j]
height (mm) AH31H
MH31-S (drawbar)
permissible Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)
615 640 690 770 820
Maximum620 670 720
vertical 770 at
load 520the620 670 720 point
coupling 770 840
(kg) 890 990
12.4-R-28 (121A8) 2900 Maximum
2900 CBM / ARIES GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
13.6-R-24
Tyres(121A8) 2900 weight
2900
EG39/ EG 37
440/65-R-24(122A8) 3000 technically
3000 Max height (mm) AH31H
MH31-S (drawbar)
13.6-R-28 (123A8) 3100 permissible
3100 Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)
615 640 690 770 820
14.9-R-24 (126A8) 3400 3300 620 670 720 770 520 620 670 720 770 840 890 990
12.4-R-28 (121A8)
14.9-R-28 (128A8) 2900
3600 2900
3300
13.6-R-24
16.9-R-24 (121A8)
(134A8) 2900
4240 2900
3300
900 850 750 600 500 945 850 750 660 940 900 830 730 650 830 800 600
440/65-R-24(122A8)
360/70-R-28 (125A8) 3000
3300 3000
3300
13.6-R-28 (123A8)
380/70-R-24 (125A8) 3100
3300 3100
3300
14.9-R-24 (126A8)
380/70-R-28 (127A8) 3400
3500 3300
3300
14.9-R-28 (128A8)
420/65-R-24 (126A8) 3600
3400 3300
3300
16.9-R-24 (134A8)
420/70-R-24 (130A8) 4240
3800 3300
3300
900 850 750 600 500 945 850 750 660 940 900 830 730 650 830 800 600
360/70-R-28
420/70-R-28 (125A8)
(133A8) 3300
4120 3300
3300
380/70-R-24
440/80-R-24 (125A8)
(161A8) 3300
9250 3300
3300
380/70-R-28 (127A8) 3500 3300
420/65-R-24 (126A8) 3400 3300
420/70-R-24 (130A8)
420/70-R-28 (133A8)
3800
4120
3300
3300
7
440/80-R-24 (161A8) 9250 3300

219/2
Technical specifications

90F, 100F, 110F, 120F (4WD)

4WD tractors - models: 3690F, 36100F, 36110F, 36120F [4.2.j]

90F, 100F, 110F, 120F (4WD)

Load capacity
Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)
Maximum CBM / ARIES GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
Axles

Tyres weight

Load capacity
EG39/
Maximum vertical load atAH31H EG(kg)
the coupling point 37
technically Max height (mm) MH31-S (drawbar)
Maximum CBM / ARIES GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
permissible
Axles

weight Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)

Tyres 615 640 690 770 820 EG39/
615 640 690 770 820 520 620 670 720 770 840 890 990 EG 37
technically Max height (mm) MH31-S
AH31H
(drawbar)
12.4-R-28 (121A8) 2900 2900
permissible Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)
13.6-R-24 (121A8) 2900 2900 615 640 690 770 820
615 640 690 770 820 520 620 670 720 770 840 890 990
440/65-R-24(122A8) 3000 3000
12.4-R-28 (121A8)
13.6-R-28 (123A8) 3100 29003100 2900
13.6-R-24
14.9-R-24 (121A8)
(126A8) 3400 29003300 2900
440/65-R-24(122A8)
14.9-R-28 (128A8) 3600 30003300 3000
13.6-R-28 (123A8)
16.9-R-24 (134A8) 4240 31003300 3100
2 900 850 750 600 500 945 900 800 660 580 940 900 830 730 650 830 800 600
360/70-R-28 (125A8) 3300 34003300 3300
14.9-R-24 (126A8)
14.9-R-28
380/70-R-24 (128A8)
(125A8) 3300 36003300 3300
16.9-R-24
380/70-R-28 (134A8)
(127A8) 3500 42403300 3300
2 900 850 750 600 500 945 900 800 660 580 940 900 830 730 650 830 800 600
360/70-R-28
420/65-R-24 (125A8)
(126A8) 3400 33003300 3300
380/70-R-24
420/70-R-24 3800 33003300 3300
(125A8)
(130A8)
420/70-R-28 (133A8)
380/70-R-28 4120 35003300 3300
(127A8)
440/80-R-24 (161A8)
420/65-R-24 9250 34003300 3300
(126A8)
420/70-R-24 (130A8) 3800 3300
420/70-R-28 (133A8) 4120 3300
440/80-R-24
70F, 85F (4WD) (161A8) 9250 3300

Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)

70F, 85F (4WD) Load Maximum CBM / ARIES GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
4WD tractors - models:
weight3670F, 3685F [4.2.j]
Tyres Max height EG39/ EG 37
capacity technically AH31H
(mm)Maximum
MH31-S (drawbar)
vertical load at the coupling point (kg)
permissible Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)
Maximum 620 CBM / ARIES
Load 620 520 GRASSI
560 840 / V.ORLANDI
890 990
Tyres weight Max height EG39/ EG 37
12.4-R-28 (121A8) 2900 2900 AH31H
capacity technically (mm) 890
MH31-S (drawbar)
13.6-R-24 (121A8) 2900 2900
permissible Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)
440/65-R-24(122A8) 3000 3000 620
13.6-R-28 (123A8) 3100 3100 620 520 560 840 890 990
12.4-R-28 (121A8)
14.9-R-24 (126A8) 34002900 3300 2900
890
13.6-R-24
14.9-R-28 (121A8)36002900 3300 2900
(128A8)
440/65-R-24(122A8)
16.9-R-24 (134A8) 42403000 3300 3000
800 800 890 830 750 600
13.6-R-28
360/70-R-28 (123A8)33003100 3300 3100
(125A8)
14.9-R-24
380/70-R-24 (126A8)33003400 3300 3300
(125A8) 970
380/70-R-28
14.9-R-28(127A8)
(128A8)35003600 3300 3300
420/65-R-24
16.9-R-24(126A8)
(134A8)34004240 3300 3300
420/70-R-24 (130A8) 38003300 3300 3300 800 800 890 830 750 600
360/70-R-28 (125A8)
420/70-R-28
380/70-R-24(133A8) 41203300 3300 3300
(125A8) 970
440/80-R-24
380/70-R-28(161A8) 92503500 3300 3300
(127A8)
420/65-R-24 (126A8) 3400 3300
420/70-R-24 (130A8) 3800 3300
420/70-R-28 (133A8) 4120 3300
440/80-R-24 (161A8) 9250 3300

219/3
 Technical specifications

80GT (4WD)
4WD tractors - models: 3680GT [4.2.j]

Load capacity
Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)
80GT (4WD) Maximum CBM / ARIES GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
Tyres weight Max height EG 37
technically EG41 EG40/AH31S
Load capacity
(mm)Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)
(drawbar)
permissible
Maximum CBM Max GRASSI
height (mm)/ V.ORLANDIOverhang (mm)
615 /750
ARIES
800
weight 580 680 730 780 520 670 720 770 840 890 990
Tyres Max height EG 37
2900
13.6-R-24 (121A8) 2900 technically EG41 EG40/AH31S
(mm) (drawbar)
3000
440/65-R-24 (122A8) 3000 permissible Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)
13.6-R-28 (123A8) 3100 3100 615 750 800
580 680 730 780 520 670 720 770 840 890 990
14.9-R-24 (121A8)
13.6-R-24 (126A8) 3400
2900 3300
2900
14.9-R-28 (128A8)
440/65-R-24 (122A8) 3600
3000 3300
3000
16.9-R-24 (123A8)
13.6-R-28 (134A8) 4240
3100 3300
3100
360/70-R-28 (125A8)
14.9-R-24 (126A8) 3300
3400 3300
3300 900 600 500 930 830 730 650 920 830 730 650 790 770 600
380/70-R-24 (125A8)
14.9-R-28 (128A8) 3300
3600 3300
3300
380/70-R-28 (127A8)
16.9-R-24 (134A8) 3500
4240 3300
3300
420/65-R-24 (125A8)
360/70-R-28 (126A8) 3400
3300 3300
3300 900 600 500 930 830 730 650 920 830 730 650 790 770 600
420/70-R-24 (125A8)
380/70-R-24 (130A8) 3800
3300 3300
3300
420/70-R-28 (127A8)
380/70-R-28 (133A8) 4120
3500 3300
3300
440/80-R-24 (126A8)
420/65-R-24 (161A8) 9250
3400 3300
3300
420/70-R-24 (130A8) 3800 3300
420/70-R-28 (133A8) 4120 3300
440/80-R-24 (161A8) 9250
90GT, 100GT, 110GT, 120GT 3300 (4WD)
Load capacity

Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)

90GT,
4WD100GT, 110GT,
tractors 120GT
- models: (4WD)
Maximum
3690GT, 36100GT, 36110GT,
CBM / ARIES 36120GT
GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
[4.2.j]
Tyres weight Max height EG 37
technically EG41 EG40/AH31S
Load capacity

(mm)Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)

(drawbar)
permissible
Maximum CBM Max GRASSI
height (mm)/ V.ORLANDIOverhang (mm)
660 /710
ARIES
800
weight 620 670 720 770 620 670 720 770 840 890 990
Tyres Max height EG 37
13.6-R-24 (121A8) 2900 technically
2900 EG41 EG40/AH31S
(mm) (drawbar)
440/65-R-24 (122A8) 3000 permissible
3000 Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)
660 710 800
13.6-R-28 (123A8) 3100 3100 620 670 720 770 620 670 720 770 840 890 990
14.9-R-24 (121A8)
13.6-R-24 (126A8) 3400
2900 3300
2900
14.9-R-28 (128A8)
440/65-R-24 (122A8) 3600
3000 3300
3000
16.9-R-24 (123A8)
13.6-R-28 (134A8) 4240
3100 3300
3100
360/70-R-28 (125A8)
14.9-R-24 (126A8) 3300
3400 3300
3300 900 750 600 930 850 750 670 920 830 730 650 780 750 600
380/70-R-24 (125A8)
14.9-R-28 (128A8) 3300
3600 3300
3300
380/70-R-28 (127A8)
16.9-R-24 (134A8) 3500
4240 3300
3300
420/65-R-24 (125A8)
360/70-R-28 (126A8) 3400
3300 3300
3300 900 750 600 930 850 750 670 920 830 730 650 780 750 600
420/70-R-24 (125A8)
380/70-R-24 (130A8) 3800
3300 3300
3300
420/70-R-28 (127A8)
380/70-R-28 (133A8) 4120
3500 3300
3300
440/80-R-24 (126A8)
420/65-R-24 (161A8) 9250
3400 3300
3300
420/70-R-24 (130A8) 3800 3300
420/70-R-28 (133A8) 4120 3300
440/80-R-24 (161A8) 9250 3300
7

219/4
Technical specifications

4WD
70GE, tractors
80GE, 85GE,- 90GE,
models: 3670GE,
100GE, 3680GE,
110GE, 3685GE, 3690GE,
120GE (4WD)
36100GE, 36110GE, 36120GE [4.2.j]
Maximum vertical load at the coupling point (kg)
Maximum CBM / ARIES GRASSI / V.ORLANDI
Load
Tyres weight EG39/ EG 37
capacity technically Max height (mm) MH31-S AH31H (drawbar)
permissible Max height (mm) Overhang (mm)
650 750
605 605 840 890 990
14.9-LR-20 (119A8) 2720 2720
360/70-R-24 (122A8) 3000 3000
380/75-R-20 (148A8) 6300 3300 820 750 820 810 780 750 600
400/70-R-20 (149A8) 6500 3300
420/65-R-20 (125A8) 3300 3300

219/5
 BOTTOM VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW

n° 4 HOLES M16 DEPTH = 25mm

n° 6 HOLES M18x1.5
EQUIDISTANT

FRONT VIEW
Dimensions quoted in mm

MOTOR-GEARBOX AXIS

n° 6 HOLES M14

EQUIDISTANT

N° 12 HOLES M14
Attachment points for implements Valpadana 3600 [4.5.1.2]

ENGINE AXIS
n° 12 HOLES M16

N° 5+5 HOLES M16

DEPTH = 25 mm

N° 2 HOLES M16

n° 8 HOLES M20 through

n° 4 HOLES M16 DEPTH = 40 mm

N° 6 HOLES M16 WHEELBASE

219/6
WHEELBASE
Technical specifications

7
 Technical specifications

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

Q.ty litres
3670 3675F- 36100
COMPONENT 3685 3685F 36110 SPECIFICA- AMBIENT TEM- AGROLUBE SPECIFICATIONS
TIONS PERATURE
3 T2 - 4 36120
Cylin- Cylin-
ders ders
3680-
3690

AGROLUBE MUREX Concentrated antifreeze fluid to be Degrees °C -8° -15° -25° -35°
COOLING CIRCUIT 10.5 15.5 20 used in the following percentages:
Specifications: GM 1899M (1970); FORD ESE-M97B % 20 30 40 50
GE 39.5 Viscosity at Viscosity at
FUEL TANK* 40°C, cSt 100°C, cSt
F 39.5
GT 55

ENGINE ASSEMBLY AND OIL ACEA E7/E5/ ANY SOLEA 115

8.5 9.5 10 E3/B3 15,2
FILTER TEMPERATURE LD 15W40
API CH-4/SL
API GL - 4 U.T.T.O
GEARBOX WITH MECHANI- FORD M2C-86C
CAL REVERSE SHUTTLE, 43 F-GE ANY
ALLISON C-4 VELA/B 86 10.7
HITCH AND STEERING 44GT LANDINI I-ENG-
TEMPERATURE
CIRCUITS (1) D-302

GEARBOX WITH POWER- API GL - 4 U.T.T.O

46 F-GE FORD M2C-86C
SHUTTLE ANY VELA/C 65 9.8
HITCH AND STEERING CIR- ALLISON C-4 TEMPERATURE
48GT
CUITS (1)(2) LANDINI I-ENG-
D-302

DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING API GL - 5

FRONT AXLE WITH BRAKE 3.5 ZF TE-ML ANY 174
TEMPERATURE CARINA LS 90 16.8
DISCS (1) 05C,12C,16E

DIFF HOUSING FRONT AXLE API GL - 5

WITHOUT BRAKE DISCS 3.5 MF1134M ANY 174
(Only standard mechanical CARINA 80W-90 16.8
FORDM2C 108C TEMPERATURE
tractors) MIL-L-2105 D

3.6 API GL - 5
REAR FINAL DRIVES* MF1134M ANY 174
CARINA 80W-90 16.8
FRONT FINAL DRIVES* 1.5 FORDM2C 108C TEMPERATURE
MIL-L-2105 D

BRAKE CONTROL HYDRAULIC 1.0 LANDINI

ANY AZA
S/ENG/I 102 22.5 5.6
CIRCUIT TEMPERATURE RED (3)

— — ANY GENA GREASE — —

GREASE POINTS TEMPERATURE EP

*Optional auxiliary fuel tank (24,7 litres).

(1) Only use lubricants complying with LANDINI I-ENG-D-302, NEW HOLLAND M2 C 86C, JOHN DEERE J 20C/D, M-F 1135 specifications. LANDINI
specification provides additives and anti-noise, antisquawk, and antistick-slip properties. Use of different types of oil, or mixing other types of
oil into the oil supplied with the tractor when new can lead to increased noise.
(2) Powershuttle transmission uses VELA / C OIL ACCORDING TO LANDINI SPECIFICATIONS. Alternative products must have the same quality,
conforming to international specifications as indicated and in accordance with the specifications of the tractor manufacturer.
(3) AGROLUBE AZA RED mineral based oil for braking circuits, according to LANDINI S/ENG/I 102 specifications.

220
 Alphabetical index

A G
Air conditioning......................................................58, 178 General information.........................................................7
Auxiliary control valves.................................................125 General Maintenance...................................................173
Ground speed tables, Power Shuttle and Power Five...72
B Ground speed tables, Speed Five..................................67

Ballast . ........................................................................107 H
Battery..........................................................................185
Bleeding the air from the fuel circuit...........................163 Headlights..............................................................52, 187
Bleeding, brake circuit.................................................173 Hydraulic trailer brake....................................................89
Brake fluid reservoir ....................................................112
Brakes, operation...........................................................88 I

C Idle periods .................................................................193

Instrument panel............................................................46
Cab..........................................................................56,177 Instruments and controls...............................................41
Cautions when using the PTO.......................................87
Cautions....................................................................10,13 L
CE Declaration of Conformity......................................213
Check your equipment...................................................15 Locking the differential..................................................90
Cleaning.........................................................................16 Lubricants and fuels.....................................................220
Controls and instruments............................................. 41 Lubricants.....................................................................220

D M

Danger symbols.............................................................11 Main clutch, control pedal.............................................64

Dangerous operations....................................................25 Maintenance at request ..............................................142
Maintenance...........................................................16,135
E Maintenance, 100 hours..............................................156
Maintenance, 1000 hours............................................165
Electrical system..........................................................185 Maintenance, 250 hours..............................................159
Electro-hydraulic PTO.....................................................82 Maintenance, 500 hours..............................................162
Electronic hitch............................................................120 Mechanical power take-off............................................81
Equipment, checks........................................................15 Mechanically controlled hitch......................................116
Message to the operator...............................................10
F
O
Filters, maintenance............................................136 - 137
Four wheel-drive front axle...................................91 - 101 Operation.......................................................................61
Front axle, 2WD..............................................................91
Fuel...............................................................................140 P
Fuses....................................................................181, 189
Parking brake..................................................................88
Power Five gearbox........................................................70
Power Shuttle gearbox.............................................70, 74

7
Pre-delivery.......................................................................7
Protective clothing.........................................................13

221
Alphabetical index

R
Regular use..................................................................7, 9
Risk of overturning . ......................................................21
Risks from noise ...........................................................31
Road circulation rules ...................................................27
Road transport................................................27,133, 134
Routine maintenance guide.........................................136
Running in....................................................................138

S
Safety decal locations - All markets...............................32
Safety Decal Locations - North American Tractors........37
Safety frame . ........................................................12, 132
Safety notes.....................................................................9
Safety.............................................................................10
Seat .............................................................................. 54
Speed Five gearbox........................................................65
Starting and stopping the engine..................................62
Starting the engine in cold weather.........................17, 62
Starting the tractor.........................................................63
Steering wheel...............................................................52
System checks...............................................................14

T
Technical specifications...............................................195
Three-point linkage......................................................110
Tow hook......................................................................217
Towing attachments.....................................................217
Tractor identification........................................................6
Triple pump and front control valves...........................130

U
Use of the tractor on public roads.................................27
Use of the tractor...................................................7, 9, 61

W
Warning and caution......................................................11
Warranty...........................................................................7
Weights and dimensions.............................................196
Wheel track adjustment........................................91÷101
Wheel tyres..................................................................102
Wheels and tyres.........................................................102
Working in safety...........................................................19

222
 Contents Directive 2010/52/EC

Operator’s manual Valpadana 3600

N° 2010/52/EC Section
4.1 In particular or in addition to the requirements in standard ISO 3600:1996, the operator’s manual
shall cover the following:
a adjustment of the seat and suspension related to the ergonomic position of the operator with 3
respect to the controls and in order to minimise the risks from whole body vibration;
b use and adjustment of the system for heating, ventilation and air-conditioning, when provided; 3
c starting and stopping of the engine; 2, 4
d location and method of opening of emergency exits; 3
e boarding and leaving the tractor; 2, 3
f the hazard area near to the pivot axis of articulated tractors; NA
g use of special tools, if any are provided; 2
h safe methods used for service and maintenance; 2
i information about the interval of inspection of hydraulic hoses; 2, 5
j instructions about how to tow the tractor; 4
k instructions about the safe use of jacks and recommended jacking points; 2, 4
l hazards related to batteries and fuel tank; 2, 5, 6
m prohibited use of the tractor, where overturning hazards exist with mention that the list is not 2
exhaustive;
n residual risks, related to hot surfaces, such as filling of oil or coolant in hot engines or transmis- 2, 4,
sions; 5, 6
o the level of protection of the Falling Objects Protective Structure, if applicable; 1, 2
p the level of protection against hazardous substances, if applicable; 1, 2, 6
q the level of protection of the Operators Protection Structure, if applicable; 1, 2
4.2 Attaching, detaching and working with mounted machinery, trailers and interchangeable towed
machinery:
a a warning to strictly follow the instructions outlined in the operator’s manual of the mounted or 2
trailed machinery or trailer, and not to operate the combination tractor-machine or tractor-trailer
unless all instructions have been followed;
b a warning to stay clear from the area of the three-point linkage when controlling it; 2, 4
c a warning that mounted machinery must be lowered on the ground before leaving the tractor; 2, 4
d speed of the power take-off drive shafts in function of the mounted machinery or trailed vehicle; 4, 7
e a requirement to use only power take-off drive shafts with adequate guards; 2, 4
f information about hydraulic coupling devices and their function; 4
g information about the maximum lift capacity of the three-point linkage; 4, 7
h information about the determination of the total mass, the axle loads, the tyre load carrying capacity 4, 7
and the necessary minimum ballasting;
i information about the available trailer braking systems and their compatibility with the trailed vehicles; NA
j the maximum vertical load on the rear hitch, related to the rear tyre size and type of hitch; see 7 7
relevant approval documents
k information about using implements with power take-off drive shafts and that the technically pos- 2, 4
sible inclination of the shafts depend on the shape and size of the master shield and/or clearance
zone, including the specific information required in case of PTO type 3 with reduced dimension;
l a repeat of the data on the statutory plate about maximum allowed trailed masses; 7
m a warning to stay clear from the area between tractor and trailed vehicle. 2

223
Contents Directive 2010/52/EC

N° 2010/52/EC Section
4.3 Noise declaration: 7
The operator’s manual shall give the value of the noise at the operator’s ear, measured according
to Directive 2009/76/CE of the European Parliament and of the Council and the noise of the tractor
in motion measured according to Annex VI to Directive 2009/63/CE of the European Parliament
and of the Council.
4.4 Vibration declaration: 7
The operator’s manual shall give the value of the vibration level measured according to Council
Directive 78/764/EEC;
4.5 Relevant operating modes of a tractor that can reasonably be expected and identified as contain-
ing particular hazards are the following:
a work with front-end loader (risk of falling objects); 2
b forestry application (risk of falling and/or penetrating objects); 1, 2
c work with crop sprayers, mounted or trailed (risk of hazardous substances). 1, 2
4.5.1 Front-end loader:
4.5.1.1 The operator’s manual shall outline the hazards associated with front-end loader work, and ex- 2
plain how to avoid those hazards.
4.5.1.2 The operator’s manual shall indicate the fixation points on the body of the tractor where the 7
front-end loader must be installed, together with the size and quality of the hardware to be used.
If no such attachment points are foreseen, the operator’s manual shall prohibit the installation of
a front-end loader.
4.5.1.3 Tractors fitted with programmable hydraulic sequencing functions shall provide information on NA
how to connect the loader hydraulics so that this function is inoperable.
4.5.2 Forestry application:
4.5.2.1 In case of use of an agricultural tractor in a forestry application, the identified hazards are the NA
following:
a toppling trees, primarily in case a rear-mounted tree grab-crane is mounted at the rear of the NA
tractor;
b penetrating objects in the operator’s enclosure, primarily in case a winch is mounted at the rear NA
of the tractor.
4.5.2.2 The operator’s manual shall provide information about the following:
a the existence of the hazards described in point 4.5.2.1; NA
b any optional equipment that might be available to deal with those hazards; NA
c fixation points on the tractor where protective structures can be fixed, together with the size NA
and quality of the hardware to be used. When no means are foreseen to fit adequate protective
structures, this shall be mentioned;
d protective structures may consist of a frame protecting the operating station against toppling NA
trees or (mesh) grids in front of the cab doors, roof and windows;
e the Falling Objects Protection System level, if provided; NA
4.5.3 Work with crop sprayers (risk of hazardous substances):
The protection level against hazardous substances, in accordance with EN 15695-1:2009, must 1, 2, 6
be described in the operator’s manual".
NA: Not Applicable

224
 NOTE
This manual has been published for worldwide circulation. The standard
and optional equipment and the availability of individual models may vary
from one country to the next. Argo Tractors reserves the right to undertake
modifications without prior notice to the design and technical equipment at
all times without this resulting in any obligation whatsoever to make such
modifications to units already sold. Whilst every effort is made to ensure
that the specifications, descriptions, photographs and illustrations in this
manual are correct at the time of going to print, these are also subject
to change without prior notice. The photographs and illustrations used in
this manual may show optional equipment or may not show all standard
equipment. Any reproduction or translation, even partial, is forbidden
without the written authorization of Argo Tractors.

225
 To ensure
long and efficient
service from your tractor
use only

spare parts

recommended lubricants

226